Ers 5000 Techsim Man Diesel 32/40 Twin Medium Speed Engine + CPP - Ro-Pax Ferry

ERS 5000 TechSim
MAN Diesel 32/40 Twin Medium Speed Engine

+ CPP – Ro-Pax Ferry
Trainee Manual
Issue Date: October 2014
Copyright: © Transas MIP Ltd. 1991–2014. All rights reserved.
The information contained herein is proprietary to Transas MIP Ltd. and shall not be duplicated in whole or in part. The technical details contained in this manual are accu-
rate at the date of issue but are subject to change without notice.
Transas MIP Ltd. pursues a policy of continuous development. This may mean that the product delivered has additional enhancements not yet covered by the latest version
of this manual.
The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.
MAN Diesel 32/40 Twin Medium Speed Engine + CPP – Ro-Pax Ferry. Trainee Manual
Introduction . Introduction

MAN Diesel 32/40 Twin Medium

Speed Engine + CPP – Ro-Pax Ferry
Trainee Manual
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Chapter 4. Systems & Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Chapter 5. Instructions for Operating Machinery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Chapter 6. Alarms & Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

3
Introduction
Introduction contains the general description of the simula-
tor architecture and prototype vessel.
Transas MIP Ltd. — October 2014

Introduction . Introduction

Introduction
This chapter contains:
1. Printing House Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2. Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3. The Ship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4. Simulator Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.1. Consoles Button Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4.2. Unified System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.3. 3D Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
5. General Controls in Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5.1. SET-DIFF Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5.2. Viscosity Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

5
Introduction . Abbreviations

1. Printing House Conventions E/S

ECC
Engine Side
Engine Control Console
M.G.P.S.
M/E (ME)
Marine Growth Prevention System
Main Engine
ECR Engine Control Room MCD Main Circuit Diagram
Sample of notation Usage comments EEOT Emergency Engine Order Telegraph MSB (MSBD, MSWB) Main Switch Board
Router.exe To highlight messages, commands, files EMCY (EM’CY) Emergency O.W.S. (OWS) Oily Water Separator
and other Windows OS information ESB Emergency Switch Board MT Machine Telegraph
New To highlight menu items EXH Exhaust P.C.O. (PCO) Piston Cooling Oil
Button To highlight buttons F.O. (FO) Fuel Oil P/P (PP) Pump(s)
Log To highlight path to a file, folder F.W. (FW) Fresh Water PAH Pressure Alarm High
Exit To highlight names of windows, pages, F/E Finishing with Engine PAL Pressure Alarm Low
interface elements, etc. FF Fire Fighting PDB Power Distribution Board
Refer to To highlight references and links. FP Feeder Panel PID Proportional Integral Derivative
<Enter> To highlight keyboard key names FPP Fixed Pitch Propeller PMS Power Management System
G/E (GE) Generator Engine R/U Ready For Use
GB Generator Breaker RCS Remote Control System
2. Abbreviations
GBX Gear Box S.W. (SW) Sea Water
GSP Group Starter Panel S/B Stand-By
H.F.O. (HFO) Heavy Fuel Oil S/G (SG) Steering Gear / Shaft Generator
ACB Air Circuit Breaker H.T. (HT) High Temperature S/T Stern Tube
AHU Air Handling Unit HPP Hydraulic Power Pack SC Sea Chest
AMS Alarm Monitoring System HPU Hydraulic Power Unit SH. Shut
AOP Additional Operator Panel I.G.G. (IGG) Inert Gas Generator SL. Slow
BCD Battery Charger/Discharger J.W. (JW) Jacket Water STP Sewage Treatment Plant
BMCS Boiler Monitoring & Control System L.O. (LO) Lube Oil T/C (TC) Turbo compressor
BW Bilge Well L.P. (LP) Low Pressure TAH Temperature Alarm High
C.F.W. (CFW) Cooling Fresh Water L.S. (LS) Low Sulfur TAL Temperature Alarm Low
CHP Cargo handling Post L.S.H.F.O. (LSHFO) Low Sulfur Heavy Fuel Oil TI Temperature Indication
C.S.W. (CSW) Cooling Sea Water L.S.M.D.O. (LSMDO) Low Sulfur Marine Diesel Oil TIAH Temperature Indicator Alarm High
C/R Control Room L/T (LT, L.T.) Low Temperature TK Tank
CB Circuit Breaker LAH Level Alarm High TOH Thermal Oil Heater
CCC Cargo Control Console LAL Level Alarm Low VIT Variable Injection Timing
CCU Central Control Unit LCP Local Control Panel W Water
CMS Control & Monitoring System LGSP Local Group Starter Panel WF Water Fog
DGU DEIF Generator Unit LIAH Temperature Indicator Level High
DU Display Unit LOP Local Operating Panel
E/G (EG) (EmG) Emergency Generator M.D.O. (MDO) Marine Diesel Oil
E/R (ER) Engine Room M.G.O. (MGO) Marine Gas Oil

6
Introduction . The Ship

3. The Ship
The simulator is modeling the Propulsion Plant, Electric Power
Plant, Control & Monitoring System (CMS), auxiliary systems,
equipment, units and mechanisms of a general Ro-Pax ferry.
Ship general characteristics:

Max. continuous power 4 000 kW at 750 RPM
Length overall 125 meters
Breadth, moulded 23.4 meters
Designed draft, moulded 5.3 meters
Dead weight 3 000 dwt
Service speed ~ 18.8 knots at 90% MCR
Ro-Pax ferry general view

7
Introduction . Simulator Architecture
Consoles Button Bars
4. Simulator Architecture • Displays of the page SYS contain mimics of the ship’s sys-
tems. They model manual remote and local control of the
The VDHW pages of the Virtual Hardware console are:
• GSP1 – No. 1 Group Starter Panels;
The simulator of a Ro-Pax ferry has the Propulsion console and respective units and mechanisms.
• FP1 – MSB No. 1 Feeder AC440V upper and lower panels;
Virtual Hardware console comprising all displays to control and • The following pages model equipment control in the ship
monitor the ship’s systems, units and mechanisms. engine rooms: • G1 – Generator 1 upper and lower panels;
űű SG – Steering Gear room page; • G2 – Generator 2 upper and lower panels;

The bottom bar of the simulator screen contains buttons with
page names. Pages consist of displays. Click a button to open űű CHP – Cargo Handling Post page; • SYN – MSB Synchro upper and lower panels;
the page submenu. The list of displays of a selected page űű MER1 – Main Engine Room 1 page; • BUS – Bus Tie upper and lower panels;
opens in the drop-down (actually, pull-up) menu. Figures • G3 – Generator 3 upper and lower panels;
űű MER2 – Main Engine Room 2 page;
shows the simulator Propulsion and Virtual Hardware consoles
űű AER – Aux Engines Room page; • GSP2 – No. 2 Group Starter Panels;
button bars, and an example page menu.
űű BTR – Bow Thruster Room page; • FP2 – MSB No. 2 Feeder AC440V upper and lower panels;
4.1. Consoles Button Bars űű FFR – Fire Fighting Room page. • 220V – MSB AC220V Feeder upper and lower panels.
űű EmG – Emergency Generator room page. • EG – Emergency Generator LOP panel;

The pages (buttons on the button bar) of the Propulsion con-
sole are described in brief below: The displays of a page menu contain mimics of the Local • ESB – Emergency Switchboard and Shore connection panels;
Operating Panels (LOPs) of the units and mechanisms, switch- • DM1 – Generator 1 DM controller panel.
• Displays of the page BCC model the Bridge control console
boards (SWBDs), power distribution boards (PDBs), group • DM2 – Generator 2 DM controller panel;
panels;
starter panels (GSP), etc. and the 3-D pictures of the engine
• Displays of the page ECR model the Engine Control Room • DM3 – Generator 3 DM controller panel;
rooms where applicable.
control console panels; • ME 2 – Main Engine 2 LOP;
• Displays of the page MSB model the Electrical Power Plant • ME 1 – Main Engine 1 LOP;
Main Switchboard control panels; • Shaft Gen – Shaft Generator upper and lower panels;
• Displays of the page CMS model Control and Monitoring • Bow Thruster – BT upper and lower panels;
System remote control displays on the ECR desk; • Full – unified system diagram (as video wall).
• Displays of the page CID model the diagnostic Cylinder
Indicator Diagrams of the Main propulsion and Diesel en-
gines of the generators; Example pop-up menu (FFR page)
Bottom bar of the Propulsion console

8
Unified System Diagram
4.2. Unified System Diagram

The unified system diagram is designed to control the ship systems Click on the menu item Full on the virtual DHW console
and demonstrate their interaction and interconnections. It is imple- bottom bar to open the diagram.
mented as a video wall comprising four “vertical” monitors (touch
screen feature is supported) at resolution of 1920x1080 each.

9
3D Visualization
4.3. 3D Visualization
Photographic pictures of the Bridge, Engine Control Room,
MSB Room, Cargo Handling Post, Fire Fighting Room and
Emergency Generator Room are displayed for the background
of respective pages to provide realistic view.
Engine room pages contain 3D simulation displays of the re-
spective location. The 3D displays are implemented for:
• Steering Gear room (SG page);
• Main Engine room 1 (MER1 page);
• Main Engine room 2 (MER2 page);
• Aux Engines room (AER page);
• Bow Thruster room (BT page).
Examples are presented on the figures below. 3D display of MER1 page 3D display of AER page
To give a look-over of the room click and hold the right mouse
button while moving it around: the 3D scene will rotate. Zoom
in and out the scene using the mouse wheel. Click and hold
the left mouse button to move the scene around the display.
Direct control from 3D displays is implemented for Main En-
gines LOPs (see Chapter 1 for description), Steering Gears LOP,
and Aux Diesel Engines LOPs (see Chapter 4 for description).
Picture of ECR

10
Introduction . General Controls in Simulator
SET-DIFF Controllers
5. General Controls in Simulator 5.2. Viscosity Controller

Pumps (fans, compressors) can be manually controlled from The controller is used to setpoint the fuel oil viscosity or tem-
CMS, group starter panels (GSP) located on the switchboards, perature values for fuel oil systems’ automatics and to monitor
and from the local control panels (LOP). the viscosity and temperature of the FO.
The descriptions of GSP, general pump LOP and Thermocon-

troller panel are given in Chapter 4, the section 1.
5.1. SET-DIFF Controllers

Controllers can set temperature, pressure for automatic control
of a unit operation.
• Controller contains:
The controller display in the indication mode outputs the actu-
űű The display to show the actual temperature (pressure); al viscosity value in the upper line and the actual temperature
űű DIFF regulator to set the value controlling the unit value in the lower line.
automatic stop – when the temperature (pressure) is
The LED indicators illuminate as follows:
below the RANGE-DIFF value;
űű SET T (SET P) illuminated latched button; click the button • K1 – the Viscosity alarm occurs.
to operate the RANGE regulator; the button illuminates, • K2 – the output Temperature alarm occurs.
the display shows the set value; click the button again to • K3 – the Power failure alarm occurs.
lock the value; the button lights down;
• K4 – the control valve triggers.
űű RANGE knob to set the temperature (pressure) value
Click the P button to enable the more and less buttons and
upon reaching which the unit will stop.
change the viscosity setpoint value in the upper line.
Click the P button again to confirm the setting and return to
the indication mode.
The figure displays a general view of the controller, which can

vary in ship systems.

11
Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant

This chapter contains the description of the simulator tools for
training the watch personnel of the vessel in skills of correct
operating the Ro-Pax Ferry Propulsion Plant.

Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant . Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant

Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant

1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.1. Propulsion Plant Control Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2. PP Remote Control from Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1. Propulsion Control from Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1.1. Propulsion Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1.2. Control Position Change Over at Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3. PP Remote Control from ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.1. Propulsion Control from ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.1.1. Control Position Change Over at ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
4. Main Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.1. General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
4.2. ME Local Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.2.1. Control Position Change Over at LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.3. Operating ME from 3D Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.4. ME Bearings Monitoring Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.5. ME Turning Gear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
5. Cylinder Indicator Diagrams for ME & GE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.1. Analyzing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.2. Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.3. Exhaust Gases Emission Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

13
Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant . Introduction
Propulsion Plant Control Principles
1. Introduction 1.1. Propulsion Plant Control Principles

The propulsion system is designed to provide reliable, efficient Propulsion plant operation is supervised by a comprehensive
and economical motive power for the Ship in automatic, semi- CMS centred on the ECR (Engine Control Room). The system
automatic or manual propulsion modes to meet the ship’s may also be linked to the navigation bridge for automatic re-
demands in motion and manoeuvring under standard and mote control of propeller pitch and speed. Facilities for local
emergency conditions. control are provided adjacent to each propulsion unit. Machin-
ery spaces are designed for unattended operation.
The Propulsion Plant of the Ro-Pax ferry is a twin MAN B&W
Marine 8L 32/40 DE, medium speed, four-stroke cycle, single- Control and monitoring of the propulsion system is possible in:
acting, non-reversible, direct injection, two-stage sequential • Remote Automatic – ECR desk or from the BCC (Remote
exhaust turbo charging L-formation diesel engine with CPP. Driving control only);
The Ship Propulsion Plant simulation is designed for training • Auxiliary Remote – ECR desk;
the engine room watch personnel in skills required for the • Local Automatic – relevant LOP, with assistance
proper operation of the Propulsion Plant, including: from ECR desk;
• Preparation of equipment/systems for operation, startup • Local Manual – relevant LOP, with no assistance
and shutdown; from ECR desk.
• Operating the PP when manoeuvring the ship; Simultaneous control is possible from one station only. Control
• Monitoring of operation using variable parameters; changeover between the Bridge, ECR and local panels/stations
is performed using the following rules:
• Trouble shooting.
In addition to training in practical skills, the simulator allows • Remote control from the ECR or the Bridge is possible for all
the user to learn the basic principles of the arrangement, func- PP mechanisms and systems. The Bridge Control Console
tions and interaction of PP components and systems. (BCC) can be used in Remote Automatic control mode only.
Local control panels/stations in ER allow local control only,
The parameters and features of simulated mechanisms and when necessary (e.g. emergency, maintenance);
systems correspond to the real life as the simulator models all
• Local control panels and stations have the control priority.
main physical processes (heat, mechanical, gas- and hydrody-
Control transfer to the remote mode is performed at the
namic, and electrical) in their interaction.
local control panel/station;
• ECR control has priority over Bridge control. Control trans-
fer to the ECR is performed by a request from ECR to the
Bridge and requires request confirmation from the ECR.
Control transfer from the ECR to the Bridge is performed
by a request from the Bridge and request confirmation at
the ECR.

14
Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant . PP Remote Control from Bridge
Propulsion Control from Bridge
2. PP Remote Control from Bridge

Displays of the page BCC contain the Propulsion, Bow Thruster,
Steering Gear, Fin Stabilizers, Fire and Safety station, and emer-
gency control. Propulsion control is described below and other
panels descriptions are given in Chapter 4.
2.1. Propulsion Control from Bridge

Click the menu item Bridge Propulsion Control of the page BCC to
open the display for remote control of the Propulsion Plant.
2.1.1. Propulsion Control Panel

The PROPULSION CONTROL PANEL contains:
• SPEED knt digital indicator of speed in knots;
• MAIN ENGINE PORT and MAIN ENGINE STBD gauges to dis-
play RPM, PITCH and SPEED SHAFT values of respective ME;
• Two Emergency Engine Order Telegraphs (EEOT) for use if
the Machine Telegraph fails; to operate the EEOT turn the
central knob to required position on the scale; the respec-
tive button starts flashing, and buttons flash on the tele-
graph repeaters in ECR and Engine room LOP; at the same
time audible signal starts; when the command is acknowl-
edged at the ECR/ER the button lights up continuously on
all telegraphs and audible signal stops;
• Machine Telegraph (MT) for remote control of PP. On the
bridge MT operates in two modes: when control is at the
bridge, MT sets the PP parameters (pitch only, or ME revo-
lution speed and pitch) for Remote Control System; when
control is at ECR, MT operates as telegraph; for control
transfer between bridge and ECR the pointers’ positions
should match;
• E/R DEADMAN SYSTEM lamps, which illuminate to indicate
system status: SYSTEM ON and E/R DEADMAN ALARM; see
the description in Chapter 4.

15
Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant . PP Remote Control from Bridge
Propulsion Control from Bridge
The description given below is for PP control at Port side. Stbd Propulsion Clutch Control
side control is similar to Port.
The panel PROPULSION CLUTCH contains:
ME Control • RFU indicating lamp, which illuminates when the clutch
The panel contains: can be engaged;
• CLUTCH OUT button to disengage the CPP clutch; the button
• ECR CONTROL button; the button flashes during control posi-
illuminates when the clutch is disengaged;
tion change over, illuminates continuously to indicate the
Propulsion plant control from ECR; • CLUTCH IN button to engage the CPP clutch; the button
illuminates when the clutch is engaged; it is possible to
• BRIDGE CONTROL button; the button flashes during control
engage the clutch only when the pitch is zero; the but-
position change over, illuminates continuously to indicate
ton is disabled when the pitch >0 (the RFU lamp is not
the Propulsion plant control from Bridge;
illuminated).
• COMBINAT–CONSTANT two-position switch to set the ME
operation mode: 2.1.2. Control Position Change Over at Bridge
űű COMBINAT – simultaneous control of ME speed and CPP 1. Control is at the Bridge: BRIDGE CONTROL
pitch by defined characteristics curve: MT position –> ME button is illuminated.
rpm –> CPP pitch;
›› To request change over, click and hold ECR CONTROL button
űű CONSTANT – set the ME constant speed (750 rpm) to till it starts flashing. When control is accepted and con-
connect the shaft generator; propulsion speed is regu- firmed at the ECR the button illuminates continuously.
lated by the CPP pitch only.
2. Control is at the ECR: ECR CONTROL button is
• LOCAL CONTROL indicating lamp, which illuminates when illuminated. Change over request from ECR comes
ME control is carried out from the ER local control panel; Pitch Control in: BRIDGE CONTROL button starts flashing.
• EMERGENCY STOP button with protection cover to stop the ›› To confirm control change over, click BRIDGE CONTROL but-
The panel PITCH CONTROL contains:
ME in emergency condition; click once to open the cover, ton; it illuminates continuously.
click second time to click the button. • EMCY PITCH CONTROL two-position switch OFF–ON for
selection of non-follow up control mode; Note: For control transfer between bridge and ECR the MT
Alarm Indicator Lamps • AHEAD latched button to adjust pitch to AHEAD; the but-
pointers’ positions should match.
The lamps illuminate to indicate the following cases: ton illuminates when active;
• REDUCE POWER – power is reduced by the load control • ASTERN latched button to adjust pitch to ASTERN; the but-
system; ton illuminates when active.
• SHUT DOWN and SLOW DOWN – the safety system stopped • LOCAL CONTROL indicator lamp, which illuminates when
or slowed down the ME; CPP is operated from LOPs (use menu items CPP ME PORT
LOP or CPP ME STBD LOP of the page MER1 and description in
• ADJUST PITCH TO ZERO – during adjustment to zero.
Chapter 4).

16
Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant . PP Remote Control from ECR
Propulsion Control from ECR
3. PP Remote Control from ECR

3.1. Propulsion Control from ECR
Click the menu item ECR Propulsion Control of the page ECR to
open the display for remote control of the Propulsion Plant.
Common Operations Controls

• DEADMAN MAIN PANEL – see the description in Chapter 4,
the paragraph 6.1 on page 135;
• Sub-panel in the centre of the display with FUEL OIL
switch, and FO VISCOSITY controls are described in Chap-
ter 4, the paragraph 1.3.3.1 on page 93;
• ME PORT and ME STBD identical panels for remote control
of the respective ME and CPP;
• Two Machine Telegraphs for remote control of the PP from
ECR. One pointer of the telegraph corresponds to the ac-
tual position of the telegraph handle in ECR, and the other
pointer displays the order at the Bridge; for control transfer
between bridge and ECR the pointers’ positions should
match;
• Two EEOT repeaters for use should the MTs fail; the button
flashes on the telegraph repeater and audible signal starts
on demand from the bridge; click the button at the bot-
tom of the repeater plate to acknowledge the demand; the
demanded button lights up continuously on all telegraphs,
and audible signal stops;
• CONSTANT SPEED indicating lamp, which illuminates when
the ME runs at constant speed (750 rpm) and the shaft ME Control • STOP button to stop the ME; click and hold the button; it
generator can be connected; propulsion speed is regu-
The ENGINE RPM NFU CONTROL panel contains: flashes during ME shutdown, then illuminates continu-
lated by the CPP pitch only.
ously signalling that the ME is stopped;
• Gauges to monitor the parameters of ME and CPP systems. • START button to start the ME; click and hold the button; it
flashes during ME startup, then illuminates continuously • RPM regulator for NFU speed control;
The description given below is for ME PORT side. ME STBD side
signalling that the ME is in operation; • LOCAL CONTROL indicator lamp, which illuminates when
controls are similar to PORT.
ME is controlled from the LOP.

17
Propulsion Control from ECR
Three-position switch is used to select (acknowledge) the con- • CLUTCH IN button to engage the clutch; the button illumi-
trol position: nates when the clutch is engaged; it is possible to engage
• ECR; BRIDGE – set to control from ECR/bridge; the clutch only when the PITCH ZERO and READY TO
CLUTCH lamps are illuminated;
• ECR NFU – set to operate CPP pitch from ECR PITCH NFU
CONTROL panel. • CLUTCH OUT button to disengage the clutch; the button il-
luminates when the clutch is disengaged;
ME Load Control and Safety System The PITCH NFU CONTROL panel contains:
The LOAD CONTROL panel contains: • PITCH LOCAL indicating lamp, which illuminates when the
• LOAD CONTROL OFF lamp, which illuminates when active. CPP is operated in local control mode (NFU);
• PITCH REDUCED lamp, which illuminates when active; • CPP PUMP 1 (2) STAND BY lamps, which illuminate when
• Two-position switch to turn on the ME protection system; respective pump is in standby mode;
set to position 1 (on) before connecting high load thruster • CPP PUMP 1 (2) RUNNING lamps, which illuminate when
motor; the load control protection system will prevent respective pump is running;
the ME rpm drop when the load reaches the limit: it first • PITCH AHEAD button to control the pitch in ECR NFU mode;
reduces the CPP pitch, and if pitch reduction to zero is still the button illuminates when active;
insufficient then slows down the ME; • PITCH ASTERN button to control the pitch in ECR NFU mode;
• LOAD LIMIT SETPOINT Port regulator; the scale is in %; the button illuminates when active.
The SAFETY SYSTEM panel contains:
3.1.1. Control Position Change Over at ECR
• SHUT DOWN and SLOW DOWN alarm indicators, which illu-
minate when the ME was stopped or slowed down by the 1. Control is at the ECR: ECR CONTROL lamp is
safety system; illuminated. Change over request from the Bridge
comes in: BRIDGE CONTROL lamp starts flashing.
• EMCY STOP button with protection cover to stop the ME in
emergency; click once to open the cover, click second time ›› To accept control change over, turn three-position switch
to operate the button; to BRIDGE position; BRIDGE CONTROL lamp illuminates
continuously.
• CONSTANT SPEED lamp, which illuminates when active.
2. Control is at the Bridge: BRIDGE
Pitch and Propulsion Clutch Control CONTROL lamp is illuminated.
The CLUTCH CONTROL panel contains: ›› To request change over, turn three-position switch to ECR
position; ECR CONTROL lamp starts flashing. When control
• CLUTCH LOCAL lamp, which illuminates when the clutch is is accepted and confirmed at the Bridge the button illumi-
operated in local control mode (NFU); nates continuously.
• READY TO CLUTCH lamp, which illuminates when it is pos- Note: For control transfer between bridge and ECR the MT
sible to engage the clutch; pointers’ positions should match.
• PITCH ZERO lamp, which illuminated when active;

18
General Description
4. Main Diesel Engine

4.1. General Description
The propulsion main diesel engine (ME) modeled in the simu-
lator is type MAN B&W Marine 8L 32/40 DE, medium speed,
four-stroke cycle, single-acting, non-reversible, direct injec-
tion, two-stage sequential exhaust turbo charging L-formation
diesel engine. Two MEs are mounted on the vessel. The engine
drives the gearbox through a flexible coupling. The drive can
be engaged and disengaged using a hydraulically operated
clutch. The clutch is operated by gearbox oil pressure. The out-
put from the gearbox then drives the CPP shaft and propeller.
The main characteristics of the ME are listed below:
Тype MAN B&W Marine 8L 32/40

Bore 320 mm
Stroke 400 mm
Number of cylinders 8
Service standard power 4000 kW
Rated speed 750 rpm
Note: Speed 750 rpm available for shaft generator drive only.
Port ad Stbd Reduction Gears (with power take-off for Shaft
Generator for ME Stbd only).

19
ME Local Control Panel
4.2. ME Local Control Panel • SPEED CONTROL two-position switch, to select between:
űű NORMAL – starting at fuel;
Click on the menu item ME Local Panel of the page MER1 to open
űű BLOCKED is used when repairing the engine or to pre-
the display with identical ME PORT LOCAL and ME STBD LO-
vent it from starting at fuel, but blowing by starting air.
CAL control panels of the MEs. The ME PORT LOCAL panel is
described below. • EXH GAS TEMPERATURE gauge to monitor exhaust gases
temperature (use the arrow buttons to browse cylinders);
The panel contains:
• A set of gauges to monitor parameters of ME systems.
• ECR–LOCAL two-position control mode selector switch to
choose control from ECR or LOP; 4.2.1. Control Position Change Over at LOP
• LOCAL CONTROL indicator lamp, which illuminates when 1. To request control at the LOP, turn ECR–LOCAL switch
control is from this LOP; to position LOCAL . LOCAL CONTROL lamp illuminates.
• READY TO START indicator lamp, which illuminates when No confirmation from the ECR is required.
the starting prerequisites for the engine have been met; 2. To return control to the ECR, turn ECR–LOCAL
when illuminated the engine is ready for use; switch to position ECR. ECR CONTROL lamp starts
• TURNING GEAR ENGAGED indicator lamp, which illumi- flashing on ECR desk (see the paragraph 3.1.1 on
nates when the turning gear is engaged; page 18). The LOCAL CONTROL lamp lights down
• START BLOCKED alarm indicator, which illuminates indicat- when control change over is accepted at ECR.
ing that the engine cannot be started because the start Note: Control position change over will occur only when
prerequisites have not been met; RPM settings match in both locations. It is recommended to
• BLOWING button to turn the engine using the air start mo- set either 0 or 100% setting for change over.
tor without actual engine starting; click and hold the but-
ton for operation;
• START button to start the ME locally; the button illuminates
when the ME is running;
• STOP illuminated button to stop the ME locally;
• SHUT DOWN and SLOW DOWN alarm indicators, which illu-
minate when the ME was stopped or slowed down by the
safety system;
• RESET button to reset the engine protection system after
the protection fault has been rectified;
• ME PORT EMCY STOP button to stop the ME in emergency;
• ENGINE RPM gauge;
• RPM SETTING regulator to set the ME rpm locally;

20
Operating ME from 3D Page
4.3. Operating ME from 3D Page

Manual control of the Main Engines is modeled on the 3D view of the MER1 page.
The LOP is described in the paragraph 4.2 on page 20.
ME STBD LOP

21
ME Bearings Monitoring Panel
4.4. ME Bearings Monitoring Panel

Click on the menu item ME Bearings Monitoring of the page MER1
to open the display for monitoring the ME Bearings state using
identical panels for Port and Stbd monitoring systems.
The ME Port BEARINGS MONITORING SYSTEM panel contains:
• SYSTEM ACTIVE indicator lamp, which illuminates when
the monitoring system is on;
• AUTO SHUT DOWN indicator lamp, which illuminates when
the system commands the engine to shutdown in the
event of a high bearing temperature;
• SYSTEM ALARM indicator lamp, which illuminates when a
fault occurs within the monitoring system;
• PRE-ALARM indicator lamp, which illuminates when any
alarms appeared;
• RESET button to reset the monitoring system;
• The system display unit, which presents the information
about the bearings’ state, and contains a set of buttons to
browse the information screens.
Click SPLASH TEMP. VALUES button to display SPLASH-OIL TEMP. Click MAIN BEARINGS TEMP. VALUES button to display MAIN BEAR-
Click MAIN OVERVIEW button to display OIL MONITORING screen VALUES of the bearings: INGS TEMP. VALUES of the main bearings:
(default view). The screen contains:
• The gauge to monitor the ME revolution speed;
• ACTIVE indicator lamp, which illuminates when the moni-
toring system is on;
• SHUTDOWN indicator lamp, which illuminates when the
system commands the engine to shutdown in the event of
Click SPLASH DEV. TEMP. VALUES button to display SPLASH-OIL Click ACKN button to acknowledge alarm conditions.
a big bearing temperature;
DEV. TEMP. VALUES of the bearings:
• PRE-ALARM indicator lamp, which illuminates when any
alarms appeared;
• SYSTEM-ALARM indicator lamp, which illuminates when a
fault occurs within the monitoring system;
• The window to display alarm messages, which contain the
alarm time, textual description and status.

22
ME Turning Gear Panel
4.5. ME Turning Gear Panel

Click on the menu item ME Turning Gear LOP of the page MER1 to
open the display for local control of the Turning Gears. The de-
scription given below is for TURNING GEAR ME Port. The panel
TURNING GEAR ME STBD is similar to Port.
The panel TURNING GEAR ME Port contains:

• MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker to turn power off/on;
• SOURCE indicator lamp, which illuminates when the turn-
ing gear unit is powered and ready for use;
• Ammeter to monitor the turning gear load;
• DISENGAGE–ENGAGE two-position handle switch for simu-
lation of gear operation; set the required position of the
handle using the mouse;
• CW button to set the ME clockwise rotation; the button
illuminates when the gear is engaged in this position;
• STOP button to stop the turning gear;
• CCW button to set the ME counterclockwise rotation;
the button illuminates when the gear is engaged in this
position.
Switch the power supply 440 V for:
• TURNING GEAR ME Port on the No.1 AC440V FEEDER PANEL
(use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by
the ME PORT TURNING GEAR circuit breaker;
• TURNING GEAR ME Stbd on the No.2 AC440V FEEDER PAN-
EL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by
the ME STBD TURNING GEAR circuit breaker.

23
Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant . Cylinder Indicator Diagrams for ME & GE
Analyzing
5. Cylinder Indicator Screen Content

The following parameters are displayed:
Diagrams for ME & GE • Pi – mean effective pressure;
Analyzing comprises: • Pz – maximum combustion pressure;
• Hand Unit for recording of pressure in • Pc – compression pressure;
each engine cylinder (Indicator Diagram) – • φpz – timing angle;
step by step;
• φign – angle of combustion start;
• Data transfer to main unit for next analyzing
• Slide # – the measurement slide number;
and comparison.
• Total – total slides in the sequence.
Comparison comprises:
The diagram horizontal axis is the cylinder
• Stationary device; crankshaft angle, vertical axis is pressure.
• Simultaneous analyzing and comparison
Three curves are output for each cylinder:
of recorded indicator diagrams of differ-
ent engine cylinders; • Indicator diagram curve;
• “P–φ” type and “P-V” type Indicator • Injector needle value lift curve;
diagrams. • Combustion rate curve;
5.1. Analyzing • Dynamics of fuel injection.

Injection ON/OFF handle in the simulator is
Click on the menu item Analysing of the page used to imitate raising of the booster pump
CID to open the display for measurement of roller over the drive cam to prevent fuel injec-
the cylinders’ pressure. tion into selected cylinder at the pressure
The display contains: measurement time. When the handle is in OFF
position, the resulting diagram presents the How it Works
• The hand measuring device simulation; cylinder pressure curve as function of piston Use the UP and DOWN arrowed buttons to
1. Click the I/O button to switch browse through the measurement slides
• Injection handle to set in ON/OFF position; stroke without fuel injection and, respective-
the measuring device on. sequence on the device screen.
• The cylinder selection box; click on the ly, without combustion.
2. In the cylinder selection box Use the DATA TRANSFER button to send all col-
down arrow sign to open the drop-down
choose the required cylinder. lected data to the Comparison unit (refer to
list of cylinders and choose the required
one for measurement. 3. Click the MEASUREMENT button to start the paragraph 7.2 on page 44). After the data
measuring. The parameters of the cylinder has been transferred it is excluded from the
will appear on the device screen. slide sequence.
4. Repeat the procedure for 5. Click the I/O button to switch
all required cylinders. the measuring device off.

24
Comparison
5.2. Comparison
Click on the menu item Comparison of the page CID to open the
display for comparison of parameters in different cylinders.
The display contains:
• The Chart area with the legend on top of it;
• The Cylinders Selection panel;
• The Table area;
• The panel to set the diagram’s scaling and presentation.
How it Works
Provided you have measured the cylinders’ parameters and
transferred the data (refer to the paragraph 7.1 on page 45).
Open the cylinder trees in the selection panel on the right and
check the required measurement data for comparison. The
diagrams will be painted in the chart area using different col-
ors for convenience.
For each cylinder the three diagrams are output on the P–φ
chart using different line style as explained in the legend at the
top of the chart area. The P–V chart contains one diagram for
each of the selected cylinders.
The table area displays the selected cylinder parameters:
• Pz – maximum combustion pressure;
• Pc – compression pressure;
• Pi – mean effective pressure;
• Phi pz – timing angle; The Scale panel contains: • φ fields to set the MIN and MAX values of the angle
• Phi ign – angle of combustion start. parameter (horizontal axis);
• φ° field to move the vertical hairline pointer along the
Use the P–φ button to compare the diagrams, where the hori- horizontal axis with the up and down arrows to increase/ • P fields to set the MIN and MAX values of the pressure
zontal axis is the cylinder crankshaft angle and the vertical axis decrease the value; the pointer is handy to find the exact parameter (vertical axis).
is pressure. angle of a curve inflexion point, etc.; The scale panel is not used for the P–V chart presentation.
Use the P–V button to compare the diagrams, where the horizon- • RESET button to clear the scale adjustment settings to
tal axis is the cylinder volume and the vertical axis is pressure. default;

25
Exhaust Gases Emission Panel
5.3. Exhaust Gases Emission Panel

The exhaust gases analyzing sensors are located in the funnel.
Click on the menu item Exhaust Gases Emission of the page CID to
open the display, which contains four panels with information
on current exhaust gases emission of:
• MAIN ENGINE PORT;
• MAIN ENGINE STBD;
• GE 1 ENGINE;
• GE 2 ENGINE;
• GE 3 ENGINE .

26
Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System

The chapter contains the description of the simulator
page, which contains the displays of the Control and
Monitoring System.

Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System . Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System

Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System

1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 5.3. Fuel Oil Service System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1.1. Operating CMS Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 5.4. HFO Transfer & Treatment System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
1.1.1. Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 5.5. MDO Transfer & Treatment System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.1.2. Indication of Alarms on Mimic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 5.6. Lube Oil System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.1.3. Remote Valves Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 6. Auxiliaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.1.4. Standby Pairs and Auto Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 6.1. Compressed Air System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1.1.5. Fast Switching Between Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 6.2. Thermal Oil System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
2. CMS Main Menu Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 6.3. Ballast System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3. Propulsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 6.4. Bilge & Fire System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.1. Propulsion Overview Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
6.5. Ventilation System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
3.2. CPP Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
6.6. Chilled Water System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.3. ME Port and ME Stbd Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7. Support Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.4. ME Bearing Temperatures Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 7.1. Alarm List Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4. EPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 7.2. Event List Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.1. Electric Power Plant Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.3. Trends Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.2. Generators Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
5. Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.1. LT & HT Cooling Systems Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.2. SW Cooling System Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

28
Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System . Introduction
Operating CMS Displays
1. Introduction 1.1.1. Layout

The layout of the display areas is applicable for all CMS displays. • TOTAL UNАCK – digital indicator to display the total num-
The displays of the Control and Monitoring System (CMS) in
Three independent areas, described below are available. ber of unacknowledged alarms in the system.
the simulator are designed for remote supervision of the vessel
systems from the Bridge and ECR. The simulator CMS is not full The top part of each display of the CMS page contains the panel, The central part of the display is occupied by the application
replica of Ro-Pax ferry on board system, however it simulates all where alarm statuses of the vessel systems, ME PS and SB con- area, which contains the selected process display or list. The
functionality of real systems and allows the trainee to familiarize trol position, and Deadman system state are displayed: process displays have been constructed using:
oneself with the general features and use.
The alarm condition in a system is displayed by respective • Static background picture;
In the simulator the change of state of units and mechanisms in alarm indicator highlight in red. When an alarm has been • Static and dynamic primitives and figures;
various vessel systems is displayed simultaneously on the CMS acknowledged by the ACCEPT button on the bottom bar or on
• Numeric and alpha-numeric indicators; indicator flashes in
page and SYS page displays, and on the displays of appropriate Alarms list display, but the cause of the alarm has not been re-
changed color in alarm condition;
LOPs. When referring to the SYS displays in this Chapter, refer to moved, then indication changes color to continuous magenta.
the detailed description of the respective displays in Chapter 4. • Bar graphs.
When the alarm cause is removed, then light on the system
indicator goes off. Each primitive or figure can use dynamic attributes allocated
An alarm is generated when a failure occurs in equipment
for the presentation of process, such as figure name, color, and
monitored by the CMS system. The alarms, which have to be The bottom part of the displays is occupied by the two-row
flashing. As an example a bar from a bar graph will change its
acknowledged by ECR Desk operators to inhibit audible (tone) panel with functional buttons:
height in response to measured value changes. For other fig-
and visual (flashing) indicators, are automatically added to the
• SILENCE – button to switch off the audio alarm signal; ures the change can be displayed by means of the figure color.
List of Alarms and to the Event Log. When a failure is rectified
the alarm is removed from the list of alarms but not from the • ACCEPT – button to acknowledge the alarm signal, which is The set of possible statuses is presented on each display in the
Event log. Operators can view the log at any time. currently displayed in the output box; form of the LEGEND. An example is presented on the figure:
• ALARM LIST – button to jump to the “Alarm List” display
1.1. Operating CMS Displays from any other display of “CMS” page;
Operating the CMS displays requires the general knowledge • EVENT LIST, TREND, MAIN MENU – buttons to jump to the dis-
of the layout and graphical representation of the information plays Event List, Trend, and Main menu from any other
on screen including the objects’ construction and color. The display of CMS page;
guidelines are described in the sections below. • Output box – to display the latest occurred alarm; the box
is located in the center of the panel;
Top panel of the CMS display
Bottom panel of the CMS display

29
Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System . Introduction
Operating CMS Displays
The pipelines and figures of pumps, compressors, etc. are

displayed with the color respective to the flowing matter. The
1.1.4. Standby Pairs and Auto Control 2. CMS Main Menu Display
state of electrical chains and equipment is designated by color In the arrangement of duty/standby pair of pumps, fans, com- Click the CMS page button on the simulator bottom bar to
too. The following colors are used: pressors, the operating logic is set as follows. On the Group open the Main Menu of the Control and Monitoring System.
Starter Panel at MSB start one of the mechanisms and set both
• Light blue color for the fresh water pipes; to CMS control by the MSB–CMS switch. On the respective The menu display is divided into four groups:
• Green color for the sea water pipes; CMS display then click ST-BY latched button (it highlights) for PROPULSION; EPP; SYSTEMS; AUXILIARIES.
• Orange color for the hydraulic and thermal oil pipes; the second mechanism. Another option would be to set both Click a button to open the required CMS display.
mechanisms to CMS control on GSP and then from the CMS
• Light brown color for the MDO pipes; The displays are described in the respective sections of the
display double-click to start one of them, and click ST-BY button
• Dark brown color for the HFO pipes; Chapter 2.
for the second mechanism.
• Grey color for compressed air system;
Units under CMS control are marked by CMS labels; units under
• Green color for electrical chains free of load; remote control from MSB GSP are marked by MSB labels.
• Magenta color for electrical chains under load.
Displays contain buttons in the top left corner for fast switch-
ing to other displays of the same section.
1.1.2. Indication of Alarms on Mimic

Digital indicators flash in red when parameter value falls out of
the range. When alarm is acknowledged but the alarm condition
has not been cleared, the indicator lights in continuous red.
Similar logic is applied to set automatic operation by AUTO but-
Fault indicators highlight in red when a fault occurs. When tons on CMS displays when a mechanism is under CMS control.
acknowledged it changes color to magenta, and lights down
when fault condition has been cleared. 1.1.5. Fast Switching Between Displays
The display can contain a set of buttons in the upper left cor-
1.1.3. Remote Valves Control ner above the system diagram. The buttons are designed to
Remote valves are operated by double-click. When the mouse allow fast switching to the systems of the same menu group,
hovers over a controlled valve the cursor changes its shape: for instance, PROPULSION OVERVIEW and CPP displays.
from “arrow” to “hand”:
The valve open state is displayed by the color of flowing mat-

ter. Closed valve is colored by background color.

30
Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System . Propulsion
Propulsion Overview Display
3. Propulsion
The PROPULSION section of the CMS menu comprises the dis-
plays to supervise the propulsion plant, CPP and both MEs.
3.1. Propulsion Overview Display

Click on the PROPULSION OVERVIEW button in the PROPULSION
section of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the display PRO-
PULSION OVERVIEW.
The group of the control and operation mode indicators:

• Port LEVER and Stbd LEVER digital indicators;
• AIR INTAKE digital indicators of temperature and pressure;
• BRIDGE and ECR indicators highlight the ME Port and ME
Stbd control location;
• LOG Kt ship speed digital indicator.
Two identical panels are designed for supervision of the STEER-
ING GEAR Port and STEERING GEAR Stbd pumps operation.
Each ENGINE panel contains digital and lamp indicators of the

respective ME state:
• REMOTE and MANUAL indicators illuminate when the ME
is under remote control from the ECR/Bridge or manual
from the LOP;
• A set of digital indicators display the speed, pressure and
temperature of the ME support systems;
• SHUTDOWN and SLOWDOWN indicators illuminate when Each CPP panel contains digital and lamp indicators of the re-
the ME is shutdown/slowdown by engine safety system; spective CPP state:
• LIMIT indicator illuminates when the ME protection from • REMOTE and LOCAL indicators illuminate when the CPP is in
overload is activated on ECR desk; remote control from the ECR/Bridge or local from the LOP;
• OVERLOAD indicator illuminates when the ME is in over- • A set of digital indicators display the pressure and tem-
load state. perature of the CPP support systems;
Each CLUTCH panel contains lamp indicators of the respective Each SHAFT panel contains digital indicators of the respective
clutch ENGAGED and DISENGAGED state: shaft state: SHAFT RPM, TORQUE, PITCH, POWER .

31
CPP Display
3.2. CPP Display • Pumps controls: double-click to operate the pump, when
under remote control (see the legend); AUTO button: click
Click on the CPP button in the PROPULSION section of the CMS to set the pumps run in automatic mode;
MAIN MENU page to open the CPP display, where the general • READY CLUTCH and CLUTCH IN indicators.
CPP system diagram and parameters are presented.
The set of digital indicators and alarm indicator boxes:
The PROPULSION CONTROL panel in the centre of the display
• THRUST BEARING temperature; HIGH alarm indicator illu-
contains the following indicators of ship propulsion engines:
minates when the temperature > 60°C.
• Port LEVER and Stbd LEVER digital indicators; • STERN TUBE FWD/MIDDLE/AFT BEARING temperatures;
• LEVER ACTIVE indicator; HIGH alarm indicators illuminate when temperature > 65°C.
• CONTROL BRIDGE and ECR indicators highlight the PP Port • STERNTUBE HEADER TANK LEVEL LOW alarm indicator illu-
and PP Stbd control place; minates when tank level < 20%;
• MODE CONSTANT and COMBINATOR indicators highlight • SHAFT RPM, PITCH %, TORQUE KNm, and POWER kW digital
the PP Port and PP Stbd operation mode; indicators display the parameters of respective CPP.
In CONSTANT mode ME Port runs at constant RPM irregard- The CPP CONTROLLER panel contains:
less of actual ship speed, thus the shaft generator can be
• RFU indicator – illuminates when control power is available;
connected and activated;
• REMOTE and LOCAL control position indicators.
• SAFETY SYSTEM FAIL and CONTROL SYSTEM FAIL Port /
Stbd indicators highlight in respective alarm condition. The HPU panel contains:
The rest of the mimic displays the Port and Stbd sides of the • The diagram of the hydraulic power pack unit with the
CPP system. The description given is for the Port side. Stbd side pumps’ parallel connection, the inlet filter with FILTER
is similar to Port. CLOGGED alarm indicator;
• Pumps controls: double-click to operate the pump, when
under remote control (see the legend); ST-BY buttons: click
to set the pump operate as st-by;
The GBX panels contains: • CPP OIL TANK LEVEL LOW alarm indicator, which illumi-
nates when the level < 10%;
• LOW LEVEL alarm indicator, which illuminates when the oil
level < 10%; • STBY ALARM indicator, which illuminates when the St-by
pump has started;
• STBY ALARM indicator, which illuminates when St-by pump
has started; • HIGH TEMPERATURE alarm indicator, which illuminates
when the temperature > 65°C;
• The diagram of the gearbox pumps’ parallel connection
with the inlet filter, the FILTER CLOGGED alarm indicator • LOW PRESSURE alarm indicator, which illuminates when
(pressure <0.6 bar); the pressure < 20 bar.

32
ME Port and ME Stbd Displays
3.3. ME Port and ME Stbd Displays

Click on the ME Port button in the PROPULSION section of the
CMS MAIN MENU page to open the MAIN ENGINE Port display.
Click on the ME Stbd button in the PROPULSION section of the
CMS MAIN MENU page to open the MAIN ENGINE Stbd display.
The displays are identical, the description given below is for
the ME Port display.
The digital indicators ENGINE, POWER, FUEL RACK , FUEL CON-
SUMPTION, and RUN HOURS display the respective parameters
of the ME.
The central part of the display presents the ME parameters:
• CHARGER AIR pressure and temperature indicators;
• START AIR pressure indicator;
• CONTROL AIR pressure indicator;
• Indicators, which illuminate in the following cases:
űű OVERLOADING alarm – the ME is overloading;
űű READY FOR START – the ME is ready for start;
űű START BLOCKED – the SPEED CONTROL switch on the ME
LOP is in BLOCKED position;
űű START INTERRUPT alarm – the ME start failed;
űű TURN GEAR ENGAGED – the turning gear is engaged; ME
cannot be started;
űű OIL MIST alarm – oil mist detector shows the high value.
• EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURES digital indicator and bar The TC group contains digital indicators: The HT, LT WATER COOLING panel contains:
graph in each cylinder; • A set of digital indicators for monitoring the pressure and
• RPM indicator to display the engine speed;
• AVERAGE EXH digital indicator and bar graph of the aver- temperature of the cooling system;
• AFTER TC indicator to display the exhaust gas temperature
age exhaust gas temperature; • HT PUMP AUTO START indicator, which illuminates when
after the turbocharger;
• EXHAUST GAS DEVIATIONS TEMPERATURES digital indica- HT St-by pump has started;
• BEFORE TC indicator to display the exhaust gas tempera-
tor and bar graph in each cylinder. • LT PUMP AUTO START indicator, which illuminates when LT
ture before the turbocharger;
St-by pump has started.
• AIR INTAKE indicator to display the compressed air tem-
perature before the turbocharger.

33
ME Port and ME Stbd Displays
The SEA WATER COOLING panel contains: The SHUTDOWN panel contains the common indicators The SLOWDOWN panel contains the common indicators
• Digital indicators for monitoring the seawater pressure for the ME shutdown alarms. The SHUTDOWN indicator il- for the ME slowdown alarms. The SLOWDOWN indicator
and temperature; luminates when any ME shutdown by protection system illuminates when any ME slowdown by protection system
occurred; the cause of shutdown is specified by highlight occurred; the cause of slowdown is specified by highlight
• SW PUMP AUTO START indicator, which illuminates when
of the panel indicators: of the panel indicators:
SW St-by pump has started.
The FUEL panel contains: • EMCY STOP; • EXH GAS BEFORE TC HH;
• Digital indicators for monitoring the fuel pressure, viscos- • OVERSPEED ; • EXH GAS CYL. OUT HH;
ity and temperature; • L.O. INLET PRESSURE LL; • EXH GAS DEV. HH;
• FO FEED PUMP AUTO START indicator, which illuminates • GBX LO PRESSURE LL ; • L.O. INLET TEMP HH;
when Feed St-by pump has started; • SPLASH OIL TEMP DEV. HH ; • MAIN BEARING TEMP;
• FO BOOSTER PUMP AUTO START indicator, which illumi- • TC L.O. INLET PRESSURE LL; • L.O. DUPLEX FILTER DIFF P;
nates when Booster St-by pump has started;
• TC L.O. TEMP HH; • HT WATER OUT TEMP H .
• HP FO LEAKAGE alarm indicator.
• MAIN BEARING TEMP HH;
The LUBE OIL panel contains:
• HT WATER OUT TEMP HH .
• Digital indicators for monitoring the lube oil pressure and
temperature;
• FO FEED PUMP AUTO START indicator, which illuminates
when the Feed St-by pump has started.

34
ME Bearing Temperatures Displays
3.4. ME Bearing Temperatures Displays

Click on the ME Port BEARING TEMP button in the PROPULSION
section of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the ME Port
BEARING TEMPERATURES display. Click on the ME Stbd BEAR-
ING TEMP button in the PROPULSION section of the CMS MAIN
MENU page to open the ME Stbd BEARING TEMPERATURES
display. The displays are identical, the description given below
is for the ME Port BEARING TEMPERATURES display.
The group SPLASH OIL TEMPERATURES contains:
• The bar graphs to display the temperature in each cylinder;
• SPLASH OIL TEMP HIGH alarm indicator, which illuminates
when the temperature > 85° C.
The group SPLASH OIL DEVIATION TEMPERATURES contains:
• The bar graphs to display the deviation temperature in
each cylinder;
• SPLASH OIL TEMP HIGH DEV alarm indicator, which illumi-
nates when the temperature difference > 2° C;
• SPLASH OIL TEMP HH DEV alarm indicator, which illumi-
nates when the temperature difference > 3° C.
The group MAIN BEARING TEMPERATURES contains:
• The bar graphs to display the temperature in each main
bearing location;
• BEARING TEMP HIGH alarm indicator, which illuminates
when the temperature > 95° C.
The AVERAGE bar graph displays the average splash oil
temperature.

35
Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System . EPP
Electric Power Plant Display
4. EPP
The EPP section of the CMS main menu comprises the displays
to supervise the electrical power plant, Shaft and Diesel gen-
erators and the Power Management System (PMS).
4.1. Electric Power Plant Display

Click on the ELECTRIC POWER PLANT button in the EPP section
of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the ELECTRIC POWER
PLANT diagram. Only monitoring is available.
The identical parameters, ACBs and switchboards are present-

ed for the GEN 1, GEN 2, GEN 3, SG and EMG:
• COMMON ALARM indicator illuminates if any of the respec-
tive generator or ACB alarm conditions occurs;
• A set of digital indicators display the voltage, current, fre-
quency, power and power factor values;
• EARTH FAULT alarm indicator illuminates when the earth
fault occurs;
• ST-BY indicator illuminates when the EMG is in standby.
PREF TRIP (PT1) and PREF TRIP (PT2) alarm indicators illuminate
when the respective preferential tripping has occurred.
BOW THRUSTER motor state is displayed and the following BT
state indicators, which illuminate when:
• START REQUEST – BT motor needs to start but power ca-
pacity is not sufficient; EPP load is displayed by four bar graphs. Load level indication it is opened by the menu item MSB Synchro Panel of the page MSB,
100%, 90%, 30% on the GEN 1, GEN 2, GEN 3 bar graphs help see description in Chapter 3).
• CLEAR TO START – BT motor can start;
to evaluate the relative capacity. Reverse power is displayed in
PMS BLOCKED indicator is not illuminated, and START SEQUENCE
• POWER AVAILABLE – when the electric power plant can red at the bottom of the bar.
deliver the required power supply; box contains indicator lamps, which display the settings per-
TOTAL LOAD and RUNNING CAPACITY digital indicators display formed on the MSB Generator Panels and MSB Synchro Panel
• RUNNING – BT is running.
actual values. (use respective menu items of the page MSB).
To switch PMS on, turn the SYNCHRO & POWER CONTROL switch PMS BLOCKED indicator is illuminated when Bus Tie is open, or
to the AUTO position on MSB SYNCHRO PANEL (in the simulator shore power is connected, or SG is connected to the bus.

36
Generators Display
4.2. Generators Display

Click on the GENERATORS button in the EPP section of the CMS The SHAFT GEN section contains the ME and generator indicators,
MAIN MENU page to open the GENERATORS display. which illuminate in the following cases:
The header of a GEN section highlights in green when the respec- • ME RUNNING – when the ME is running;
tive generator is in operation. • CLUTCH IN – when the clutch is engaged;
• CONSTANT RPM – when the ME is running at constant
speed (750 rpm) for connecting the generator;
• CLUTCH ALARM – when the clutch is in alarm state;
• UNDERSPEED alarm– when the ME speed < constant speed
750 rpm;
• SHUTDOWN alarm – when the ME is shutdown by the pro-
tection automatics;
• EM.STOP OPERATED alarm – when the ME was stopped in
emergency.
• GENERATOR state is displayed by indicators, which illumi-
nate in the following cases:
űű EXCITATION – when the generator is exciting;
űű C/B TO MSB CLOSED – when the generator powers MSB;
űű C/B TO BOW THRUSTER CLOSED – when the generator
powers the bow thruster;
űű C/B TO MSB TRIPPED and C/B TO BOW THRUSTER
TRIPPED alarm – when the generator CB is tripped;
űű COMMON ALARM – when any generator alarm occurs;
• The set of digital indicators to display Generator actual
running parameters.

37
Generators Display
Each of three identical GEN 1, GEN 2 , GEN 3 sections con- The EMCY GEN section panels contain the EMCY engine and
tains the diesel engine and generator indicators: generator and battery charger state and alarm indicators,
which illuminate in the following cases:
• ENGINE state and alarm indicators, which illuminate in the
following cases: • On ENGINE panel:
űű LOCAL and REMOTE – to indicate control mode; űű ENGINE ST-BY – when the EMCY generator engine is in
űű STARTING, RUNNING, COOLDOWN – to indicate actual standby mode;
operating state; űű RUNNING – when the EMCY engine is running;
űű FAIL TO START alarm – when the engine fails to start; űű COMMON ALARM – when any EMCY engine alarm
űű EM.STOP OPERATED alarm – when the Engine was occurred;
stopped in emergency. űű START FAIL alarm – when the EMCY engine fails to start;
• ENGINE set of digital indicators to display actual values of űű SHUTDOWN ACTIVE alarm – when the EMCY engine is in
the engine system parameters: starting and boost air pres- shutdown process.
sure; exhaust gases temperature; cooling, lubricating and • On GENERATOR panel: digital indicators of the generator
fuel supply system temperature and pressure; actual running parameters;
• F.O. INLET LOW PRESSURE alarm – when pressure < 3.5 bar; • On BATTERY CHARGER panel:
• FUEL LINE LEAK alarm – when there is a leakage condition űű AC PRESENT – when the AC exists;
in the fuel supply line.
űű DC FAULT alarm – when the DC charging fault occurs;
• GENERATOR state and alarm indicators, which illuminate in
űű CHARGER FAULT alarm – when the charger fault occurs;
the following cases:
űű BATTERY VOLTAGE digital indicator to display the actual
űű SYNCHRONISING – when the generator is synchronizing;
voltage value.
űű C/B CLOSED – when the generator CB is closed;
űű C/B TRIPPED alarm – when the generator CB is tripped;
űű AUTO SYNC. FAILURE alarm – when the generator auto-
matic synchronization failed;
űű COMMON ALARM – when any generator alarm occurred;
• Set of digital indicators to display actual values of the gen-
erator running parameters.

38
Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System . Systems
LT & HT Cooling Systems Display
5. Systems
The SYSTEMS section of the CMS main menu comprises the
displays to supervise the ship’s FO, LO, cooling water systems.
5.1. LT & HT Cooling Systems Display

Click on the LT & HT COOLING SYSTEMS button in the SYSTEMS &
AUXILIARIES section of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the
LT HT COOLING diagram.
The LT lines on the mimic are colored in light blue; the HT lines
are colored in dark blue. Digital pressure gauges and tempera-
ture indicators display the actual temperature and pressure of
the cooling water.
The pumps on the mimic are operated when under remote
control (see the legend). Double-click to start/stop a pump.
Use ST-BY (AUTO) button to set a pump standby (automatic) op-
erating mode. Control logic is described in the paragraph 1.1.2
on page 30. Magenta labels MSB/CMS explain a pump cur-
rent remote control location.
The mimic contains:
• The expansion tanks LT EXP. TK , ME Port EXP. TK , and ME
Stbd EXP. TK , each provided with:
űű Level bar graph and digital indicator;
űű LOW LEVEL alarm indicator, which illuminates when the
level is < 10%.
• LT CW Harbour Pump control; • ME PS and ME SB cooling units, each provided with: • The Nozzle Cooling Module contains:
• LT CW Pump 1 (2) controls provided with: űű HT Preheating Pump control and AUTO button, űű Nozzle cooling expansion tank with the level bar graph;
űű ST-BY buttons; űű HT CW Electric Pump control with the ST-BY button; űű Pump 1 (2) controls with the ST-BY button;
űű STBY ALARM indicator, which illuminates when st-by űű HT CW Driven Pump state indicator; the pump starts űű Digital indicators of the ME inlet and ME outlet pressure
pump has started. when ME starts; and temperature;
űű STBY ALARM indicator, which illuminates when st-by űű STBY ALARM indicator, which illuminates when st-by
pump has started. pump has started.

39
SW Cooling System Display
5.2. SW Cooling System Display

Click on the SW COOLING SYSTEM button in the SYSTEMS & AUX-
ILIARIES section of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the SEA
WATER COOLING SYSTEM diagram.
The mimic presents the seawater suction subsystem of the SW

cooling system, comprising:
• Sea water cooling units in engine rooms;
• Upper Sea Chest and Lower Sea Chest with valves and
filters;
• SW PUMP 1, 2, 3 controls and ST-BY buttons; control logic is
described in the paragraph 1.1.2 on page 30;
• STBY ALARM indicator, which illuminates when st-by pump
has started;
• FWG – fresh water generator;
• Pipelines with valves and gauges.

40
Fuel Oil Service System Display
5.3. Fuel Oil Service System Display

Click on the FUEL OIL SERVICE SYSTEM button in the SYSTEMS sec-
tion of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the FUEL OIL SER-
VICE SYSTEM diagram.
L.S. designation on the tanks denote low sulfur fuel oil content.
The mimic contains:
• L.S.HFO Service Tank No 1, HFO Service Tank No 2, L.S.MDO
Service Tank No 1, and MDO Service Tank No 2; each tank is
provided with:
űű Level bar graph and digital indicator;
űű HFO heater unit in HFO tanks;
űű HIGH LEVEL alarm indicator, which illuminates when the
level is > 90%;
level is < 10%.
• FEED PUMPS No 1, No2 and BOOSTER PUMPS No 1, No2
controls and ST-BY buttons (control logic is described in the
paragraph 1.1.2 on page 30); each pumps pair has:
űű Digital indicator of discharge pressure and pressure drop
on the filter (Δ);
űű STBY ALARM indicator, which illuminates when st-by
pump has started.
• VISCOMETER unit with:
űű Digital indicators of the FO temperature and viscosity;
űű VISC ALARM indicator, which illuminates when the FO • ME PS and ME SB units, each comprising: Tanks are fitted with:
viscosity actual value > 20 cSt; űű Digital indicators of the FO inlet pressure and pressure • Level bar graph and digital indicator;
űű TEMP ALARM indicator, which illuminates when FO tem- drop on the filter (Δ); • Thermal oil heater unit;
perature actual value > 150 °C; űű FO LEAKAGE indicator, which illuminates when there is a • Quick closing valves, which are closed in emergency by
leakage in the high pressure sheathed fuel lines. the safety system.
• Pipelines with valves, gauges and connections to: MDO
BOILER, MDO TO INCINERATOR, MDO TO GEN 1 (2,3).

41
HFO Transfer & Treatment System Display
5.4. HFO Transfer & Treatment

System Display
Click on the HFO TRANSFER & TREATMENT SYSTEM button in the SYS-
TEMS section of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the HFO
TRANSFER & TREATMENT SYSTEM diagram.
The mimic contains:
• L.S.HFO Settling Tank 2, HFO Settling Tank 1, L.S.HFO Ser-
vice Tank 2, and HFO Service Tank 1 each provided with:
űű LEVEL HIGH alarm indicator, which illuminates when the
level is > 90%;
űű LEVEL LOW alarm indicator, which illuminates when the
level is < 10%.
• HFO Purifier 1 and HFO Purifier 2 units, each with the
ALARM indicator, which illuminates when there is an alarm
condition in the HFO purifier operation;
• Sludge Tank provided with:
level is > 90%.
• HFO TRANSFER PUMPS No 1 and No 2 controls and AUTO
buttons (control logic is described in the paragraph 1.1.2 on
page 30);
• LS HFO SETTLING button: click to fill the L.S.HFO Settling Tank 2;
• HFO SETTLING button: click to fill the HFO Settling Tank 1; • HFO Overflow Tank provided with: Tanks are fitted with:
űű LEVEL HIGH alarm indicator, which illuminates when the • Level bar graph and digital indicator;
level is > 90%; • Thermal oil heater unit;
űű OVERFLOW alarm indicator, which illuminates when the • Quick closing valve, which is closed in emergency by the
HFO Overflow Tank level is > 20%; safety system.
• HFO Bunker Tank 1 Port, HFO Bunker Tank 2 Port, L.S.HFO
Bunker Tank 1 Stbd, and HFO Bunker Tank 2 Stbd .

42
MDO Transfer & Treatment System Display
5.5. MDO Transfer & Treatment

System Display
Click on the MDO TRANSFER & TREATMENT SYSTEM button in the
SYSTEMS section of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the
MDO TRANSFER & TREATMENT SYSTEM diagram.
The mimic contains:
• L.S.MDO Settling Tank, MDO Settling Tank, L.S.MDO Ser-
vice Tank 2, and MDO Service Tank 1, each provided with:
level is > 90%;
űű LEVEL LOW alarm indicator, which illuminates when the
level is < 10%.
• MDO Purifier unit with the ALARM indicator, which illumi-
nates when there is an alarm condition in the MDO purifier
operation;
• Sludge Tank provided with:
űű The LEVEL HIGH alarm indicator, which illuminates when
the level is > 90%;
űű Connection from HFO Purifier 1 and 2.
• MDO TRANSFER PUMP control and AUTO button (control
logic is described in the paragraph 1.1.2 on page 30);
• LS MDO SETTLING button: click to fill the L.S.MDO Settling
Tank ;
• MDO SETTLING button: click to fill the MDO Settling Tank;
• MDO Overflow Tank provided with: • L.S.MDO Storage Tank Port, MDO Storage Tank Stbd;
Each tank is provided with:
level is > 90%; • Level bar graph and digital indicator;
űű OVERFLOW alarm indicator, which illuminates when the • Quick closing valve, which is closed in emergency by the
MDO Overflow Tank level is > 20%; safety system.

43
Lube Oil System Display
5.6. Lube Oil System Display

Click on the LUBE OIL SYSTEM button in the SYSTEMS section
of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the LUBE OIL SYSTEM
diagram.
The mimic contains:
• ME Port and ME Stbd lubricating systems; each system is
provided with:
űű ME LO Driven Pump state indicator; the pump starts
when ME Port is running;
űű LO Purifier;
űű LO Purifier Supply Pump state indicator; the pump is op-
erated from Purifier LOP;
űű ME LO Stand-by Pump control and AUTO button (control
logic is described in the paragraph 1.1.2 on page 30);
űű STBY ALARM indicator, which illuminates when st-by
pump has started;
űű The pipelines with digital indicators of LO pressure, tem-
perature and pressure drop on the filters.
• LO Transfer Pump state indicator; the pump is operated
locally from the LOP;
• Lube Oil Storage Tank provided with:
level is > 90%;
• Leakage Oil Collection Tank provided with:
level is < 10%.
• 2 x Lube Oil Service Tank, each provided with:
level is > 90%.
Each tank is provided with:
level is > 90%;
űű LOW LEVEL alarm indicator, which illuminates when the • Level bar graph and digital indicator;
level is < 10%. • Thermal oil heater unit.

44
Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System . Auxiliaries
Compressed Air System Display
6. Auxiliaries
The AUXILIARIES section of the CMS main menu comprises the
displays to supervise the ship’s compressed air, thermal oil, bal-
last, bilge & fire, ventilation and chilled water systems.
Buttons for fast switching between the displays of AUXILIARIES
section are present in the upper left corner of the mimic.
6.1. Compressed Air System Display

Click on the COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM button in the AUXILIARIES
section of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the COM-
PRESSED AIR SYSTEM diagram.
The mimic contains:

• № 1 G/E, № 2 G/E, № 3 G/E, ME Port, ME Stbd run indicators;
each engine has digital indicator of actual STARTING AIR
pressure; ME engines have digital indicators of actual CON-
TROL AIR pressure;
• № 2 Main Air Reservoir, № 1 Main Air Reservoir, Aux Air Res-
ervoir, DECK Service Air Reservoir, and EM’CY Shut-Off Air
Reservoir with automatic valves;
• EM’CY SHUT-OFF AIR PRESSURE LOW alarm indicator, which
illuminates when pressure < 5 bar;
• STARTING AIR COMPRESSOR 1 and 2 controls (double-click
to operate the compressor under remote control, see the
legend);
• Emergency Air Compressor and Deck Service Air Compressor
controls (double-click to operate the compressor under
remote control, see the legend);
• FAULT alarm indicators, which illuminates when the re-
spective compressor is stopped by fault condition;
• Connections to CONTROL AIR, SERVICE AIR DISTRIBUTOR,
EM’CY SHUT-OFF VALVES DISTRIBUTOR.

45
Thermal Oil System Display
6.2. Thermal Oil System Display

Click on the THERMAL OIL SYSTEM button in the AUXILIARIES sec-
tion of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the THERMAL OIL
SYSTEM diagram.
The mimic contains:

• EXH GAS ECONOMISER PORT, EXH GAS ECONOMISER STBD,
each economizer has digital indicators of the inlet, outlet
and exhaust gas temperature;
• Oil Fired Boiler with digital indicators of the inlet, outlet
temperature and exhaust gas temperature; burners indica-
tor lamps illuminate when burners run;
• Thermal Oil Circulating Pumps No 1 and No 2 controls
(double-click to operate the pump in remote control, see
the legend);
• Digital indicator of the pumps discharge pressure;
• STBY ALARM indicator, which illuminates when st-by pump
has started;
• Pipelines with valves and digital indicators of temperature,
pressure and drop pressure;
• THERMAL SYSTEM COMMON ALARM indicator panel, which
illuminates when any alarm from the Thermal Oil Heater
local control panel comes (see Chapter 4);
• Connections to: CONSUMERS SUPPLY and RETURN.

46
Ballast System Display
6.3. Ballast System Display

Click on the BALLAST SYSTEM button in the AUXILIARIES section
of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the BALLAST SYSTEM
diagram.
The mimic contains:
• Ten Water ballast tanks, each tank is provided with the
level bar graph and digital indicator;
• BALLAST PUMP No 1 (No 2) controls; double-click to oper-
ate the pump if the remote control mode is set to CMS (see
the label) on the pump GSP panel in MSB;
• Digital indicators of suction and discharge pressure for
each ballast pump;
• SEA CHEST, and pipelines with valves.

47
Bilge & Fire System Display
6.4. Bilge & Fire System Display

Click on the BILGE & FIRE SYSTEM button in the AUXILIARIES sec-
tion of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the BILGE & FIRE
SYSTEM diagram.
The mimic contains:

• FIRE MAIN PRESSURE digital indicator;
• CONTROL AIR PRESSURE LOW indicator, which illuminates
when pressure < 5 bar;
• BILGE FIRE PUMP 1, BILGE FIRE PUMP 2, BILGE FIRE PUMP 3,
controls; double-click to operate the pump if remote con-
trol mode is set on the pump on its MSB GSP panel (see
the legend and CMS label on the mimic); each pump is
provided with:
űű BILGE button: click to operate respective pump in BILGE
piping system; the button illuminates;
űű FIRE button: click to operate respective pump in FIRE
MAIN piping system; the button illuminates;
űű Digital indicator of the suction pressure.
• BILGE PUMP run indicator; the pump is in local control
from the LOP and Bilge Control Panel in FFR (see Chapter 4);
• EM’CY FIRE PUMP run indicator; the pump is in local con-
trol from the LOP (see Chapter 4);
• BW – bilge wells in the rooms with alarm indicators, which
illuminate when the level in the respective well > 75%;
• Dirty Water Tank alarm indicator, which illuminates when
the level > 90%;
• Pipelines with valves controlled from Bilge Control Panel in
FFR (see Chapter 4).

48
Ventilation System Display
6.5. Ventilation System Display

Click on the VENTILATION SYSTEM button in the AUXILIARIES sec-
tion of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the VENTILATION
SYSTEM display.
ENGINE ROOM panel contains the fans, which are in remote

control from MSB or CMS (double-click to start/stop respective
fan, if in remote mode, see the legend):
• No 1 SUPPLY FAN 1 control;
• No 2 SUPPLY FAN 2 control;
• No 3 SUPPLY/EXHAUST FAN control;
• No 4 SUPPLY/EXHAUST FAN control;
• SUPPLY and EXH buttons: click to set respective fan run in
required mode.
CARDECK PORT VENTILATION panel contains the run indicators
of fans, which are operated from the CARDECK VENTILATION
STARTERS panel in Cargo Handling Post (see Chapter 4):
• No 1 SUPPLY/EXHAUST FAN;
• SUPPLY and EXH indicator lamps, which illuminate to indi-
cate respective fan operating mode.
CARDECK STBD VENTILATION panel contains the run indicators
of fans, which are operated from the CARDECK VENTILATION
STARTERS panel in Cargo Handling Post (see Chapter 4):
• SUPPLY and EXH indicator lamps, which illuminate to indi-
cate respective fan operating mode.

49
Chilled Water System Display
6.6. Chilled Water System Display

Click on the CHILLED WATER SYSTEM button in the AUXILIARIES
section of the CMS MAIN MENU page to open the CHILLED WA-
TER SYSTEM diagram.
The mimic contains:

• Chilled Water Plant comprising:
űű Compressor 1 (2) run indicators; compressors are oper-
ated from the Chiller Plant LOP (see Chapter 4);
űű EMCY Stop button to stop the plant and compressors in
the case of emergency;
űű FAULT indicator.
• CHILLED WATER PUMP No 1 (No 2) run indicators; the
pumps are operated from the Chiller Plant LOP;
• AC Unit 1~14 located in the ship rooms; each unit can be
operated by start and stop buttons, and the unit running
state is displayed by run indicator.

50
Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System . Support Displays
Alarm List Display
7. Support Displays
7.1. Alarm List Display
Click on the ALARM LIST button in the bottom section of any
CMS page to open the display, which contains:
Alarms are displayed in the form of a table, where each alarm is

specified by:
• Textual Description;
• Actual parameter Value;
• Parameter measurement Unit;
• Parameter lower Limit 1;
• Parameter upper Limit 2;
• Alarm Status.
Click the ACKN button to acknowledge all alarms.
The ACKN status means that the alarm has been acknowl-
edged by the user. Status indicators of acknowledged alarm
are steady light. Status indicators of unacknowledged alarms
are flashing. When alarm condition is cleared, the alarm is de-
leted from the list.
Scroll bar to the right of the list is provided to scroll through
the table. Drag the slider using the mouse to fast scroll, or use
up and down arrows to line scroll.

51
Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System . Support Displays
Event List Display
7.2. Event List Display

Click on the EVENT LIST button in the bottom section of any CMS
page to open the EVENT LIST display.
Events are displayed in the form of a table, where each event is
specified by:
• Textual Description;
• Actual event parameter Value; the value can be:
űű In digital form;
űű ALARM status for unacknowledged alarm;
űű AL.ACKN status for acknowledged alarm;
űű MODEL status for events generated by the simulator;
űű INSTR status for events generated by the instructor.
• Event Date;
• Event Time.
Scroll bar to the right of the list is provided to scroll through
the table. The user can drag the slider using the mouse to fast
scroll, or use up and down arrows to line scroll.
7.3. Trends Display

Click on the TREND button in the bottom section of any CMS
page to open the TREND display.
Description of the available options and functionality is given
in the section Application ‘Trends’ of the manual ERS-5000_Gen-
eral_Trainee_Manual.pdf.

52
Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant

This chapter contains the description of the simulator module
for training the watch personnel of the Ro-Pax Ferry in skills
of correct operating the Ship Electrical Power Plant.

Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant . Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant

Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant

1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 4.3.3. PMS software unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 5.5. PS Group Starter Panels 1, 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
1.1. Plant Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 4.3.4. Display Unit (DU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 5.6. SB Group Starter Panels 1, 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2. Power Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 4.3.5. Load-dependent start/stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 5.7. MSB Feeder Panels 440 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.1. General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.3.6. Transfer of PMS start command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 5.7.1. MSB No. 1 AC440V Feeder Panel Consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.2. Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.3.7. Programming of start/stop priority sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 5.7.2. MSB No. 2 AC440V Feeder Panel Consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.3. Load Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
4.3.8. Automatic starting of diesel generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 5.8. MSB Feeder Panels 220 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3. Power Generation Control in Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.1. Generator Engine LOPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 4.3.9. GB ON sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 5.8.1. MSB AC220V Feeder Panel Consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.1.1. GE Lubricating & Cooling Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 4.3.10. GB OFF sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 6. Emergency Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.3.11. Deloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 6.1. General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.1.2. Operating Gen Engines from 3D Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
4.3.12. Automatic stop sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 6.2. EMCY and Preferential Tripping Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.2. Shaft Generator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
4.3.13. Blackout protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 7. EMCY Power Supply Control in Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.3. Shore Supply Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 7.1. EMCY Diesel Engine Local Operating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4. Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 4.3.14. Preferential tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.2. EMCY Generator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.1. General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 4.3.15. Sequential restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
7.3. ESB Consumers & Starter Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4.2. Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 5. Power Distribution Control in Simulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.1. Main Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 7.3.1. ESB 440v Feeder Panel Consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.2.1. Air Circuit Breakers (ACB) Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.2. Generator 1, 2 Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 7.3.2. ESB 220v Feeder Panel Consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4.2.2. ACB Principle of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.2.1. Operating DM4 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 7.4. Battery Charging & Discharging Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.2.3. Consumers’ CB Principle of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5.3. Generator 3 & Bus Tie Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 7.4.1. EMCY 24V DC Consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.2.4. ACB Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
4.2.5. Preferential Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 5.4. Synchronization Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
4.3. DM4 System and PMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 5.4.1. Automatic Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.3.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 5.4.2. Synchronizing in SWBD & PMS Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
4.3.2. Generator control software unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 5.4.3. Synchroscope Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

5.4.4. Light Synchroscope Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

54
Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant . Introduction
Plant Specification
1. Introduction 1.1. Plant Specification

The Ship Electrical Power System is designed to meet the vessel’s The ship EPP consist:
electrical power demands in standard and emergency conditions. • Shaft Generator – 440 V, 1160 kW, 1800 A, 60 Hz, 1800 RPM,
The Ship Electrical Power System simulator module is designed without Clutch;
for training the Engine Room watch personnel of the Ro-Pax • 3 x Generator – Caterpillar 3508B prime mover, 750 kVA,
ferry in skills of correct operating the vessel’s Electrical Power 600 kW, 440 V, 1000 A,60 Hz, 1200 RPM;
Plant (EPP), including: • 1 x Emergency Generator – Caterpillar 3406C prime
• Preparation of equipment/systems for their operation, mover (air cooled), 330 kVA, 260 kW, 440 V, 450 A, 60 Hz,
start-up, and shutdown; 1800 RPM;
• Monitoring of operation using variable parameters; • Main Switch Board (MSB): 2 x sections of 440 V Bus bar with
Bus-Tie Circuit Breaker (CB), Bus bar 230 V;
• Troubleshooting.
• Emergency Switch Board (ESB): Bus bar 440 V, Bus bar 230 V;
In addition to training in practical skills, the simulator allows
the Trainee to learn the basic principles of the structure, func- • Transformers: 2 x 440V/230V , EM’CY 2 x 440V/230V;
tions, and interaction of EPP components and systems. • 24V DC Batteries and Charger: 230V AC – 24V DC: for EM’CY
Generator engine starter and for supply of Charging and
Electrical Power system consists of the ship electrical power
Discharging distribution board 24 V DC – BCD;
plant, ship electrical network and power consumers. The ship
electrical network in turn consists of switchboards (MSB, ESB) • Power Distribution: sections 440 V, 230 V, 24 V DC Custom-
and electric cables (feeders). ers with CB and starters;
• Local panels and starters in ER.
The simulator composition corresponds to EPP standard setup,
parameters and performance of the simulated mechanisms
and systems, corresponds to the systems onboard ship.
The simulator module architecture comprises a set a displays
for monitoring of the EPP only. There are two displays in CMS:
ELECTRIC POWER PLANT and GENERATORS (described in
Chapter 2). A set of displays of the pages MSB, EmG and in MER
pages simulate the Switchboard panels, Group Starter panels
and Local Operating Panels of the generator engines.
The displays described in this chapter are opened from the
bottom menu page MSB, EmG and some of the engine rooms
pages of the simulator Propulsion Console.
Virtual Hardware console duplicates the EPP displays, which can
be distributed on a set of screens to provide realistic performance.

55
Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant . Power Generation
General Description
2. Power Generation
2.1. General Description 2.2. Major Components 2.3. Load Sharing
The main bus of the main switchboard is served by genera- The ship’s main power generation equipment comprises: Normally, as soon as two DGs are put on line, the automatic
tors, driven by their respective diesel engines. When the ship load sharing control function starts to control their governor
• Shaft Generator – 440 V, 1160 kW, 1800 A, 60 Hz, 1800 RPM,
is at sea one generator is usually in single operation. When the motors, so that each generator will be loaded to the same per-
without Clutch;
ship is entering/leaving port, one or two of the diesel genera- centage in reference to their rated kW output values and that
tors (DG) will be paralleled to main to cover the increased • 3 x Generator – Caterpillar 3508B prime mover, 750 kVA, the bus frequency will be maintained at the rated value.
power demand. 600 kW, 440 V, 1000 A,60 Hz, 1200 RPM.
Automatic voltage regulator (AVR) is used to control generator
The DGs may be set as stand-by to automatically start in emer-
voltage. The AVR type, includes all basic features necessary for
gency case.
automatic control of the generator voltage:
The Shaft Generator (SG) can be started when the Main Engine
• Voltage regulation;
is accelerated and set to constants speed. SG can power the MSB
at sea and is used separately for powering Bow Thruster motor • Reactive load compensation (voltage drop) for operation
at harbor. Parallel operation of SG and DGs is not possible. in parallel with other generators or utility network.
The circuit breakers have a gear motor spring operating
mechanism, powered at 110 V DC. The closing springs are au-
tomatically charged by gear motor immediately following the
closing command; in case of emergency, they can be charged
manually using the lever.
Shore power rating: 440 V, 60 Hz, 500 A.

56
Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant . Power Generation Control in Simulator
Generator Engine LOPs
3. Power Generation Control in Simulator

3.1. Generator Engine LOPs
Click on the menu item Generator Engine 1 LOP (Generator Engine 2
LOP, Generator Engine 3 LOP) of the page AER to open the display
with GENERATOR 1 ENGINE LOP and push button boxes: GEN 1
ENGINE ST-BY LT PUMP, GEN 1 ENGINE ST-BY HT PUMP, GEN 1
ENGINE PRELUB PUMP.
The description given is for the GENERATOR 1 ENGINE LOP and

pumps; other DG Engine LOPs are similar to GE 1 LOP.
The panel GENERATOR 1 ENGINE LOP contains:
• Imitation of the LCD with the gauges to monitor the pa-
rameters of Generator Engine systems on four screens:
űű LO PRESSURE, COOLANT OUT, VOLTAGE;
űű LO TEMP IN/OUT, COOLANT IN, COOLANT LEVEL;
űű EXH GAS TEMP 1/2, BOOST PRESSURE, run hours;
űű Alarms list (time/description/status).
• UP and DOWN buttons to browse through the LCD screens;
• ACKN button to acknowledge alarm conditions, which are
output to the Alarms list screen.
The panel below contains:
• EMERGENCY STOP button;
• Four-position switch to choose between:
• ALARM indicator, which illuminates when the engine alarm
űű MAN START;
state is output to the alarm LCD screen;
űű COOL DOWN STOP;
• EMCY TRIP alarm indicator, which illuminates when the
űű OFF / RESET – to reset the safety system after trip; EMCY stop button was pressed or Shutdown safety system
űű REMOTE – to set remote control mode. stopped the Aux engine.

57
3.1.1. GE Lubricating & Cooling Pumps

Three identical LOPs are used for control of the pumps on each
of the generator engine panels. See the description of the LOP
in Chapter 4, the paragraph 1.3.2 on page 92.
In AUTO mode the PRELUB PUMP starts automatically before DG
start; in AUTO mode the ST-BY LT PUMP and ST-BY HT PUMP start
automatically in the circumstances when driven pumps fail.
Switch power supply 440 V for:
• GEN 1 ENGINE ST-BY LT PUMP, GEN 1 ENGINE ST-BY HT
PUMP, GEN 1 ENGINE PRELUB PUMP on No. 1 AC440V FEED-
ER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page
MSB) by the No 1 G/E LT ST-BY PUMP STARTER, No 1 G/E
HT ST-BY PUMP STARTER and No 1 G/E LO PRIMING PUMP
STARTER circuit breakers;
PUMP, GEN 2 ENGINE PRELUB PUMP on No. 2 AC440V FEED-
ER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page
MSB) by the No 2 G/E LT ST-BY PUMP STARTER, No 2 G/E
HT ST-BY PUMP STARTER and No 2 G/E LO PRIMING PUMP
STARTER circuit breakers;
PUMP, GEN 3 ENGINE PRELUB PUMP on AC440v FEEDER
PANEL (use menu item ESB Consumers of the page EmG) by
the No 3 G/E LT ST-BY PUMP STARTER, No 3 G/E HT ST-BY
PUMP STARTER and No 3 G/E LO PRIMING PUMP STARTER
circuit breakers.

58
3.1.2. Operating Gen Engines from 3D Page

Manual control of the Generator Engines is modeled on
the 3D view of the AER page. The LOP is described in the
paragraph 3.1 on page 57.
GE LOPs

59
Shaft Generator Panel
3.2. Shaft Generator Panel

Click on the menu item MSB Shaft Gen Panel of the page MSB to
open the display with SHAFT GENERATOR panel.
Shaft generator can be put on bus only when the main engine
is accelerated and set to constant RPM mode.
The panel contains:
• SPACE HEATER , CONSTANT RPM, ACB OPEN, ACB CLOSED
– indicator lamps, which illuminate when the respective
condition is active;
• GEN AMMETER, POWER FACTOR, VOLTMETER – gauges to
monitor the generator parameters;
• EXCITATION – button to excite the generator;
• THERMO METER – digital indicators of the phases
“R PHASE”, “S PHASE” and “T PHASE” temperatures;
• AMMETER – four-position switch to select the measure-
ment on phases R, S, T, or switch OFF;
• SPACE HEATER – switch to turn heating OFF/ON;
• ACB TROUBLE RESET – button to reset ACB after trip condition;
• VOLTMETER – four-position switch to select the measure-
ment between phases R-S, S-T, T-R, or switch OFF;
• VR % – voltage regulator; turn the knob to manually adjust
generator voltage value according to the bus voltage value
(watch on the voltmeter);
• SHAFT GENERATOR ACB – see the operating description in

60
Shore Supply Panel
3.3. Shore Supply Panel

Click on the menu item EM’CY Gen Panel of the page EmG to
open the display with SHORE SUPPLY PANEL .
The panel contains:
• The gauge to control the shore connection phase
sequence:
űű PHASE SEQUENCE LED indicators of shore supply voltage
on three phases; indicators are illuminated if power is
available;
űű INCORRECT LED indicator is illuminated if phase se-
quence
is incorrect;
űű CORRECT LED indicator is illuminated if phase sequence
is correct.
Note: Indicators are illuminated when the instructor introduces
the faults: ‘Shore Supply Wrong Phase Sequence’ and ‘Shore Supply
Phase Break’ defect parameters.
• SUPPLY AVAILABLE – indicator lamp, which illuminates
when power is available;
• PHASE SEQUENCE TEST – button; click the button to operate
the phase sequence gauge;
• KW-h – watt hours meter;
• SHORE SUPPLY – power switch 500 A.
Attention! Generator ACBs closing is blocked when shore
supply is ON.
A phase sequence indicator is provided. Interlocking is pro-
vided between the ship’s generator ACBs, the emergency
generator ACBs and the shore supply breaker. The shore sup-
ply breaker cannot be closed if any generator ACB is closed.
Conversely, none of the ship’s generators ACBs can be closed if
the shore supply breaker is closed. This arrangement prevents
the shore supply being paralleled with any other supply.

61
Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant . Power Distribution
General Description
4. Power Distribution 4.2.1. Air Circuit Breakers (ACB) Components • Signalling device mechanically connected to the spring
(below the O pushbutton). The condition of the ACB is indi-
The air circuit breaker consists of: cated by a tag which displays either a white I closed ACB,
4.1. General Description • Electric motor module to automatically change the spring. or light blue O opened ACB indicator;
The ship electrical network is designed for delivering electrical When the ACB opens, the geared motor recharges the stored • RESET pushbutton to reset ACB after tripping and re-enable
power from the ship EPP to the consumers. The ship electrical energy system allowing for a closing/opening operation so the protection mechanism; the pushbutton is pulled out
network supplies consumers with 3-phase, 440V, 60 Hz gener- that by charging the closing spring, sufficient energy is stored when ACB trips;
ated by the diesel generators or shaft generator. to ensure that the opening spring is also charged. • The lever to manually charge the spring. In electrical fault
• Electromagnetic tripping device operating at overcurrent, circumstances such as a blackout condition, the motor
4.2. Major Components over/under voltage and overload; mechanism will be unable to recharge the stored energy
• Springs to open/close the ACB; system for any ACB’s that tripped, subsequently these
The ship’s power distribution system consists of: ACB’s will require resetting and recharging using the
• I pushbutton to manually close the ACB; it is active only
• Main Switch Board (MSB) comprising: manual charging lever. In the simulator the lever needs
when the spring is changed;
to be dragged one time down and up using the mouse to
űű 2 x Bus bar 440 V with Bus-Tie CB; • Signalling device mechanically connected to the spring achieve the yellow “charged” indicator being displayed to
űű 2 x Group Starter Panel 440 V; (below the I pushbutton). The condition of the stored en- confirm successful charging.
űű 2 x Feeder Panel 440 V; ergy mechanism is indicated by a tag which displays either
The left-most control panel located on the ACB front below the
a white “discharged” or yellow “charged” indicator;
űű Feeder Panel 220 V. RESET pushbutton, if present, is used to change the inputs. It is
• O pushbutton to manually open the ACB; not implemented in the simulator.
• Emergency Switch Board (ESB) comprising:
űű ESB 440 V, ACB controls are located on the appropriate SWBD panels.
űű ESB 220 V.
• Transformers: 4.2.2. ACB Principle of Operation
űű 2 x 440V/230V; The ACB will not close unless the closing spring is fully
űű EM’CY 2 x 440V/230V; charged. In automatic operation (including under/over voltage
tripping, where used) the closing/opening springs are charged
• 24V DC Batteries and Charger: 230V AC – 24V DC: for EM’CY
automatically by the motor mechanism. When the ACB opens,
Generator engine starter and for supply of Charging and
the geared motor recharges the stored energy system allow-
Discharging distribution board 24 V DC – BCD;
ing for a closing/opening operation so that by charging the
• Power Distribution sections 440 V, 230 V, 24 V DC Custom- closing spring, sufficient energy is stored to ensure that the
ers with CB and starters; opening spring is also charged. In electrical fault circumstanc-
• Local panels and starters in ER. es such as a blackout condition, the motor mechanism will be
unable to recharge the stored energy system for any ACB(s)
that tripped, subsequently these ACB(s) will require resetting
and recharging using the manual charging lever.

62
General Description
ACB can be opened either by remote tripping mechanism or The automatic CBs located on the distribution boards and 4.2.5. Preferential Tripping
manually. To open the ACB manually it is sufficient to click the switchboard panels. Associated consumers’ names are dis-
button O. Spring energy is not required for opening. played on the nameplates above the switch: 4.2.5.1. Purpose
To close the ACB manually the operator needs to ensure that
When the generators on line are overloaded, relatively non-
springs are charged. The RESET pushbutton on the front panel
essential load is tripped from the system by the preferential
or ACB TROUBLE RESET button should be pressed. To close the
tripping system, to reduce the load.
ACB it is sufficient to click the I button. At that the spring closes
the ACB. If the motor mechanism module is powered, then the Thus the operation of generator continues and the feeding to
motor re-charges the spring, and in 4 sec it is again in charged essential load circuits continues.
state. The spring state is indicated by the tag indicator. CB is closed CB is tripped CB is open
The preferential tripping system of this ship has two kinds of
“Tripping”, namely, one by overload of the generator, and the
4.2.3. Consumers’ CB Principle of Operation 4.2.4. ACB Protection other by abnormal AСВ trip of the generator during parallel
Circuit Breakers of the consumers are three-position automatic operation of generators.
ACBs are installed on the main and EM’CY Generators; bus tie
power switches having the following positions: For the consumers’ CB designated for non-essential load, a thin
connection.
• 0 – power is switched off; black plate with the label PT1 (1st tripping) and PT2 (2nd trip-
ACB trips after delay time or instantaneously.
• TRIP – CB is tripped; the CB opens and the operating lever ping) is inserted above its nameplate specifying its application
rotates to the tripped position; to reset the CB the opera- purposes. This indicates the preferential breaking designation.
4.2.4.1. Generator ACB Protection
tor needs to manually switch the lever into 0 position, and
only after that CB can be closed manually; A GCB protection has the following characteristics: 4.2.5.2. Operation
• 1 – power from the bus is supplied to the consumer. • Time delayed generator overcurrent trip. Delay time depends 1. Separation of non-essential load due to overload PT1.
CBs have inbuilt short circuit and thermal protection. on the current value: at I = 1.21 IR GCB trips after 30 sec.; If the current or power of generator on line:
Switching a CB in the simulator is done by the double-click, or • Instantaneous short circuit trip: I = 3 IR; > 100% during 10 seconds, or
by dragging the lever into desired position with the mouse. • Time delayed under voltage trip: U0 = 0.9 UR, 3 sec; > 110% during 5 seconds, or
> 120 % during 1 second,
Closing of a CB (the lever in position 1) means that the power • Time delayed reverse power trip: P < -0.1 PR, 5 sec;
PREFERENTIAL TRIP 1 function operates to trip the CBs for
is supplied to the specified consumer(s). For operation the After the preferential tripping (as described in 4.2.5 below),
non-essential consumers.
consumer(s) need to be switched on either remotely or on when the generator is further overloaded. Long Time Delay
their local panels. TRIP (LTD) function among the functions of overcurrent trip- 2. PT2 trip function separates non-essential load when any
ping device of ACB operates to trip ACB of generator to pre- of the generator ACB trip occurs in parallel operation.
The automatic CBs located on the local panels and starters.
vent damage in the generator.
4.2.4.2. Bus Tie ACB Protection

A BTCB protection has the following characteristics:
• Instantaneous short circuit trip: I = 3 IR.

63
DM4 System and PMS
4.3. DM4 System and PMS 4.3.3. PMS software unit 4.3.5. Load-dependent start/stop function
The PMS software unit controls and supervises all common The load-dependent start/stop function is active, when the
4.3.1. Purpose PMS functions in the DELOMATIC system according to the AUTO plant mode is selected and the shore connection is not
The DELOMATIC system (DM4) is designed for control and pro- functionalism of the selected plant mode, e.g. the SEMI-AUTO closed. The start/stop function transmits PMS start and stop
tection of up to parallel running generators and can also carry or the AUTOMATIC plant modes. Common PMS functions may commands, which are based on a calculation of how many
out engine control and protection. The DELOMATIC system be functions such as the load depending start/stop function generator sets are needed in order to meet the actual power
performs a wide variety of the functions needed on board a and selection of start/stop priority. demand at the busbar. The PMS start/stop commands cause
ship or in power stations. the individual generator sets to carry out start and stop re-
4.3.4. Display Unit (DU) spectively according to the programmed start/stop priority.
• Power Management System (PMS) functions;
The DU is a slave unit, which receives information from its cor- In AUTO mode the standby diesel becomes a part of an ac-
• Control of generator set(s); tivity when diesel load reaches 90% of the maximum load,
responding DGU. Measured values and programmed system
• An extensive number of integrated protective functions; and the two diesels run parallel. If the total load is 65%, last
setup are all stored in the corresponding DGU.
• Measurement of all relevant AC values; diesel load is transferred to the first running diesel, and dis-
The DU offers: connected from MSB electrically, and it stops when the heat
• System logic;
• Display and control of the DELOMATIC menu structure; parameters decrease.
• Serial communication interface.
The application software consists of two main software units: • Read-out of measured and calculated values; In SEMI-AUTO mode, the load-depending start/stop function
• Operator alarm handling interface; will only allow a push-button initiated SEMI-AUTO disconnec-
• Generator control software unit; tion of a generator breaker, if the generator set is surplus at the
• Display of alarm messages;
• Power Management System (PMS) software unit busbar (the predicted available power > the nominal power
• Status indication with LEDs. of the generator set). Calculation of the load-depending PMS
4.3.2. Generator control software unit The PMS in the DELOMATIC system operates as an integrated start/stop commands is based on a comparison of the pro-
unit in the Main PMS DGU. grammed start and stop limits and a special DELOMATIC value
The generator set control software unit controls and supervis-
called the predicted available power.
es all local operations of the generator set. The received PMS The PMS interface in each Generator Engine carries out distrib-
commands may initiate e.g. start and stop of the generator set, uted control of the generator sets according to the received
but the generator set control software unit carries out the ac- PMS commands and PMS status feedback signals.
tual control, protection and supervision of the generator set.
Only generator sets (GE’s) selected to be under PMS control are
included in the automatic PMS functions.

64
DM4 System and PMS
4.3.6. Transfer of PMS start command Should the 1st stand-by fail to start or its ACB fail to close, then 4.3.10. GB OFF sequence
the 2nd stand-by will be automatically controlled to replace
A PMS start command is automatically transmitted to the next 1st stand-by. The GB OFF sequence is initiated, when the DGU receives a
stand-by generator set, if any of the below-mentioned alarm PMS stop command from the Main PMS DGU (or a SEMI-AUTO
sequences become active at a running generator set: The stand-by will also be automatically started when two initiated GB OFF). The PMS stop command is only accepted by
generators in service is one generator ACB abnormal trip or the DGU, if the generator set is “ready for PMS stop”.
• The “SAFETY STOP” alarm sequences;
generator in service is overloaded, in which case the started
• The “TRIP OF GB” alarm sequences; The GB OFF sequence is automatically initiated, when the DGU
stand-by is automatically paralleled to service generator.
receives a PMS stop command.
• The “SHUTDOWN” alarm sequence.
4.3.9. GB ON sequence During SEMI-AUTO plant mode the operator may initiate the
4.3.7. Programming of start/ GB OFF sequence by pressing the CB OFF push-button on the
The GB ON sequence is automatically initiated (except during
stop priority sequence SEMI-AUTO mode), when the automatic start sequence has
DU (DGU DG).
Programming of the start/stop priority sequence is carried out been completed successfully. The DGU will only accept the SEMI-AUTO stop command, if
for all generator sets. Programming is possible when the sys- the generator set is not alone on the busbar, and the avail-
The automatic GB ON sequence includes:
tem is in semi-auto mode (in the Synchronizing Panel click the able power on the busbar exceeds the nominal power of the
Semi-Auto button on Multi-Line AOP: see the description in the • Detection of “ready for PMS synchronisation” status for the DG in question.
paragraph 5.4.1 on page 72) and one of the generator sets is generator set;
A SEMI-AUTO GB ON command will interrupt an ongoing GB
in operation. • Programmable dynamic synchronisation; Off sequence.
›› Decide which of the diesels should be first standby. • Generator breaker ON control;
›› Click 1 Prior button on the generator panel of the first • Transfer of the PMS start command to the next stand-by 4.3.11. Deloading
standby set. The lamp 1st Standby illuminates. generator set in case of: The automatic GB OFF deloads the generator set before allow-
›› Click 1 Prior button on the unit of the actual operation die- űű a failed synchronisation; ing the generator breaker to be opened. The DGU will reduce
sel. Then second standby diesel is chosen automatically. űű a generator breaker ON failure. the generator load by changing the load reference for the load
regulator. When the measured generator load (real power) goes
When the GB ON sequence is entered, it is indicated at the DU
4.3.8. Automatic starting of diesel generators (DGU DG) by a yellow ON LED.
below the programmable limit, the generator breaker is opened.
The three diesel generators (No. 1 D/G, No.2 D/G, and No.3 D/G)
During SEMI-AUTO mode the operator may initiate the GB ON
can be set as stand-by when one or two generator is in service.
sequence by pressing the CB ON push-button. This will initiate
If a bus trouble is detected when one generator is in service, closing of the generator breaker.
then the stand-by D/G will be automatically started and one
A SEMI-AUTO stop or GB OFF command will interrupt an ongo-
generator in service will be replaced by this one generator to
ing GB ON sequence.
restore the bus conditions to normal.

65
DM4 System and PMS
4.3.12. Automatic stop sequence 4.3.14. Preferential tripping

The automatic stop sequence is carried out, when the DGU has The PMS matches the generator capacity to the power require-
successfully completed the GB OFF sequence. ments of the vessel. However, should an overcurrent occur all
440 V bus bar, non-essential services will be tripped.
Automatic stop sequence includes:
If the current on all 440 V bus bar exceeds 110% of the rated
• Programmable cooling down time
current (1000 A) for a period of 10 seconds, the PMS will initi-
• “STOP” output with programmable extended ON time. ate the release of the preferential tripping, thereby providing
SEMI-AUTO stop of engine includes: protection against the overcurrent which would otherwise trip
the ACB.
• Programmable cooling down time
The preferential trips are released in two stages PT1 and PT2.
• “STOP” output with programmable extended ON time.
The non-essential consumers are marked by black label over
Provided that SEMI-AUTO plant mode is selected, the operator the CB nameplate on the starter panels and feeder panels of
may initiate a SEMI-AUTO stop of the engine by pressing the the MSB and ESB. Legend plates are provided on these panels.
STOP push-button at the DU (DGU DG).
When normal conditions resume the above breakers must be
A SEMI-AUTO GB ON or Start command will interrupt an ongo- manually reset.
ing stop sequence.
4.3.15. Sequential restart
4.3.13. Blackout protection
When normal power is restored after a blackout, all essential
In the event of a total loss of power the emergency generator service machinery that were in service before the blackout
will start and connect to the emergency bus bar. Should it be will be started automatically when the main switchboard has
necessary to prevent the auto connection of the emergency regained power. Motors that were selected for duty before the
generator an auto/manual switch is provided on the emergen- blackout will be automatically returned to duty when power is
cy generator electrical panel. Should it be necessary to pre- restored. Similarly, motors selected for standby will automati-
vent the starting of the emergency generator engine an auto/ cally return to standby. If the machinery designated for duty
manual switch is provided on the engine local operating panel. does not restore normal system conditions, such as pressure,
If the low voltage bus bar is “dead”, it will be possible to close within a preset time, the standby motor will cut in automati-
the emergency bus bar interconnection breaker to allow the cally. If power is only restored to the emergency switchboard,
supply of the low voltage system. To prevent the overload of motors whose supply is from the emergency switchboard will
the emergency generator non-essential low voltage consum- start irrespective of any previous selection.
ers must be isolated before connection. The motors which will start automatically after a blackout are
marked by white labels on the starter panels and feeder pan-
els: Restart delay time is indicated on these labels.

66
Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant . Power Distribution Control in Simulator
Main Circuit Diagram
5. Power Distribution Control in Simulator

5.1. Main Circuit Diagram
Click the menu item MCD of the page MSB to open
the Main Circuit Diagram (MCD) display.
Active (powered) elements of the diagram, such
as generators, buses, transformers, closed CBs are
displayed in magenta. Digital indicators display
the actual values of appropriate electrical param-
eters: voltage, current, power, frequency.
Non-active (not powered) elements are displayed
on the diagram in green.
Tripped CBs are displayed in red.
Circuit breakers can be operated from this diagram
except Generator ACBs. Double-click a required CB
to open/close it on the MCD display. In the event
when a CB is blocked by the bus or generator au-
tomatics, then operation is not possible. It should
be carried out from the local panel or respective
switchboard section.
Zoom in/out MCD display using the mouse wheel
to read consumers names on the switch boards.

67
Generator 1, 2 Panels
5.2. Generator 1, 2 Panels

Click the menu item MSB Gen 1, 2 panel of the page MSB to open
the display with two generator panels.
The description given is for generator 1. Generator 2 panel is
similar to generator 1 panel.
The No 1 GENERATOR PANEL (AC450V 3P 60 Hz) contains:
• SPACE HEATER , GEN RUN, ACB OPEN, ACB CLOSED – indica-
tor lamps, which illuminate when the respective condition
is active;
• GEN1 AMMETER, POWER FACTOR, VOLTMETER – gauges
to monitor the generator parameters; (SHORE AMMETER –
gauge is placed only on the gen. 2 panel);
• DM4 display (see the operating description in the para-
graph 5.2.1 on page 69
• THERMO METER – digital indicators of the phases “R”, “S”
and “T” temperatures;
• Run hours counter;
• AMMETER – four-position switch to select the measure-
ment on phases R, S, T, or switch OFF;
• SPACE HEATER – switch to turn heating OFF/ON;
• ACB TROUBLE RESET – button to reset ACB after trip condition;
• VOLTMETER – four-position switch to select the measure-
ment between phases R-S, S-T, T-R, or switch OFF;
• VR % – voltage regulator; turn the knob to manually ad-
just generator voltage value according to the bus voltage
value (watch on the DM4 panel LCD main screen or on the
voltmeter);
• No1 GENERATOR ACB – see the operating description in the
paragraph 4.2.2 on page 62.

68
Generator 1, 2 Panels
5.2.1. Operating DM4 System • Run – DE is running at RPM speed about nominal; The following buttons are modeled:
• Ready – DE is ready for start; • Start I and Stop O to start/stop the diesel engine;
DELOMATIC system DM4 is installed on each main generator
panel for automatic control and protection of the generator. • Deload – generator is deloading before opening ACB; • I/O to close/open generator ACB;
The system panel contains a set of buttons for operation, sta- • On – indicates generator ACB: green light – ACB closed; • Arrows UP, DOWN to switch screens;
tus indication with LEDs and LCD screen for presentation of the light off – ACB open; yellow light – synchronizing;
• 1 Prior to set first priority for this generator;
generator parameters. • 1st Standby – the generator has highest priority in auto-
• ack to acknowledge alarms.
The Display Unit (DU) is a slave unit, which receives informa- matic starting sequence;
LCD screen is off when the device power is off.
tion from its corresponding DGU (DEIF Generator Unit hard- • 1st Prior – this generator starting priority was changed by
ware). Measured values and programmed system setup are all pressing the button 1 Prior; LCD main screen displays generator set and bus parameters.
stored in the corresponding DGU. • PMS Control – light off – no control power is available for LCD second screen contains alarms information: TIME, ALARM
Note: Buttons provide control only in PMS Semi-Auto mode. the panel; yellow light – SWBD mode is set on SYNCHRO description, ACKN state.
PANEL; green light – PMS modes set (Semi-Auto or PMS
DU indicator lamps illuminate when: Auto) on AOP; Programming the generators starting sequence is described in
the paragraph 4.3 on page 64.
• Alarm – flashes when an unacknowledged generator alarm • Power – control power is available;
occurs; turns to steady light when alarm is acknowledged; • Regulator On – indicates active automatic load sharing Example
• Alarm Inh. – not modeled; mode (PMS Semi-Auto or PMS Auto);
Diesel generator No 1 is under load; required starting se-
• Cool Down – DE slows down before stop; • Self check OK – control power is available for the device. quence is: diesel No 3 is planned to be 1st standby, diesel No 2
is planned to be 2nd standby.
›› Click SEMI-AUTO button on AOP in Synchronization panel
(see the paragraph 5.4.1 on page 72); SEMI-AUTO lamp
illuminates, and the system gets in semi-auto mode.
›› Click 1 Prior button on DM4 of No 3 GENERATOR PANEL .
Indicator lamp 1st Standby illuminates.
›› Click 1 Prior button on DM4 of No 1 GENERATOR PANEL .
›› System automatically selects No 2 diesel as 2nd standby.

69
Generator 3 & Bus Tie Panels
5.3. Generator 3 & Bus Tie Panels

Click the menu item MSB Gen 3, Bus Tie panel of the page MSB to
open the display with two panels.
The No 3 GENERATOR PANEL (AC450V 3P 60 Hz 1125 kVA) is
similar to the panel of generator 1; the description is given in
The BUS TIE PANEL contains:

• Insulation monitor;
• EARTH LAMP (440V BUS) set: R, S, T – indicator lamps; in the
circumstances, when insulation is low on a phase/phases,
the respective lamp light fades, or lights down; insulation
monitor then points to the yellow or red sector on the scale;
• EARTH TEST – button for testing if EARTH LAMP(s) are
burned out; click the button, all lamps should illuminate;
• BUS TIE ACB – see the operating description in the para-
graph 4.2.2 on page 62.
• SHORE MCCB – shore supply circuit breaker to power the
buses.

70
Synchronization Panel
5.4. Synchronization Panel • Gauges to display generator GEN 3, GEN 2, GEN 1

and SG power;
Click the menu item MSB Synchro Panel of the page • S, R, T – light synchroscope lamps; operation is
MSB to open the display with two panels. described in the paragraph 5.4.4 on page 73;
The SYNCHRO PANEL contains: • Automatic Operation Panel (AOP) – see the de-
scription in the paragraph 5.4.1 on page 72;
• GEN 3, GEN 2, GEN 1 – three identical indicator
lamps panels to display the state of genera- • CHECK SYNC two-position switch – used only
tors and alarm conditions; each set comprises: when SYNCHRO & POWER CONTROL switch is set
űű ACB NON CLOSE; to PMS control mode (see the functional descrip-
tion in the paragraph 5.4.2 on page 72);
űű ACB ABNORMAL TRIP;
űű LOCAL; • G3 ACB CONTROL impulse handle to OPEN or
űű 1ST STANDBY; CLOSE the ACB manually: turn and hold for op-
űű 2ND STANDBY; eration; G2 ACB CONTROL , G1 ACB CONTROL and
űű G/E STOP; SG ACB CONTROL handles are similar;
űű READY TO START; • G3 GOVERNOR CONTROL impulse handle to LOW-
űű AUTO SYNC FAIL; ER or RAISE the voltage; G2 GOVERNOR CONTROL
űű G/E START FAIL; and G1 GOVERNOR CONTROL handles operate
űű OVERCURRENT TRIP; similar for generators 1 and 2;
űű REVERSE POWER TRIP; • ME RPM FINE ADJUSTER – potentiometer to ad-
űű G/E SHUT DOWN. just ME speed during SG manual synchronizing;
• Indicator lamps panel to display the EPP state Attention! When synchronizing SG for connection
and alarm condition: to the MSB only one of the generators should be running;
űű MSB 440V LOW INSUL.;
after closing the SG ACB the generator ACB should be
immediately open, and visa versa. Paralleling is prohibited!
űű MSB 220V LOW INSUL.;
űű MSB SAF. SOURCE FAIL; • FREQ.&VOLTMETER – four-position switch to se-
űű PMS ALARM; lect the generator set for measurement between
űű BUS SHORT CIRCUIT; OFF/G3/G2/G1/SG;
űű DC24v SOURCE ON; űű BCD DC LOW INSUL.; űű E/G ST’BY; • SYNCHROSCOPE – four-position switch to select
űű 24V SOURCE FAIL; űű EM’CY GEN ABNORMAL; űű E/G RUN. the generator set for synchronization;
űű PREF. TRIP (PT1); űű ESBD ABNORMAL; • I–BUS II GEN – double-voltage and • SYNCHRO & POWER CONTROL – switch to select
űű PREF. TRIP (PT2); űű BCD ABNORMAL; double-frequency gauges to monitor the control mode (see the description in the para-
űű ESB 440V LOW INSUL.; űű E/G BCD ABNORMAL; synchronization process; graph 5.4.2 on page 72):
űű ESB 220V LOW INSUL.; űű SHORE POWER AVAILABLE; • Synchroscope (see the description in űű SWBD – from generator panels on MSB;
űű ESB SAF. SOURCE FAIL; űű SHORE POWER ACB ON; the paragraph 5.4.3 on page 73); űű PMS – from PMS.

71
The right panel on the display contains: űű BUS VOLT. LOW – alarm: voltage < 95% during 5 sec;
• ENGINE CONTROL impulse handles for G3, G2 and G1 to űű BUS FREQ. HIGH – alarm: frequency > 105% during 5 sec;
operate the diesel engine: STOP, OFF, START – only when űű BUS FREQ. LOW – alarm: frequency < 95% during 5 sec.
SYNCHRO & POWER CONTROL switch is in SWBD position;
• ALARM RESET button to reset active alarms on SYNCHRO
5.4.2. Synchronizing in SWBD & PMS Modes
PANEL; 1. SYNCHRO & POWER CONTROL switch
• SHORT CIRCUIT TROUBLE RESET – button to reset trip condition is set to SWBD control mode.
of the EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARD ACB; Manually start, synchronize, connect generators.
• EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARD – to operate MSB-ESB ACB. AOP buttons are disabled. SEMI-AUTO and AUTO lamps are
not illuminated. Other lamps indicate EPP state.
5.4.1. Automatic Operation Panel 2. SYNCHRO & POWER CONTROL switch
AOP contains: is set to PMS control mode.
• SEMI-AUTO – button and indicator lamp; lamp illuminates Note: One generator should be running and connected to the bus.
when “PMS Semi-auto” mode is active; • By default the system switches to SEMI-AUTO mode, and
• AUTO – button and indicator lamp; lamp illuminates when the lamp illuminates. Synchronizing of generators is con-
“PMS Auto” mode is active; trolled as follows:
• LED indicators, which illuminate when: űű CHECK SYNC switch is set to ON position – from DM4: use
űű PMS BLOCKED – Auto mode is blocked (Bus Tie is open, the I/O button only.
or shore power is ON, or SG is connected to the bus); űű CHECK SYNC switch is set to OFF position – manually.
űű LD STOP BLOCK – automatic stop of the generators on For manual synchronization perform the steps:
low load is blocked with HPP units online; ›› Start the diesel of the generator number that needs
űű SCB POS ON – shore power CB is closed; to be connected in parallel (using ENGINE CONTROL
űű BC POS ON – ACB Bus Tie is closed; impulse handle, or manually from the LOP).
űű LOAD DEP START – time delay before standby generator ›› Set FREQ.&VOLTMETER switch to the generator
automatic start at high load; number.
űű LOAD DEP STOP – time delay before standby generator ›› Synchronize manually (using GOVERNOR CONTROL
automatic stop at low load; impulse handle).
űű BT START REQUEST – request for standby generator start ›› Close generator ACB manually (using ACB CONTROL
at insufficient reserve power for Bow Thruster to run; impulse handle).
űű BT CONNECTED – Bow Thruster motor is operating; • Click the AUTO button on AOP; the lamp AUTO illuminates.
Synchronization is performed automatically by PMS.
űű BUS VOLT. HIGH – alarm: voltage > 105% during 5 sec;
CHECK SYNC switch position is ignored.

72
5.4.3. Synchroscope Operation 5.4.4. Light Synchroscope Operation

The “rotation” of the red LED circle indicates the frequency dif- The lamps S, R, T – light synchroscope, illuminate in round
ference. The circle can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise. robin way:
If the generator is synchronized with the bus (it is safe to con- • The sequence S -> R -> T indicates that the generator fre-
nect the generator to the bus), then only the upper LED indica- quency is greater than the bus frequency;
tor is illuminated (12 o’clock position).
• The sequence T -> R -> S indicates that the generator fre-
If the generator frequency is less than the bus frequency the quency is less than the bus frequency.
circle rotates counterclockwise (TOO SLOW). If generator fre- Synchronized generator and bus are indicated by the lamp
quency is greater than the bus frequency the circle rotates state: R on, S off, T on. Then the generator ACB can be closed.
clockwise (TOO FAST).
Exact frequency values should be checked using the voltage
and frequency gauges. Frequency adjustment is done using
the potentiometer of the appropriate generator.

73
PS Group Starter Panels 1, 2
5.5. PS Group Starter Panels 1, 2 Starter panels on MSB PS STARTERS 440V No 1:

Click the menu items MSB PS GSP Panel 1, MSB PS GSP Panel 2 of the • No 1 SEA WATER COOLING PUMP
page MSB to open the displays with MSB PS starter panels of • No 1 LT COOLING WATER PUMP
the units and mechanisms. • ME PORT HT COOLING WATER PUMP
Starter panels for the mechanisms are described in their re- • ME PORT HT PRE-HEAT PUMP
spective paragraphs, general description is given in Chapter 4, • ME PORT ST-BY LO PUMP
the paragraph 1.3.1 on page 92.
• No 1 NOZZLE COOLING PUMP
Thin red and yellow labels designate the consumer EMCY stop • ME PORT No 1 CPP PUMP
group (see the legend on the MSB Feeder panels – use menu
• No 1 FO FEED PUMP
item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB).
• ME PORT GBX PRIMING PUMP
White labels indicate the starting time delay after blackout.
• ME STBD No 1 CPP PUMP
• No 1 FO BOOSTER PUMP
Starter panels on MSB PS STARTERS 440V No 2:

• MDO TRANSFER PUMP
• No 1 BILGE & FIRE PUMP
• No 1 STARTING AIR COMPRESSOR
• No 1 HFO TRANSFER PUMP
• No 1 ER FAN
• No 3 ER FAN
• No 1 BALLAST PUMP

74
SB Group Starter Panels 1, 2
5.6. SB Group Starter Panels 1, 2 Starter panels on MSB SB STARTERS 440V No 1:

Click the menu items MSB SB GSP Panel 1, MSB SB GSP Panel 2 of the • No 2 SEA WATER COOLING PUMP
page MSB to open the displays with MSB SB starter panels of • No 2 LT COOLING WATER PUMP
the units and mechanisms. • ME STBD HT COOLING WATER PUMP
Starter panels for the mechanisms are described in their re- • No 3 SEA WATER COOLING PUMP
spective paragraphs, general description is given in Chapter 4, • ME STBD HT PRE-HEAT PUMP
the paragraph 1.3.1 on page 92
• ME STBD ST-BY LO PUMP
Thin red and yellow labels designate the consumer EMCY stop • No 2 NOZZLE COOLING PUMP
group (see the legend on the MSB Feeder panels – use menu
• ME PORT No 2 CPP PUMP
item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB).
• No 2 FO FEED PUMP
White labels indicate the starting time delay after blackout.
• ME STBD GBX PRIMING PUMP
• ME STBD No 2 CPP PUMP
• No 2 FO BOOSTER PUMP
Starter panels on MSB SB STARTERS 440V No 2:

• LT HARBOUR PUMP
• No 2 BILGE & FIRE PUMP
• No 2 STARTING AIR COMPRESSOR
• No 2 HFO TRANSFER PUMP
• No 2 BILGE & FIRE PUMP FROM ESB
• No 4 ER FAN
• No 2 BALLAST PUMP
• REMOTE CONTROL FOR No 2 ER SUPPLY FAN
(section is feeding from ESB)

75
MSB Feeder Panels 440 V
5.7. MSB Feeder Panels 440 V

Click the menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB to
open the display with the circuit breakers of the MSB feeder
panels 1 and 2 440 V consumers.
Preferential and ESD tripping of non-essential consumers leg-
end is provided on each panel. Black, orange and yellow labels
on top of the nameplates designate the tripping conditions.
5.7.1. MSB No. 1 AC440V Feeder Panel Consumers

• No 1 PORT STEERING GEAR STARTER
• AHU SWITCH BOARD
• No 1 G/E LO PRIMING PUMP STARTER
• No 1 G/E LT ST-BY PUMP STARTER
• No 1 G/E HT ST-BY PUMP STARTER
• No 1 G/E PREHEATER UNIT
5.7.2. MSB No. 2 AC440V Feeder Panel Consumers
• MDO PURIFIER • No 1 STBD STEERING GEAR STARTER • SLUDGE PUMP STARTER
• No 1 LO PURIFIER • ME STBD CYL. LO PUMP STARTER • HEELING PUMP STARTER
• No 1 HFO PURIFIER • BILGE PUMP STARTER • FIN STAB STBD MAIN PUMP STARTER
• PROVISION PLANT • LO TRANSFER PUMP STARTER • INCINERATOR CONTROL PANEL
• HYD. POWER PACK FOR BOW THRUSTER • No 2 G/E LO PRIMING PUMP STARTER • THERMAL OIL HEATER
• FIRE HYDROPHORE UNIT PUMP STARTER • No 2 G/E LT ST-BY PUMP STARTER • GALLEY DISTRIBUTION BOARD
• ME PORT CYL. LO PUMP STARTER • No 2 G/E HT ST-BY PUMP STARTER • No 2 MAIN TRANSFORMER (AC440/230V 3P,60HZ 120 kVA)
• ME PORT TURNING GEAR • No 2 G/E PREHEATER UNIT • FWG EJECTOR PUMP STARTER
• EXH. GASES SCRUBBER CONTROL PANEL • ACCOM. VENT. DISTR. BOARD • SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT
• No 1 MAIN TRANSFORMER (AC440/230V 3P,60HZ 120 kVA) • FRESH WATER GENERATOR • ME STBD TURNING GEAR
• No 1 THERMAL FLUID CIRC. PUMP STARTER • No 2 LO PURIFIER • No 2 THERMAL FLUID CIRC. PUMP STARTER
• WO TK CONTROL PANEL • No 2 HFO PURIFIER • SPRINKLER PUMP STARTER
• FIN STAB PORT MAIN PUMP STARTER • DECK AIR COMPRESSOR STARTER • HYD POWER PACK FOR RO-RO
• DRENCHING PUMP STARTER • CHILLER PLANT CONTROL PANEL • CARDECK VENTILATION D.B.
• REEFER DISTRIBUTION BOARD • WATER FOG PUMP STARTER

76
MSB Feeder Panels 220 V
5.8. MSB Feeder Panels 220 V 5.8.1. MSB AC220V Feeder Panel Consumers
Click the menu item MSB 220v Feeder of the page MSB to open • NAV. LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL ON B.C.C.
the AC220v FEEDER PANEL with the circuit breakers of the • NAV. INSTRUMENT DISTRIB. BOARD IN B.C.C.
MSB 220 V consumers. • No.1 LIGHTING DISTRIB. BOARD IN B.C.C.
The panel contains: • No.2 LIGHTING DISTRIB. BOARD IN B.C.C.
• EARTH LAMP (220V BUS) R, S, T lamps; normally the lamps • No.3 LIGHTING DISTRIB. BOARD IN B.C.C.
are illuminated; in the circumstances, when insulation is • No.4 LIGHTING DISTRIB. BOARD IN B.C.C.
low on a phase/phases, the respective lamp light fades, • No.5 LIGHTING DISTRIB. BOARD IN B.C.C.
or lights down; insulation monitor then points to the yel-
• No.6 LIGHTING DISTRIB. BOARD IN B.C.C.
low or red sector on the scale;
• BRIDGE CONTROL CONSOLE (B.C.C. AC 220V POWER D.B.)
• Ammeter gauge and four-position switch to select the
measurement phase between OFF/R/S/T; • ENGINE CONTROL CONSOLE (ECC AC 220V POWER DB)
• Insulation monitor; • No 1 GEN SPACE HEATER
• Voltmeter gauge and four-position switch to select the • No 2 GEN SPACE HEATER
measurement phase between OFF/R-S/S-T/T-R; • THERMO CONTROLLERS
• EARTH TEST button for testing if R, S, T lamps are burned • OILY WATER SEPARATOR
out; click the button, all lamps should illuminate; • WINDOW DEFROSTING SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL
• A set of circuit breakers to power 220 V consumers. • FIRE MAIN CONTROL PANEL
• WATER FOG MAIN CONTROL PANEL
• CO2 ALARM PANEL
• SHAFT GEN SPACE HEATER
• GALLEY POWER DISTRIB. BOARD
• VISCOSIMETER
• No. 2 MAIN TRANSFORMER 440/230V 120 kVA
• No. 1 MAIN TRANSFORMER 440/230V 120 kVA
• SAFETY STATION BILGE CONTROL PANEL
• DRENCHING MAIN CONTROL PANEL

77
Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant . Emergency Power Supply
General Description
6. Emergency Power Supply 6.2. EMCY and Preferential

Tripping Legend
6.1. General Description Tripping of non-essential consumers is done according to the
During normal operation a bus tie connects the ESB with the Emergency DG is switched off automatically when/if the MSB is stages presented on the figure.
MSB, power from the MSB is fed through the ESB to supply powered, taking the following steps:
Circuit breakers on DBs and Feeder panels that are marked by
essential services (refer to Main Circuit Diagram). The bus tie ›› Opening ACB EMCY GEN. tripping labels will be tripped in the reverse order of the given
is fitted with two ACB: MSB–ESB BUS TIE manual control from
›› Closing the ESB–MSB BUS TIE breaker. table: i.e. PT2 will be the first and ES1 will be the last to trip.
the MSB side, and ESB–MSB BUS TIE control from the ESB side.
ESB-MSB BUS TIE breaker closes automatically when MSB is ›› Stopping the Emergency DG.
powered and ACB MSB-ESB is closed. The ESB–MSB BUS TIE breaker protection is identical to the
protection of the MSB–ESB BUS TIE breaker, and it additionally
In the event of a power failure from the MSB, the ESB is dis-
has under voltage protection
connected from the MSB. In Automatic control mode the
Emergency DG starts under automated control, runs the The ACB EMCY GEN protection is identical to the protection of
EMCY GEN up to a state ready to be loaded, and then closes the main generator CB (refer to GCB Protection).
the ACB EMCY GEN to instigate the source changeover to
The controls of ACB EMCY GEN are located on the ESB panel
continue supplying the essential services. The ESB is also con-
(refer to Emergency Switchboard).
figured to provide the ability for this process to be performed
manually if necessary. The emergency generator is, normally, intended for fully auto-
matic operation. Manual operations described in this section
are therefore primarily for inspection and maintenance pur-
poses as well as giving general idea what can be done in the
event of an automatic control circuit failure.

78
Chapter 3. Electrical Power Plant . EMCY Power Supply Control in Simulator
EMCY Diesel Engine Local Operating Panel
7. EMCY Power Supply Control in Simulator

7.1. EMCY Diesel Engine LOW COOL WATER P – low cooling water pres-
sure alarm;
Local Operating Panel LOW COOL WATER LEV – low cooling water level
Click on the menu item EM’CY DE LOP of the page EmG to open alarm;
the display with two panels. FUEL PIPE LEAKAGE – fuel leakage alarm in the
fuel supply system;
The EMERGENCY GENERATOR AUTO START/STOP PANEL contains:
EMERGENCY STOP – the emergency stop alarm.
• RPM TACHO indicator of the diesel speed;
• OPERATION SWITCH three-position mode selector to
• DC VOLT gauge to measure control voltage; choose the EMCY DG operation mode between:
• HOUR COUNTER of the diesel run hours; űű OFF – the EMCY DG cannot be controlled;
• LUBE OIL PRESS, LUBE OIL TEMP, COOL W. TEMP gauge to űű AUTO – the EMCY DG is under remote control;
measure cooling water temperature in the diesel engine; űű MAN – the EMCY DG is under manual control
• The panel in the center presents indicators of the diesel from this panel.
engine state and the controls: • EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton.
űű START and STOP buttons to operate the diesel engine in
MAN mode;
űű RESET button to reset the automatic control system after
manual testing the diesel;
űű POWER ON indicator is illuminated when power is on;
űű LED indicators of the diesel state signal:
IN OPERATION – the diesel is running;
START FAILURE – diesel failed to start alarm;
OVERSPEED (R.P.M. FAIL) – diesel overspeed alarm;
LOW LUB.OIL PRESSURE – low lube oil pressure alarm;
HIGH COOL WATER T – high cooling water temperature
alarm;
HIGH LUBE OIL TEMP – high lube oil temperature alarm;

79
EMCY Diesel Engine Local Operating Panel
The panel EMERGENCY GENERATOR ROOM LOUVRES CONTROL The EM’CY GENSET BATTERY
BOX is designed to manually operate the louvers. The panel CHARGER panel shows the state of
contains the following controls: the EMCY DG battery. The follow-
ing controls are available:
• MAN–AUTO two-position mode selector switch to choose
the control mode; in MAN mode louvres are opened and • SOURCE – indicator, which
closed manually using the buttons; in AUTO mode louvres illuminates when the charger
are opened and closed automatically after start or stop of is powered;
the EMCY engine; • BATTERY LOW VOLTAGE
• The groups of controls INTAKE AIR LOUVRES and EXHAUST ALARM – indicator, which illu-
AIR LOUVRES contain each: minates when voltage < 20 V;
űű OPEN and CLOSE buttons to manually operate the louvers; • AMMETER – gauge to monitor
the charging current;
űű OPEN indicator, which is illuminated when the louvers
are open (the louvers are closed when the EMCY DG is • VOLTMETER – gauge to moni-
not running). tor the battery voltage;
Note: In Automatic control mode the diesel engine is always • EQUAL, FLOAT – indicators
kept in a warm state and is ready for start. which illuminate when the re-
spective mode is in operation;
The panel HYDRAULIC STARTER is designed to manually start
• EQUAL / FLOAT – switch to
the diesel using the hydraulic starter in the circumstances
select charging mode (see
when the accumulator battery has low starting voltage.
the description in the para-
The panel contains: graph 7.4 on page 85);
• OIL PRESSURE gauge to measure oil pressure in the cylinder; • POWER SOURCE – switch;
• HAND PUMP lever of the pneumatic pump to raise the oil when the switch is in up posi-
pressure in the cylinder, while monitoring the pressure tion power is ON.
gauge; in the simulator drag the lever by the mouse from
left to right and back to left as if one were pumping;
• OPERATING LEVEL handle to switch the pressure on to the
hydraulic starter: move the handle by the mouse to the
right position.

80
EMCY Generator Panel
7.2. EMCY Generator Panel

Click on the menu item EM’CY Gen Panel of the page EmG to open
the display with three panels.
The left panel of the EMERGENCY GENERATOR PANEL (AC 450V
3 PH 60 Hz) contains:
• GEN & SHORE CURRENT – ammeter;

• GEN – power gauge;
• GEN RUN, ACB OPEN, ACB CLOSED – indicator lamps, which
illuminate when the respective condition is active;
• E/G STANDBY – indicator lamp, which illuminates when the
generator is in stand-by mode;
• SPACE HEATER – indicator lamp, which illuminates when
the heater is on to keep the set in ready state;
• AMMETER – five-position switch to select between:
űű OFF – ammeter is off;
űű R / S / T – ammeter displays generator current on phases;
űű SHORE – ammeter displays shore supply current.
• SPACE HEATER – switch to switch the heater OFF/ON;
• ACB CONTROL – impulse switch handle to manually OPEN
or CLOSE the generator ACB;
• VR % – voltage regulator; turn the knob to adjust voltage;
• EG ACB ABNORMAL TRIP RESET – button;
• EM’CY GEN (AC 450V 3 PH 60 Hz) – generator ACB; see the
operating description in the paragraph 4.2.2 on page 62.

81
EMCY Generator Panel
The right panel of the EMERGENCY GENERATOR PANEL (AC

450V 3 PH 60 Hz) contains:
• FREQUENCY and VOLTAGE gauges to monitor the genera-

tor set parameters;
• MSB POWER SUPPLY, ESB–MSB BUS TIE CLOSED, ESB–MSB
BUS TIE OPEN, DC 24V SOURCE – indicator lamps, which
illuminate when the respective condition is active;
• FREQ & VOLT – five-position switch to select between:
űű OFF – gauges are off;
űű R-S / S-T / T-R – gauges display generator parameters;
űű SHORE – gauges display shore supply parameters.
• ALARM RESET button to reset alarm indicators;
• Alarm indicators, which illuminate when respective alarm
condition occurs on ESB and EM’CY Generator:
űű EM’CY Gen BCD Abnormal– battery charger/discharger
failure;
űű EM’CY Gen Overcurrent – current > 288 A;
űű EM’CY Gen Abnormal – high/low voltage; high/low fre-
quency; high current; overcurrent’ or short circuit trip;
űű ESB 440V Low Insul. – on 440 V consumers board;
űű ESB 220V Low Insul. – on 220 V consumers board.
• BUS TIE ACB TROUBLE RESET button;
• TEST – switch to select the test mode between:
űű ENGINE – to initiate the engine starting test: starting
EMCY gen only without blackout of EMCY SWBD);
űű NORM – normal EMG start after blackout;
űű ENGINE & ACB – to initiate the EMCY Gen blackout se-
quence with ESB–MSB disconnection.
• MAIN SWBD SOURCE ACB to manually operate the
ESB-MSB bus tie (see operation description in the para-
graph 4.2.2 on page 62).

82
ESB Consumers & Starter Panels
7.3. ESB Consumers & Starter Panels

Click on the menu item ESB consumers of the page EmG to open
the display with three panels.
The AC220V FEEDER PANEL contains:
• AMMETER gauge and four-position switch to select the
measurement phase between OFF/R/S/T;
• EARTH LAMP (220V BUS) lamps: R, S, T; normally the lamps
are illuminated; in the circumstances, when insulation is
low on a phase/phases, the respective lamp light fades, or
lights down; insulation monitor then points to the yellow
or red sector on the scale;
• VOLTMETER gauge and four-position switch to select the
measurement phase between OFF/R-S/S-T/T-R;
• No.1 EM’CY TRANSFORMER and No.2 EM’CY TRANSFORMER
circuit breakers 225 A to power transformers;
• EARTH TEST button for testing if EARTH LAMP(s) are burned
out; click the button, all lamps should illuminate;
• A set of circuit breakers to power 220 V consumers.
The AC440V FEEDER PANEL contains:
• EARTH LAMP (440V BUS) lamps: R, S, T; normally the lamps
are illuminated; in the circumstances, when insulation is
low on a phase/phases, the respective lamp light fades, or
lights down; insulation monitor then points to the yellow
or red sector on the scale; The EM’CY GROUP STARTER PANEL contains panels for: • EM’CY GEN.ROOM SUPPLY FAN; the fan starts auto-
• SHORE POWER RECEIVING indicator lamp, which illumi- matically when EMG starts if the switch is set to posi-
• No 2 E/R SUPPLY FAN; when the switch MSB–CMS is set to
nates when power is received from shore; tion AUTO;
CMS position the fan is controlled from CMS display (see
• EARTH TEST button for testing if EARTH LAMP(s) are burned Chapter 2); when the switch is set to MSB position the fan is • S/G ROOM SUPPLY FAN;
out; click the button, all lamps should illuminate; operated from this starter or MSB SB STARTERS 440V No.2 • CO2 ROOM EXH. FAN.
• Emergency stop legend; panel (see the paragraph 5.6 on page 75); Starter panel general description is given in Chapter 4, the
• A set of circuit breakers to power 440 V consumers. paragraph 1.3.1 on page 92

83
ESB Consumers & Starter Panels
7.3.1. ESB 440v Feeder Panel Consumers 7.3.2. ESB 220v Feeder Panel Consumers
• No 1 EMERGENCY TRANSFORMER (440/230V • NO.1 EM’CY TRANSFORMER
45kVA/59/113A) • NO.2 EM’CY TRANSFORMER
• No 2 EMERGENCY TRANSFORMER (440/230V • NAV. LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL IN BCC
45kVA/59/113A)
• NAV. INSTRUMENT DISTR. BOARD IN BCC
• NO 3 BILGE & FIRE PUMP
• No. 1 EMCY LIGHTING DISTRIB BOARD
• No 2 PORT STEERING GEAR STARTER
• No. 2 EMCY LIGHTING DISTRIB BOARD
• EM’CY FIRE PUMP STARTER
• BRIDGE CONTROL CONSOLE (BCC AC 220V POWER DB)
• EM’CY AIR COMPRESSOR STARTER
• ENGINE CONTROL CONSOLE (ECC AC 220V POWER DB)
• BATTERY CHARGING & DISCHARGING BOARD
• WATERTIGHT DOORS CONTROL PANEL
• No 3 G/E LO PRIMING PUMP STARTER
• FIRE MAIN CONTROL PANEL
• No 3 G/E LT ST-BY PUMP STARTER
• EM’CY GEN. BATTERY CHARGER
• No 3 G/E HT ST-BY PUMP STARTER
• TELEGRAPH
• No 3 G/E PREHEATER UNIT
• LIFE BOAT BATTERY
• NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT
• LIFE & RESCUE BOAT BATTERY
• RADIO EQUIPMENT
• GMDSS CONSOLE
• WHISTLE RELAY BOX
• WATER FOG MAIN CONTROL PANEL
• No 2 STBD STEERING GEAR STARTER
• ME BEARING MONITORING PANEL
• FOAM TANK UNIT PUMP
• E/G ENGINE COOLANT HEATER
• FIN STAB PORT EM’CY PUMP
• CO2 ALARM PANEL
• FIN STAB STBD EM’CY PUMP
• INTERFACE UNIT FOR SIGNAL LIGHT COLUMN
• DRENCHING PUMP STARTER
• EM’CY GEN SPACE HEATER
• WATER FOG PUMP STARTER
• FOAM ROOM EXH. FAN STARTER
• EM’CY AIR COMPRESSOR STARTER
• No 3 GEN SPACE HEATER
• SAFETY STATION BILGE CONTROL PANEL
• DRENCHING MAIN CONTROL PANEL

84
Battery Charging & Discharging Board
7.4. Battery Charging & Discharging Board 7.4.1. EMCY 24V

Click on the menu item Battery Charger & 24VDC DB of the page DC Consumers
EmG to open the display with two panels. • BRIDGE CONTROL CONSOLE
The left panel contains: • ME PS CONTROL
• The diagram of the charging/discharging process with the • ENGINE CONTROL CONSOLE
indicator lamps, which illuminate corresponding to the • EM’CY LIGHTING WHEEL
current circuit; HOUSE
• UNDER VOLTAGE, OVER VOLTAGE, EARTH (LOW INSULA- • EM’CY LIGHTING A-DECK
TION) – alarm indicator lamps, which illuminate when re- • EM’CY LIGHTING B-DECK
spective condition occurs;
• ME SB CONTROL
• CHARGE MODE – two groups of controls to operate in float-
• NAV.LIGHTING CONTROL
ing or boosting modes:
PANEL ON BCC
űű FLOATING CHARGE – button and lamp; click to start charg-
• EM’CY NAVIGATION INSTRU-
ing in floating mode; use the potentiometer to adjust
MENT DIST.BOARD IN BCC
the battery charger voltage;
• EM’CY LIGHTING C-DECK
űű BOOSTING TIME – the value displays the boosting mode
time countdown; when time =0 charging is automati- • EM’CY LIGHTING ENGINE
cally continued in floating mode; ROOM
űű BOOSTING CHARGE – button and lamp; click to start charg- • EM’CY LIGHTING UPPER
ing in boosting mode; use the potentiometer to adjust DECK
the battery charger voltage; • MSB SYNCHRONIZING
In each of the charge modes the following controls are used: PANEL
űű VOLTAGE ADJUSTABLE – potentiometer ; • GENERAL ALARM
űű RECTIFIER/BATTERY 1,2/LOAD VOLTAGE METER and REC- • FIRE DETECTION
TIFIER/BATTERY 1,2/LOAD AMMETER – digital indicators; • CO2 ALARM
űű RECT. V, BATT. V, LOAD V – button and lamp; click a button • No 1 G/E CONTROL PANEL
to measure respective voltage and read the voltmeter; • No 2 G/E CONTROL PANEL
• MAIN SWITCH – circuit breaker to power this board; in ON • No 3 G/E CONTROL PANEL
position the rectifier is powering consumers;
• EARTH TEST – button to start the earth test; insulation moni-
tor then indicates 500 kOm.

85
Chapter 4. Systems & Mechanisms

This chapter contains the description of the simulator tools
for training the watch personnel of a Ro-Pax ferry in skills
of correct operating the Ship Systems and Mechanisms.

Chapter 4. Systems & Mechanisms . Chapter 4. Systems & Mechanisms

Chapter 4. Systems & Mechanisms

1. Systems General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 2.2.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 3.2.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.1. How to Select a Mimic or a Local Operating Panel . . . . . . . . . 91 2.2.4.1. Fresh Water Generator LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 3.2.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.2. Operating SYS Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 2.2.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 3.2.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
1.3. Operating Local Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.3. GE Cooling Water Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3.2.4.2. MDO Transfer Pump LOP & GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.3.1. Group Starter Panel (GSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.3.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3.2.4.3. MDO Purifier LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.3.2. Pump LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 2.3.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3.2.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.3.3. PID Settings at ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 2.3.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3.3. ME FO Supply System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
1.3.3.1. Operating Thermocontroller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 2.3.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3.3.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
1.3.4. Fuel & Lube Oil Purifier LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 2.3.4.1. G/E Cooling Water Pumps LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3.3.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
1.3.4.1. Separator Microprocessor Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 2.3.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3.3.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
1.3.4.2. Operating the Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 3. Fuel Oil Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 3.3.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2. Cooling Water Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 3.1. HFO Transfer & Treatment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3.3.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.1. ME Cooling Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 3.1.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3.3.4.2. FO Feed & Booster Pumps LOP & GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.1.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 3.1.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3.3.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.1.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 3.1.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 3.4. GE FO Supply Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.1.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 3.1.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 3.4.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.1.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 3.1.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 3.4.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.1.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 3.1.4.2. HFO Transfer Pumps LOP & GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 3.4.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.1.4.2. Cooling Water Pumps LOP & GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 3.1.4.3. HFO Purifiers LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 3.4.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.2. Fresh Water Generator System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 3.1.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 3.4.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.2.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 3.2. MDO Transfer & Treatment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 3.4.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
2.2.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 3.2.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
2.2.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 3.2.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

87

4. Lube Oil Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 5. Fire Fighting & Emergency Shut Down Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 5.5. Sprinkler System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.1. ME Port (Stbd) Lube Oil Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 5.1. Fire Detection & ESD Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 5.5.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.1.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 5.1.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 5.5.1.1. Sprinkler Pump LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.1.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 5.1.2. Safety Station at the Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 5.5.1.2. Instructions for Replacing Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.1.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 5.1.3. Quick Closing Valves & ESD Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 5.6. Fixed CO2 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4.1.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 5.1.4. Fire Alarm Station at ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 5.6.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4.1.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 5.1.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 5.6.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4.1.4.2. ME LO Transfer, Stand-by Pumps LOP & GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 5.2. Fire Fighting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 5.6.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.1.4.3. LO Purifiers LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 5.2.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 5.6.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.1.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 5.2.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 5.6.4.1. Fighting Fire with CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.2. CPP & Stern Tube LO Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.2.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 5.6.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.2.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.2.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 6. Auxiliary Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
4.2.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.2.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 6.1. Deadman System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.2.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.2.4.2. Foam Pump LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 6.1.1. System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.2.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.3. Water Fog System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 6.1.1.1. Dead Man System Panel at ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.2.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 5.3.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 6.1.1.2. Dead Man System Panel at Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.2.4.2. CPP ME Port (Stbd) LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 5.3.2. Water Fog Main Control Panel at ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 6.1.1.3. Dead Man System Start Panel at AER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.2.4.3. CPP & GBX Priming LO Pumps GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 6.1.1.4. Dead Man System Reset Panels at Engine Rooms . . . . . . . . 135
5.3.3. Water Fog Repeat Panel at the Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.2.4.4. Sludge Pump LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 6.2. Compressed Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.3.4. Water Fog Pump LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.2.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 6.2.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.3.5. Water Fog Push Button Boxes in ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.3. Generator Engines LO Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 6.2.1.1. Starting Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.4. Drenching System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.3.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 6.2.1.2. Control & Service Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.4.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.3.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 6.2.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5.4.2. Drenching Main Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.3.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 6.2.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
5.4.3. Drenching Repeat Panel at the Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.3.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 6.2.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
5.4.4. Drenching Pump LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.3.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 6.2.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
4.3.4.2. G/E LO Prelubrication Pump LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 6.2.4.2. Compressors Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
4.3.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

88

6.2.4.3. EM’CY Compressor LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 6.5.4.4. Loading Solid Waste Matter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 6.8.3.1. Ramps Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6.2.4.4. Deck Compressor LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 6.5.4.5. Overheat Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 6.8.3.2. HPU Pumps for RO-RO LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.2.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 6.5.4.6. Incinerator Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 6.8.3.3. Operating Hoistable Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.3. Thermal Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 6.5.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 6.8.3.4. Operating Stern Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.3.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 6.6. Bilge & Fire G/S System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 6.8.4. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
6.3.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 6.6.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 6.9. Ballast & Heeling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.3.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 6.6.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 6.9.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.3.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 6.6.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 6.9.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.3.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 6.6.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 6.9.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.3.4.2. Oil Fired Thermal Fluid Boiler LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 6.6.4.1. Control on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 6.9.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6.3.4.3. Thermal Fluid Economizers LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 6.6.4.2. Bilge & Fire Pumps LOP & GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 6.9.4.1. Ballast & Heeling Pumps LOP & GSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6.3.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 6.6.4.3. EMCY Fire Pump LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 6.9.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6.3.4.4. Thermal Fluid Circulation Pumps LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 6.6.4.4. Hydrophore Unit Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 6.10. Chilled Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
6.4. Scrubber System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 6.6.4.5. Bilge Control Panel at FF Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 6.10.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
6.4.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 6.6.4.6. Oily Water Separator LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6.10.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
6.4.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 6.6.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6.10.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
6.4.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 6.7. Sewage Treatment Plant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6.10.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
6.4.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 6.7.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 6.10.4.1. Chilled Plant LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
6.4.4.1. Control on LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 6.7.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 6.10.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
6.4.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 6.7.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 6.11. Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6.5. Incinerator System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 6.7.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 6.11.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6.5.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 6.7.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6.11.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6.7.4.2. Sewage Treatment Plant LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.5.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 6.11.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6.7.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.5.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 6.11.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6.8. Cargo Handling Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6.5.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 6.11.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6.5.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 6.8.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 6.11.4.2. Steering Gear LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
6.5.4.2. Incinerator & Waste Oil Tank Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . 148 6.8.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 6.11.4.3. Operating SG from 3D Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
6.5.4.3. Sludge Pump LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 6.8.3. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 6.11.4.4. SG Control from Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

89

6.11.4.5. Steering Control from ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 6.14.3. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

6.11.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 6.14.3.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6.12. Provision Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 6.14.3.2. Fin Stabilizers LOPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6.12.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 6.14.3.3. Fin Stabilizers Control from ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
6.14.3.4. Fin Stabilizers Control from Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
6.12.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
6.14.4. Stabilizer System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
6.12.3. Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6.14.4.1. Setting Up Stabilizers for Automatic Bridge Operation . 184
6.12.4. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6.14.4.2. Stopping Stabilizers from Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
6.12.4.1. Controls on Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6.14.4.3. Starting Up Stabilizers from Central Control Panel (ECR) 184
6.12.4.2. Loading Provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6.14.4.4. Stopping Stabilizers from ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
6.12.4.3. Unloading Provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6.14.4.5. Starting Up Stabilizer from LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
6.12.4.4. Provision Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6.14.4.6. Stabilizer Emergency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
6.12.4.5. Provision Cooling Plant LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
6.14.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
6.12.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
6.15. Bow Thruster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6.13. Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
6.15.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6.13.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
6.15.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6.13.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
6.15.3. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6.13.3. Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
6.15.3.1. Bow Thruster LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6.13.3.1. Ventilation in ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
6.15.3.2. Bow Thruster Control from Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
6.13.3.2. Ventilation on Car Deck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
6.14. Stabilization System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
6.14.1. Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
6.14.2. Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

90
Chapter 4. Systems & Mechanisms . Systems General
How to Select a Mimic or a Local Operating Panel
1. Systems General The change of state of units and mechanisms is displayed si-
multaneously on the SYS and CMS displays.
The following valves are used on the mimics:
Locally controlled closed valve
1.1. How to Select a Mimic or The pumps, fans and compressors can be remotely controlled
from CMS displays. Some of the pumps and valves can be
a Local Operating Panel controlled remotely from the Wall Mimic Consoles or by the
simulator models. Local control panels (LOP) can be used for Locally controlled open valve
The page SYS corresponding to the button SYS in the bottom
local control of the mechanisms. The valves can be controlled
bar of the simulator Propulsion console contains a set of dis-
locally from the displays of the SYS page.
plays listed in its drop-down menu. The set of SYS displays is
designed to provide general information about the systems on Digital and color indication is used to display the following Locally controlled 3-position valve
the mimic and to simulate local manual control of the systems’ parameters on the pipelines of the SYS page displays: flows,
elements, such as valves, compressors etc. temperature and pressure.
Along with the page SYS, more pages are implemented in When the units and mechanisms run, their state (run) indica-
the simulator, which contain displays modelling local operat- tor body is highlighted by color; otherwise, only the indicator Locally and remotely controlled valve
ing (control) panels located in appropriate ship rooms. These border is highlighted. (motorized)
pages are accessed by pressing the bottom bar buttons: Press the Hints ON /OFF button on the simulator toolbar to
enable the simulator mode, in which a balloon hint appears on Locally and remotely controlled valve
• MER1 (Main Engine Room, platform 1), MER2 (Main Engine
the display when the mouse hovers an object: (hydraulic)
Room, platform 2), AER (Aux Engine Room), BTR (Bow
Thruster Room) pages;
• FFR – Fire fighting room page;
• SG – Steering gear room page; Locally and remotely controlled quick
The flow indicators are presented by sight glasses and by ar-
• CHP – Cargo Handling post page. closing valve; the QCV is remotely
rows; an arrow body is filled by the substance color when the
closed from the Fire Fighting Room, and
1.2. Operating SYS Displays flow is present; no flow is indicated by an empty arrow.
opened locally when required
Operating the SYS displays requires the general knowledge

Remotely controlled safety valve
of the layout and graphical representation of the information
on screen including the objects’ construction and color. The
guidelines are described below.
On the mimics of the page SYS the manually controlled valves Remotely controlled thermostatic valve
To zoom in/out he mimic of SYS displays in the simulator use can be switched by double-click.
the mouse wheel; the mouse cursor should point to the centre
of a zoomed area. Press and hold the mouse wheel to drag a The mouse pointer changes its form from the “arrow” to the
“hand” for the objects that are controlled from a SYS display. Thermoregulator 3-position valve
zoomed-in mimic for navigation to a required area.
The open valves’ body is filled in green color; closed valves
have a green border only.

91
Operating Local Panels
1.3. Operating Local Panels

1.3.1. Group Starter Panel (GSP) 1.3.2. Pump LOP
GSPs are used for operating of pumps, fans, compressors at The following description is given for general local operating
the switchboards MSB PS, MSB SB and ESB. The standard panel panel of a pump (compressor, fan) indicated by the nameplate.
contains:
The panel contains:
• Nameplate;
• SOURCE indicator lamp, which illuminates when the pump
• Ammeter; is powered and ready for use (if power CB on GSP is ON);
• Indicator lamps, which illuminate to display the mecha- • Two-position LOCAL–REMOTE (MAN–AUTO) switch to
nism state and control mode: select the pump operating mode; in REMOTE mode the
űű LOCAL – control from LOP; the switch on the LOP is in pump is controlled from MSB starter panel or from CMS; in
position AUTO mode the pump is controlled by sensor automatics
űű CMS – control from CMS (switch is in position CMS); in respective location;
űű RUN – mechanism is running; • START / RUN button to start the pump; the button highlights
when the pump is running;
űű ABNORMAL – failure/breakage alarm condition;
• STOP button to stop the pump.
űű SOURCE – power is available.
• STOP and START buttons for operating from this panel
(switch is in position MSB);
• MSB–CMS two-position control mode selector switch;
• Power switch circuit breaker.
Thin red and yellow labels (where present) designate the con-
sumer EMCY stop group (see the legend on the 440V Feeder
Panels – menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB).
White label (where present) indicates the starting time delay
after blackout.
Note: Control from GSP or CMS is enabled when the switch on
the respective LOP is set to position REMOTE.

92
1.3.3. PID Settings at ECR 1.3.3.1. Operating Thermocontroller Mode #3 “Control Setting”
The controller display outputs the Set Point in the upper line Turn the switch lock–unlock into position unlock set the
Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) controllers, or thermocon-
and the Current value in the lower line. Mode #3. The more and less buttons are enabled. The P button
trollers, are used to setpoint the temperature values for various
is used to switch the screen into modes “P”, “I” and “D” in a
systems’ automatics and to monitor the current temperatures.
round robin way and change their parameters.
Click on the menu item ERC PID of the page ECR to open the
• Click the P button. The screen changes the form to:
display where main thermocontrollers are collected. The fol-
lowing controllers are available:
• HT COOLWATER ME Port;
• CHARGE AIR ME Port;
• ME LO SUPPLY TEMPERATURE Port;
Controller LED Indicators
• FRESH WATER GENERATOR;
• K1 indicator illuminates when the output Temperature
• LT COOLWATER;
alarm occurs.
• HT COOLWATER ME STBD; • Set the “P” proportional coefficient value in the lower line
• K2 indicator illuminates when the Power failure alarm occurs.
• CHARGE AIR ME STBD; using the more and less buttons. Click the P button to con-
• ME LO SUPPLY TEMPERATURE STBD. • K3 indicator illuminates when the control valve triggers. firm the setting and change the screen to the form:
Operating description is given below. Controller can operate in the following three modes:
Mode #1 “Job Controller”

• The switch lock–unlock is in position lock.
• The upper line displays the task regulator.
• The lower line displays the current value of the adjustable • Set the “I” integral coefficient value in the lower line using
parameter. the more and less buttons. Click the P button to confirm the
setting and change the screen to the form:
Mode #2 “Set Value”
Click the P button to enable the more and less buttons.
• The switch lock–unlock is in position lock.
• Use the more and less buttons to set the required value in
the upper line.
Click the P button to confirm the setting and return to Mode # 1. • Set the “D” coefficient value in the lower line using the more
and less buttons. Click the P button to confirm the setting
and return the screen to the form with the “P” parameter.
Turn the switch lock–unlock into position lock to set the con-
troller back into Mode #1.

93
1.3.4. Fuel & Lube Oil Purifier LOP • FUEL OIL HEATER MODE two-position selector switch to
choose between MAN–AUTO control;
The FO (LO) Westfalia Separator D-type Mineral Oil separa-
• THERMAL OIL VALVE regulator to open the heater ther-
tors OSD6-91-067/4 are modeled in the simulator HFO, MDO
mal oil valve 0–100 in MAN mode.
and LO treatment systems. The purifiers separate water and
solid particles from FO and LO. 1.3.4.1. Separator Microprocessor Control System
Separator module comprises: The separator runs in automatic mode according to the pro-
• Feed Pump Unit – an electric pump for fuel supply gram set in the control system.
(1849 L/hour); Information LCD is located in the centre of the control unit.
• An electric heater (440V/20, 25 kW, two stages of heat- The R, S, M and SF, DCSV, FRCE LED indicators are not mod-
ing: 9 kW and 11.25 kW); elled in the simulator. The F1, F2, F3, F4 menu control but-
• Separator (440V/4.6 kW); tons, and the up/down arrowed buttons are not modelled.
• Compressed air supply pipeline; The RUN and STOP LED indicators show the run/stop state
• Operating Water supply pipeline (consumption 0.5 L/ of the separator.
sec., discharge consumption 3–4 L, temperature 10–
The functional buttons and lamps are designed for control-
85ºC, pressure 3–10 bar).
ling the separator running mode:
The top panel of the purifier LOP contains:
• Process STOP – click to force stop of the separation pro-
• Separator microprocessor control system unit; see the gramme; the bowl is completely unloaded before the
description of the controller operation below; timer is set to zero;
Note: The separator runs in automatic mode according to • Process START – click to start the separation programme
the program set in the control system. The ‘Single standard’ and (process time equals 7200 sec.);
‘Series’ (for FO purifiers) programs are modelled in the simulator. • SERIES – click to switch on the mode, when HFO is pro-
• SEPARATOR MOTOR and FEED PUMP groups of two but- cessed by this separator and then fed into the second
tons each, comprising: separator instead of the service tank;
űű START and STOP buttons to start/stop the separator • SEP STATUS indicator of the separator status: it illumi-
and the feed pump (the separator disk is stopped in nates when the separator runs; it flashes when the sepa-
about 30 min). rator accelerates after the start-up;
• MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker to turn on/off separator • FEED indicator of the fuel supply pump status; indicator
and fuel pre-heater power; illuminates when the pump runs;
The bottom panel of the purifier LOP contains: • ENTER – to confirm that the process should continue;
• PID controller (see the paragraph 1.3.3.1 on page 93) • ESC – to reset the controller after failure and after having
to set temperature for the heater unit AUTO mode eliminated the cause of the failure;
operation; • LAMP TEST, HELP, SLUDGE, PID, HOME, EDIT – not modelled.

94
1.3.4.2. Operating the Separator

Before starting the separator, set the AUTO fuel heating con-
trol mode with the FUEL OIL HEATER MODE switch.
Upon switching on the SUPPLY switch on the separator panel
(power supplied), the following three screens are consequently
displayed on the LCD within approximately 3 min:
Click the SEPARATOR MOTOR START button on the separator The Separat. Time timer displays the inverse time of the separa-
panel to start (accelerate) the motor. The SEP STATUS indicator tion in seconds. The control programme performs full discharge
on the display quickly flashes during the acceleration stage. of the separator bowl when the time expires, and a notification
When the separator is ready, the SEP STATUS indicator continu- Total Ejection appears in the Step line (for about 10 sec.).
ously illuminates:
Attention! The separation time modeled in the simulator equals 3600
sec.. Therefore, the inverse time on the display is counted twice faster.
On clicking the Process STOP button on the controller display the
separator abruptly performs full discharge of the separator bowl;
Click the ENTER button – a screen is displayed indicating that
the notifications Bypass Operation and Total Ejection appear:
the separator is ready:
The SEP STATUS indicator on the display quickly flashes during

Click the START FEED PUMP button on the separator panel. When the
the stopping stage; the STOP indicator illuminates.
separator is filled with fuel, the FEED indicator illuminates:
Click the Process START button on the controller display. When

the separator runs, the RUN LED indicator to the left of the dis-
play illuminates; the process is displayed on the screen:

95
Chapter 4. Systems & Mechanisms . Cooling Water Systems
2. Cooling Water Systems

Cooling water systems include:
• Sea water cooling and service system;
• HT Cooling of the Main Engine,
• LT Nozzle Cooling Module;
• LT Cooling of the Main Engine LO, HT circuit;
• LT Cooling Circuit of the AC system and Provision Plant;
• LT & HT Cooling of the Generator Engines;
• Fresh Water Generator system.

96
ME Cooling Water System
2.1. ME Cooling Water System

2.1.1. Purpose
The system is designed for cooling ME Port and ME Stbd with
LT & HT Cooling water. Sea water is used for cooling HT & LT
circuits, Nozzle cooling and Chiller Plant cooling. 2
Click on the menu item Cooling Water System of the page SYS to
open the system diagram.
2.1.2. Content
3
• ME PORT and ME STBD with run indicators;
• HT Cooling 1 :
1
űű ME Port (Stbd) HT Pre-heating Pump – 9.6 m3/h x 1.2 bar;
űű ME Port (Stbd) HT CW Electrich Pump – 48 m3/h x 4.3 bar;
űű ME Port (Stbd) HT CW Driven Pump – 48 m3/h x 4.3 bar;
űű ME Port (Stbd) HT Pre-heater;
űű ME Port (Stbd) HT CW Expansion Tank ;
• LT Cooling:
űű LT CW Harbour Pump – 200 m3/h x 3 bar;
űű LT CW Pump 1 (2) – 200 m3/h x 3 bar;
űű LT CW Expansion Tank ;
• Nozzle cooling module:
űű Nozzle Cooling Pump 1 (2) – 2.8 m3/h x 3 bar;
űű Nozzle CW Expansion Tank ;
• SW Cooling:
űű Upper (Lower) Sea Chest with suction filter; • Pipelines (dark blue – HT; light blue – LT; green – SW)
űű SW Cooling Pump 1 (2,3) – 75 m3/h x 2.3 bar; with valves and measuring gauges. • Make Up • To PC SW Pump
űű LT Cooler 1 (2); 2.1.3. Connections • Drain To Storage TK • To FWG
űű HT Cooler (Port. Stbd); • To/From ME Port • EMCY Bilge Suction
• To/From AUX Cooling System
űű SW Pump 1 (2) Chilled Plant – 10 L/sec. • To/From ME Stbd • Nozzle Cooling To/From
• Thermal Oil Inlet/Outlet
• FWG with FWG HT Inlet and Outlet Valves; • From Service Air Receiver ME Port (Stbd)

97
ME Cooling Water System
2.1.4. Control Click the menu item MSB PS GSP Panel 1 of the page MSB to open
the starter panels:
2.1.4.1. Controls on Diagram • No 1 SEA WATER COOLING PUMP;
• ME Port (Stbd) Charge Air LT Cooler Stage1 Inlet and Outlet • No 1 NOZZLE COOLING PUMP;
valves 2 ; • No 1 LT COOLING WATER PUMP;
• ME Port (Stbd) Charge Air HT Cooler Stage2 Inlet valve 3 . • ME PORT HT PRE-HEAT PUMP;
2.1.4.2. Cooling Water Pumps LOP & GSP • ME PORT HT COOLING WATER PUMP.
Click the menu item MSB SB GSP Panel 1 of the page MSB to open
The pumps are operated:
the starter panels:
• Manually from LOP – selector switch on LOP is in LOCAL
• No 2 SEA WATER COOLING PUMP;
position;
• No 3 SEA WATER COOLING PUMP;
• Remotely – selector switch on LOP is in REMOTE position:
• No 2 NOZZLE COOLING PUMP;
űű From MSB starter panel – selector switch on GSP is in
MSB position; • No 2 LT COOLING WATER PUMP;
űű From CMS mimic – selector switch on GSP is in CMS • ME STBD HT PRE-HEAT PUMP;
position. • ME STBD HT COOLING WATER PUMP.
The general description of a pump LOP is given in the para- Click the menu item MSB SB GSP Panel 2 of the page MSB to open
graph 1.3.2 on page 92. the LT HARBOUR PUMP panel:
Click the menu item CW Pumps LOP of the page MER1 to open the
LOPs of:
• LT COOLING WATER PUMP 1; LT COOLING WATER PUMP 2;
• HT COOLING WATER PUMP PORT; HT COOLING WATER
PUMP STBD;
• HT PRE-HEAT PUMP PORT; HT PRE-HEAT PUMP STBD;
• SEA WATER PUMP 1; SEA WATER PUMP 2; SEA WATER PUMP 3;
• LT HARBOUR PUMP 1;
• NOZZLE COOLING PUMP 1; NOZZLE COOLING PUMP 2.
The general description of a pump starter panel is given in the
Only one GSP panel is presented on the figure as example of

MSB starter panels of cooling water pumps.

98
Fresh Water Generator System
2.2. Fresh Water Generator System

2.2.1. Purpose
The system is designed for production of the fresh water from
sea water on board the ship. Normally the system runs un-
manned, however local control is provided.
It is a usual practice that on ships of Ro-Pax ferry type the FWG
system is not installed as fresh water stock from shore is suffi-
cient for short sailing time. Hovewer, in the simulator the FWG
plant is modeled according to DNV Standard 2.14.
Click on the menu item Fresh Water Generator System of the page
SYS to open the system diagram.
2.2.2. Content
• FWG with level bar graph;
• FRESH WATER TANK (P); FRESH WATER TANK (S);
• FWG Ejector Pump 1 – 36 m3/h; 1
• Distillate Pump 2 – 1.05 m3/h;
• Flowmeter;
• Pipelines with valves and measuring gauges. 2
2.2.3. Connections
• To Bilge
• From/To Engine HT Cooling System
• Ventilation
• From Sea Chest
• Overboard

99
Fresh Water Generator System
2.2.4. Control 2.2.5. Faults Introduced

2.2.4.1. Fresh Water Generator LOP
by Instructor
Introduced faults are listed in Chapter
Click on the menu item Fresh Water Generator of the page MER2
6, the paragraph 2.7.4 on page 211
to open the FRESH WATER GENERATOR and EJECTOR PUMP
and the paragraph 2.11.7 on page 214.
local panels.
The FRESH WATER GENERATOR panel includes:
• MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker to turn power for the pumps;
• SOURCE indicator lamp;
• Ammeter;
• Run hours counter of the distillate pump;
• SALINOMETER panel;
• AUT–MANUAL two-position switch to set the FWG control
mode;
• DISTILLATE PUMP buttons to start/stop the pump in MAN
mode.
The EJECTOR PUMP panel contains
• SOURCE indicator lamp; FWG Salinometer Operation
• Ammeter; Fresh water quality is continuously checked using a salinometer with an electrode unit
• Run hours counter of the ejector pump; fitted on the freshwater pump delivery side. If the salinity of the fresh water produced
exceeds the chosen maximum value, the dump valve and alarm are activated to auto-
• Buttons to start/stop the pump in MAN mode.
matically dump the fresh water overboard.
Power the FWG panel from the No 2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL
(use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by the The SALINOMETER unit contains:
FRESH WATER GENERATOR circuit breaker. • 20~0 LED indicators, which highlight to show the ppm;
• ALARM double indicator, which illuminates when salinity is higher than the set
point;
• ON and OFF indicator lamps;
• SEC. ALARM ON/OFF button to switch on/off alarm;
• TEST 10 PPM button to test the device; when the button is pressed the LED indicators
should show 10 ppm;
• ALARM SET buttons Up and Down to setpoint the salinometer alarm value.

100
GE Cooling Water Systems
2.3. GE Cooling Water Systems

The HT and LT cooling water systems are identical for G/E 1,
G/E 2 and G/E 3. The description given below is for G/E 1.
2.3.1. Purpose
The system is designed for cooling the Generator Engine 1.
Click on the menu item Gen 1 Engine System of the page SYS to
2.3.2. Content
• Generator Engine with run indicator; 2
• Diesel Engine 1 LT CW Electric Pump 1 – 9 m3/h x 4 bar;
• Diesel Engine 1 LT CW Driven Pump – 9 m3/h x 4 bar;
• Diesel Engine 1 HT CW Electric Pump 2 – 9 m3/h x 4 bar;
• Diesel Engine 1 HT CW Driven Pump – 9 m3/h x 4 bar;
• LT Expansion tank; Diesel Engine 1 HT Expansion tank; Aux
HT Expansion tank;
• Diesel Engine 1 HT Cooler; Exhaust Manifold Cooler;
Charge Air Cooler; LO Cooler; LT Cooler
1
• Pipelines with valves and measuring gauges.
2.3.3. Connections
• Make Up (LT and HT water)
• To/From LT Cooling System
2.3.4. Control
Click the menu item Generatot Engine 1 LOP of the page AER to 2.3.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor
2.3.4.1. G/E Cooling Water Pumps LOP open the LOPs of:
The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.7.8 on
The general description of a pump LOP is given in the para- • GEN 1 ENGINE ST-BY LT PUMP; page 212.
graph 1.3.2 on page 92. • GEN 1 ENGINE ST-BY HT PUMP.

101
Chapter 4. Systems & Mechanisms . Fuel Oil Systems
GE Cooling Water Systems
3. Fuel Oil Systems

The FO systems include:
• HFO Transfer & Treatment system;
• MDO Transfer & Treatment system;
• Fuel Oil Purifying system;
• Fuel Oil Supply system.
The system is designed for:
• Fuel reception from the shore and fuel storage; the tanks
are refilled due to the pressure in the shore pipeline and
gravitation force;
• Fuel transfer by Transfer Pumps;
• Fuel storage in Bunker tanks;
• Fuel settling in Settling tanks;
• Fuel purification by separators FO Purifiers and filling fuel
Service tanks;
• Prevention of fuel overflow using the Overflow Tank and
collection of separation sludge in the Sludge Tank (com-
mon with the Bilge system);
The fuel system operates on the heavy fuel oil (HFO) and ma-
rine diesel oil (MDO). Low Sulfur (LS) HFO and MDO is also used
in the FO system.

102
HFO Transfer & Treatment System
3.1. HFO Transfer & Treatment System

3.1.1. Purpose
The system is designed for fuel bunkering from the shore, fuel
storage and transfer to HFO service systems. Low Sulfur (L.S.)
HFO processing is also modeled.
Click on the menu item HFO Transfer & Treatment System of the
3
page SYS to open the system diagram.
3.1.2. Content
• Bunker Station PORT and STBD bunker stations;
Tank Volume m3
L.S.HFO Settling Tank 1 50
L.S.HFO Service Tank 1 14
HFO Service Tank 2 14
1
HFO Settling Tank 2 50
L.S. HFO Bunker Tank 1 Port 265
HFO Bunker Tank 2 Port 111
HFO Bunker Tank 2 Stbd 173 2
HFO Bunker Tank 1 Stbd 173
HFO Overflow Tank 10
Sludge Tank 15
• HFO Transfer Pump 1 (2) 1 – 45 m3/h x 3 bar;

• HFO Purifier Feed Pump 1 (2) 2 – 2 m3/h x 2 bar;
• HFO purifiers 1 (2) with Feed water tank;
• HFO Purifier Preheater 1 (2);
• Pipelines with valves, filters, measuring gauges.
3.1.3. Connections
• From Leakage FO Tank • To LO Purifier ME SB / PS
• Make Up • Thermal Oil Inlet / Outlet
• To MDO Purifiers • To Sludge Pump

103
3.1.4. Control
3.1.4.1. Controls on Diagram
The HFO tanks are provided with:
• QCVs 3 to manually shut-off FO flow in case of emergency;
QCVs are also remotely operated from QCV & ESD Panel in
Fire Fighting Room (see the paragraph 5.1.3 on page 122);
• Temp Set controller, thermal oil heater unit and digital
temperature indicator. Use small arrow buttons to set re-
quired temperature in the FO tank.
3.1.4.2. HFO Transfer Pumps LOP & GSP

position;
MSB position;
űű From CMS mimic – selector switch on GSP is in CMS
position.
The general description of a pump LOP is given in the para-
Click the menu item FO Transfer Pumps LOP of the page MER1 to
open the FO TRANSFER PUMPS LOCAL CONTROL panel with
HFO TRANSFER PUMP 1 and HFO TRANSFER PUMP 2 LOPs.

Click the menu item MSB PS GSP Panel 2 of the page MSB to open
the No 1 HFO TRANSFER PUMP panel.
the No 2 HFO TRANSFER PUMP panel.

104
3.1.4.3. HFO Purifiers LOP 3.1.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor

Click the menu item HFO Purifiers LOP of the page MER1 to open The faults are listed in Chapter. 6, the paragraph 2.10.4 on
the display with identical HFO PURIFIER № 1 and HFO PURIFIER page 213, the paragraph 2.10.9 on page 213.
№ 2 panels. The purifier local control is described in the para-
Purifier 1 (2) capacity is 1500 L/hr.

• HFO PURIFIER № 1 and Purifier Feed Pump 1 on the No 1
AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V
of the page MSB) by the No 1 HFO PURIFIER circuit breaker;
• HFO PURIFIER № 2 and Purifier Feed Pump 2 on the No 2
of the page MSB) by the No 2 HFO PURIFIER circuit breaker.
The separators separate water and solid particles from HFO locat-
ed in settling tanks and transfer the separated fuel to service tanks.
The discharge from the separator enters the Sludge Tank; the
level in the tank is controlled by the High Level sensors.
The separators can be run simultaneously if necessary. Control
and monitoring unit guarantees unmanned separator operation.
The fuel is heated before the separation to decrease viscosity
and provide efficient separation. The heater unit is controlled
by PID automatics or manually is required (see PID description
in the paragraph 1.3.3.1 on page 93).

105
MDO Transfer & Treatment System
3.2. MDO Transfer & Treatment System

3.2.1. Purpose
The system is designed for fuel bunkering from the shore, fuel
storage and transfer to MDO service systems. Low Sulfur (L.S.)
MDO processing is also modeled.
Click on the menu item MDO Transfer & Treatment System of the
page SYS to open the system diagram.
3.2.2. Content
• Bunker Station PORT and STBD bunker stations; 3
Tank Volume m3
L.S.MDO Storage Tank Port 100
MDO Storage Tank Stbd 100
L.S.MDO Settling Tank 50
MDO Settling Tank 50
L.S.MDO Service Tank 1 15
MDO Service Tank 2 15
MDO Overflow Tank 10 1
Sludge Tank 15
• MDO Transfer Pump 1 – 45 m3/h x 3 bar;

• MDO Purifier Feed Pump 2 – 2 m3/h x 2 bar;
• MDO Purifier with Feed water tank; 2
3.2.3. Connections
• To HFO Purifiers 3.2.4. Control
• To LO Purifier ME SB / PS
• Make Up 3.2.4.1. Controls on Diagram
• Thermal Oil Inlet / Outlet • QCVs 3 to manually shut-off FO flow in case of emergency; • Temp Set controller for the heater unit in the Sludge tank.
• To Sludge Pump QCVs are also remotely operated from QCV & ESD Panel in Use small arrow buttons to set required content tempera-
Fire Fighting Room (see the paragraph 5.1.3 on page 122); ture in the tank.

106
MDO Transfer & Treatment System
3.2.4.2. MDO Transfer Pump LOP & GSP

position;
MSB position;
position.
graph 1.3.2 on page 92. Click the menu item MSB PS GSP Panel 2 of the page MSB to open
the MDO TRANSFER PUMP panel.
Click the menu item FO Transfer Pumps LOP of the page MER1 to
open the FO TRANSFER PUMPS LOCAL CONTROL panel with 3.2.4.3. MDO Purifier LOP
MDO TRANSFER PUMP LOP.
Click the menu item MDO Purifiers LOP of the page MER1 to open
the display with identical MDO PURIFIER panel. The purifier lo-
cal control is described in the paragraph 1.3.4 on page 94.
Purifier capacity is 1900 L/hr.
• MDO PURIFIER and Purifier Feed Pump on the No 1 AC440V
FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the
page MSB) by the MDO PURIFIER circuit breaker.
The separator separates water and solid particles from MDO at
the density of up to 7.5 g/mL at 40ºC located in settling tanks
and transfer the separated fuel to service tanks.
The discharge from the separator enters the Sludge Tank; the
level in the tank is controlled by the High Level sensors.
Microprocessor unit guarantees unmanned separator operation.
The fuel is heated before the separation to decrease viscosity
and provide efficient separation. The heater unit is controlled 3.2.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor
by PID automatics or manually is required (see PID description The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.10.3 on
in the paragraph 1.3.3.1 on page 93). page 213, the paragraph 2.10.9 on page 213.

107
ME FO Supply System
3.3. ME FO Supply System

3.3.1. Purpose
The system is designed for supplying the ME Port and ME Stbd 4
with purified fuel from HFO or MDO Service Tanks. The Ther-
mal Oil Burner is also supplied with the MDO.
Click on the menu item Fuel Oil Supply System of the page SYS to
3.3.2. Content 5
• ME Port and ME Stbd – each with run indicator, Duplex
filter unit and digital indicators of the FO inlet pressure and 6
temperature;
1
• L.S.HFO Service Tank No 1 – 14 m3;
• HFO Service Tank No 2 – 14 m3;
• L.S.MDO Service Tank No 1 – 15 m3; 3
• MDO Service Tank No 2 – 15 m3;
• FO MIX TK;
• FO Leakage Tank; 2
• FO Feed Pump 1 (2) 1 – 2.8 m3/h x 7 bar;
• FO Pneumatic Feed Pump – 2.8 m3/h x 7 bar;
• FO Booster Pump 1 (2) 2 – 2.8 m3/h x 7 bar;
• FO Pneumatic Booster Pump – 2.8 m3/h x 7 bar;
• FO Thermal Oil Heater 1 (2);
• MDO cooler;
• Thermal OIl Boiler FO Pumps Module (see the para-
graph 6.3.4.2 on page 141) comprising: 3.3.3. Connections • To Gen 1. Engine • MDO From Gen 1 Engine Return
űű BURNERS; • From HFO Separator • To Gen 2. Engine • To/From Incinerator MDO Feed Pump
űű El. Heater; • From MDO Separator • To Gen 3. Engine • From Control Air Receiver
űű Thermal Oil Boiler FO Pump 1 (2) – 5 m /h x 2 bar. 3
• Overflow to HFO Settl TK 1 (2) • MDO From Gen 3 Engine Return • To Sludge Tank
• Pipelines with valves, filters, measuring gauges. • Overflow to MDO Settl TK 1 (2) • MDO From Gen 2 Engine Return • To HFO Service TKs

108
ME FO Supply System
• Thermal Oil Inlet / Outlet

• To/From LT Cooling Water System
• Pressure Air
• To HFO Transfer SYS
3.3.4. Control
• QCVs to manually shut-off FO flow in case of emergency;
QCVs are also remotely operated from QCV & ESD Panel in
Fire Fighting Room (see the paragraph 5.1.3 on page 122);
• HFO Selection Return Valve 3 for HFO recirculating;
• FO Burner Change Over Valves 4 ;
• ME HFO Supply Valve and ME MDO Supply Valve 5 – re-
mote valves to monitor from the mimic; the valves are
controlled by the FUEL OIL switch on ECR Propulsion Con-
sole (use menu item ECR Propulsion Console of the page ECR);
• MDO Selection Return Valve 6 – to by-pass MDO cooler; Click the menu item FO Pumps LOP of the page MER1 to open the FEED
• Temp Set controller for the heater unit in the HFO and & BOOSTER PUMPS LOCAL CONTROL panel.
Sludge tanks; use small arrow buttons to set required con-
Note: The Pneumatic Feed and Pneumatic Booster pumps are started
tent temperature in the tank.
by a loss of 440 V on the main bus bar. They are not controlled by the auto
3.3.4.2. FO Feed & Booster Pumps LOP & GSP standby switches of the electric pumps. The pump only can work if sufficient
pressure is available.
The general description of a pump starter panel is given in the para-
• Manually from LOP – selector switch on LOP is in LOCAL graph 1.3.1 on page 92.
position;
Click the menu item MSB PS GSP Panel 1 of the page MSB to open the
No 1 FO FEED PUMP and No 1 FO BOOSTER PUMP panels.
MSB position; Click the menu item MSB SB GSP Panel 1 of the page MSB to open the
No 2 FO FEED PUMP and No 2 FO BOOSTER PUMP panels.
position. 3.3.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor
The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.7.5 on page 212, the
paragraph 2.10.6 on page 213, and in related paragraphs.

109
GE FO Supply Systems
3.4. GE FO Supply Systems

The systems are identical for G/E 1, G/E 2 and G/E 3. The de-
scription given below is for G/E 1. FO supply systems for G/E 2
and G/E 3 are similar to G/E 1.
3.4.1. Purpose
The system is designed for supplying the Generator Engine 1
with purified fuel from MDO Service Tanks.
3.4.2. Content
• Generator Engine with run indicator;
• Diesel Engine 1 MDO Driven Pump 1 – 5 m3/h x 3 bar;
• MDO Duplex Filter 2 ; 2 1
• Pipelines with measuring gauges.
3.4.3. Connections
• From/To MDO Service Tanks
• Aux Engine FO Leakage Tank Drain
3.4.4. Control
• Two Change Over Filters Valve 2 in Duplex Filter unit.
3.4.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor

page 212.

110
Chapter 4. Systems & Mechanisms . Lube Oil Systems
GE FO Supply Systems
4. Lube Oil Systems

The Lubricating system is designed for the oil storage, transfer,
purification and supply to main engines, gearboxes, sterntube
and diesel-generator engines.
The system comprises:
• ME Port and ME Stbd LO System;
• CPP System & Stern Tube LO System;
• Generator Engines LO systems;
• The LO purification system;
• The pipelines with filters, valves, measuring gauges.

111
ME Port (Stbd) Lube Oil Systems
4.1. ME Port (Stbd) Lube Oil Systems

4.1.1. Purpose
The system is designed for the oil storage, transfer, purification
and supply to main engines. Two systems for ME Port and ME
Stbd are identical; the description given below is for the ME
Port LO system.
2
Click the menu item ME Port Lube Oil System (or ME Stbd Lube Oil
System) of the page SYS to open the display for local control of
the ME lubricating system. 4
4.1.2. Content
• ME with run indicator, strainer; digital indicators of LO tem- 1
perature and pressure; LO Fine Duplex Filter module; 6
• ME Port Cylinder Pump 1 ;
• ME Port LO Driven Pump 2 – 120 m3\h x 4.5 bar;
• ME Port LO Stand-by Pump 3 – electrical, 120 m3\h x
7
4.5 bar before ME;
• ME Port LO Automatic Filter 4 ; clogging is presented by
increasing red sections on the indicator body; 5 3
• Bunker Station PORT and STBD;
• LO Transfer pump 5 – 2 m3/h x 2 bar;
• LO Storage Tank ;
• ME Port LO Service Tank ;
• Leakage Oil Collecting Tank ;
• LO Purifier unit (1650 L/hour) with Purifiers Operating wa-
ter tank;
• LO Purifier Feed Pump 6 – 2 m3/h x 2 bar;
• ME Port LO cooler .

112
Switch the power supply 440 V for: 4.1.4. Control

• ME Port Cylinder Pump on No.1 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use
menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by ME 4.1.4.1. Controls on Diagram
PORT CYL LO PUMP STARTER circuit breaker; • ME PS Pressure Control Valve 7 ;
• ME Stbd Cylinder Pump on No.2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL • Two Change Over Filters Valve 4 in Duplex Filter unit.
(use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by
• Temp Set controller for the heater unit in the HFO and
ME STBD CYL LO PUMP STARTER circuit breaker.
Sludge tanks; use small arrow buttons to set required con-
4.1.3. Connections tent temperature in the tank.
• Make Up 4.1.4.2. ME LO Transfer, Stand-by Pumps LOP & GSP

• To HFO Purifiers The pumps are operated:
• To MDO Purifiers • Manually from LOP – selector switch on LOP is in LOCAL
• To LO Purifier 2 (for Stbd system, to Purifier 1) position;
• To Sludge Tank • Remotely – selector switch on LOP is in REMOTE position:
• Thermal Oil Inlet űű From MSB starter panel – selector switch on GSP is in
• Thermal Oil Outlet MSB position;
• To ME Port LO Service Tank űű From CMS mimic – selector switch on GSP is in CMS
position.
• To Sludge Pump
• To/From LT Cooling Water System
Click the menu item LO, Sludge Pump LOP of the page MER1 to
open the LO PUMP LOCAL CONTROL PANEL .
the ME PORT ST-BY LO PUMP panel.
the ME STBD ST-BY LO PUMP panel.
Switch the power supply 440 V for LO TRANSFER PUMP on No.2
AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of
the page MSB) by LO TRANSFER PUMP STARTER circuit breaker.

113
4.1.4.3. LO Purifiers LOP 4.1.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor

Click the menu item LO Purifiers LOP of the page MER1 to open The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.7.6 on
the display with identical LO PURIFIER № 1 and LO PURIFIER page 212, the paragraph 2.10.5 on page 213, the para-
№ 2 panels. The purifier local control is described in the paragraph 2.10.8 on page 213.
Purifier 1 (2) capacity is 2000 L/hr.

• LO PURIFIER № 1 and Purifier Feed Pump 1 on the No 1
of the page MSB) by the No 1 LO PURIFIER circuit breaker;
• LO PURIFIER № 2 and Purifier Feed Pump 2 on the No 2
of the page MSB) by the No 2 LO PURIFIER circuit breaker.
The separator separates water and solid particles from LO
located in LO service tanks and transfers the separated LO
back to service tanks. Control and monitoring unit guarantees
unmanned separator operation.
The LO is heated before the separation. The heater unit is
controlled by PID automatics or manually is required (see PID
description in the paragraph 1.3.3.1 on page 93).

114
CPP & Stern Tube LO Systems
4.2. CPP & Stern Tube LO Systems

4.2.1. Purpose
The systems are designed for supplying lube oil to Port and 3
Stbd mechanisms of CPP and Stern tube. 4
Click the menu item CPP System of the page SYS to open the dis-
5
play with two identical diagrams. The description given below
is for the system Port side; Stbd side system is similar to Port. 1 2
4.2.2. Content
• Gear Box Port;
• Gear Box Port Electric Priming LO Pump 1 – 6 m3/h x 5bar;
• Gear Box Port LO Driven Pump 2 – 6 m3/h x 5 bar;
• CPP Port Pump 1 (2) 3 – 2 m3/h x 40 bar;
• CPP Port Hydraulic Oil Tank – ;
• Stern Tube Port Header Tank – ;
• FWD Shaft Seal Port Tank – ;
• CPP Port Hydraulic Oil Cooler;
• Gear Box Port LO Cooler;
4.2.3. Connections
• Make Up (Lube Oil and Hydraulic Oil)
4.2.4. Control
• Two Change Over Filters Valve 4 in Gear Box Port LO Du-
plex Filter;
• Two Change Over Filters Valve 5 in CPP Port Hydraulic Oil
Duplex Filter.

115
4.2.4.2. CPP ME Port (Stbd) LOP

Click the menu item CPP ME PORT LOP (or CPP ME STBD LOP) of the
page MER1 to open the CPP and pumps local panels. The de-
scription given below is for Port side panels; Stbd panels are
similar to Port.
The CPP ME PORT LOP contains:
• PITCH INDICATOR Port;
• EOT RECEIVER Port; the button flashes on the telegraph
receiver on demand from the bridge; click the button at
the bottom of the repeater plate to acknowledge the de-
mand; the demanded button lights up continuously on all
telegraphs;
• PITCH CONTROL MODE two-position selector switch:
űű LOCAL – control by PITCH ASTERN and PITCH AHEAD buttons;
űű REMOTE – control from the Bridge/ECR.
• PITCH ASTERN and PITCH AHEAD buttons; click and hold re-
quired button to change pitch, and watch the gauge;
• READY TO CLUTCH indicator lamp; clutch can be engaged
only when this lamp is illuminated;
• CLUTCH CONTROL MODE two-position selector switch:
űű LOCAL – control by CLUTCH OFF and CLUTCH ON buttons;
űű REMOTE – control from the Bridge/ECR.
• CLUTCH OFF and CLUTCH ON buttons to disengage and engage The ME PORT CPP PUMP LOCAL CONTROL panel contains:
the clutch.
• CPP PUMP 1 LOP;
• CPP PUMP 2 LOP;
• PRIMING LO PUMP GBX ME PORT LOP.
CPP and GBX pumps are powered and operated remotely from
respective GSPs (see the paragraph 4.2.4.3 on page 117).

116
4.2.4.3. CPP & GBX Priming LO Pumps GSP

position;
űű From MSB starter panel – selector switch on GSP is in MSB
position;
position.
The pumps’ LOPs are described in the paragraph 4.2.4.2 on
page 116.

the panels:
• ME PORT No 1 CPP PUMP;
• ME STBD No 1 CPP PUMP;
• ME PORT GBX PRIMING LO PUMP.
the panels:
• ME PORT No 2 CPP PUMP;
• ME STBD No 2 CPP PUMP;
• ME STBD GBX PRIMING LO PUMP.
4.2.4.4. Sludge Pump LOP 4.2.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor

The description of Sludge pump LOP is given in the para- The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.7.3 on
graph 6.5.4.3 on page 149. page 211, the paragraph 2.10.10 on page 213.

117
Generator Engines LO Systems
4.3. Generator Engines LO Systems

The systems are identical for G/E 1, G/E 2 and G/E 3. The de-
scription given below is for G/E 1. LO systems for G/E 2 and
G/E 3 are similar to G/E 1.
4.3.1. Purpose
The system is designed for supplying the Generator Engine 1
with purified fuel from MDO Service Tanks.
4.3.2. Content
• Generator Engine with run indicator;
• Diesel Engine 1 LO Driven Pump 1 – 20 m3/h x 6 bar;
• Diesel Engine 1 LO Electric Prelubrication Pump 1 –
12 m3/h x 3 bar;
• LO Duplex Filter 2 ;
• Pipelines with measuring gauges.
4.3.3. Connections
1
• Aux Engine LO Make Up
4.3.4. Control
2
›› Two Change Over Filters Valve 2 in LO Duplex Filter unit.
4.3.4.2. G/E LO Prelubrication Pump LOP

graph 1.3.2 on page 92. 4.3.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor
Click the menu item Generatot Engine 1 LOP of the page AER to The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.7.8 on
open the GEN 1 ENGINE PRELUB. PUMP. page 212.

118
Chapter 4. Systems & Mechanisms . Fire Fighting & Emergency Shut Down Systems
Generator Engines LO Systems
5. Fire Fighting & Emergency

Shut Down Systems
Fire detection and Fire Fighting are modeled in the simulator by the
following systems:
• Fire Detection and Alarm System;
• Quick Closing & Emergency Shutdown System (ESD);
• Fire Main Wash Deck System with Foam System:
• Water Fog System;
• Drenching System;
• Sprinkler System;
• CO2 System.

119
Fire Detection & ESD Systems
5.1. Fire Detection & ESD Systems

5.1.1. Purpose
The automatic self-controlled Fire Detection System is located
on the Bridge Safety Station and ECR Fire Alarm panel.
The system includes a microprocessor fire panel connected
with a set of fire detectors (heat, smoke and combined heat-
smoke sensors) and light-audible alarm devices.
The sensors are located in the compartments so that they
make contours (rays) independent of each other.
When a fire is detected, signals from the detectors are trans-
ferred to the fire panel on the Bridge; the FIRE alarm is acti-
vated, and the text information about the fire location is dis-
played on the LC display of the fire alarm stations.
The FIRE alarm results in automatic actuation of the devices
preventing fire spreading: the watertight doors, air fire dampers,
and fuel tanks QCV close; the fuel pumps stop, the fans running
in automatic mode stop in the rooms where the fire is detected.
5.1.2. Safety Station at the Bridge

Click on the menu item Safety Station of the page BCC to open
the display Fire Detection Station, and remote control panels
for emergency shutdown (ESD) of the mechanisms and opera-
tion of fire pumps. • FIRE ALARMS textual LC display, where information about • MUTE INT.BUZZER button to switch off the station buzzer;
the fires is listed. The Total: value outputs the number of • SILENCE ALARM button to acknowledge a fire alarm: the FIRE
The fire detection system is presented on the left upper panel
fires; the fire information line displays the room indication/ indicator stops flashing and continuously illuminates, the
comprising:
name, the detector type and actuation time; audio alarm switches off;
• FIRE indicator of the fire having the following states: The actuation time and sequence of the detectors is mod- • RESET SYSTEM button to reset the system after the fire has
űű Not active – no fire is detected, no sensors were actuated; eled in the simulator according to the dynamics of the fire been extinguished;
űű Flashing red – there is an unacknowledged fire alarm at spread, actuation of fire dampers, and running of fans.
• GENERAL ALARM button; click to invoke general alarm signal.
least of one sensor; • LED indicator lamps (only modeled):
The following fire fighting and bilge pumps are remotely oper-
űű Continuous red – all alarms of all sensors were acknowl- űű Fault illuminates when one or more detectors break down; ated from this panel when the mode selector switch on the
edged by SILENCE ALARM button. űű Power illuminates when the detection system is powered; pump LOP is set to REMOTE position:

120
• EMCY FIRE PUMP: use START and STOP buttons; ES 1 PUSH BUTTON FOR E/R PART FAN group includes: SANITARY SPACE EXH/FAN
• BILGE & FIRE PUMP 1, BILGE & FIRE PUMP 2, DRY PROVISION STORE EXH.FAN
E.C.R PACKAGE AIR-CONDITIONER
BILGE & FIRE PUMP 3: use BILGE button to run the pump for HOSPITAL& LAVATORY EXH.FAN
WASTE OIL INCINERATOR
bilge discharge; use FIRE button to run the pump for fire TO BOILER POWER PANEL ES 4 PUSH BUTTON FOR ON-DECK FAN group includes:
fighting; use STOP button to stop the pump. NO.1/2 E/R VENT.FAN CARDECK FANS
The BILGE & FIRE PUMP(s) can be operated from GSP and LOPs NO.3/4 E/R VENT.FAN Switch the power supply 220 V for the SAFETY STATION on the
(see the paragraph 6.6.4.2 on page 152 ) and from Bilge Con- ES 2 PUSH BUTTON FOR E/R PART LO/FO/SLUDGE/BILGE/HYD. AC220V FEEDER (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 220V of the
trol Panel at Fire fighting room (see the paragraph 6.6.4.5 on POWER PACK P.P. group includes: page MSB) by the SAFETY STATION BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL
page 154). The EMCY FIRE PUMP can be operated from the circuit breaker.
WASTE OIL INCINERATOR
LOP (see the paragraph 6.6.4.3 on page 153), and from the QCV
No.1/2/3 HPP FOR RO-RO Switch the power supply 220 V for the FIRE ALARM STATION on
& ESD panel at Fire fighting room (see the paragraph 5.1.3 on
SLUDGE PUMP the AC220V FEEDER from MSB (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel
page 122).
BILGE PUMP 220V of the page MSB) or from ESB (use menu item ESB Consum-
Note: Remote operation is enabled when the pump control N0. 1/2/3 G/E LO PRIMING PUMP ers of the page EmG) by the FIRE MAIN CONTROL PANEL circuit
mode is set to REMOTE on the LOP. TO BOILER POWER PANEL breaker.
No.1/2 MAIN L.O. PUMP
The buttons with protection covers; click once to open the Power supply 24 V DC is provided from the BATTERY CHARG-
No.1/2 H.F.O. FEED PUMPS
cover; click second time to invoke CO2 distribution in rooms: ING AND DISCHARGING BOARD (use menu item Battery Charger
No.1/2 H.F.O.BOOSTER PUMPS
• CO2 TO ER; H.F.O. TRANS. PUMP and 24VDC DB of the page EmG) by GENERAL ALARM and FIRE
M.G.O. SHIFTING PUMP DETECTION circuit breakers.
• CO2 TO AUX ER;
M.D.O. TRANS.PUMP Switch the power supply 220 V for the watertight doors control
• CO2 TO SEPARATORs RM.
LO TRANS PUMP panel on the AC220V FEEDER (use menu item ESB Consumers of
CO2 system is also controlled from the diagram (see the para- WASTE OIL TANK CONTROL PANEL the page EmG) by the WATERTIGHT DOORS CONTROL PANEL
graph 5.6.4.1 on page 133). M/E L.O. AUTO FILTER circuit breaker.
The EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH BOX panel contains: ES 3 PUSH BUTTON FOR ACCOM. FAN & GALLEY EQUIPM. group
• ES 1, ES 1, ES 1, ES 1, buttons with protection covers to shut includes:
down all mechanisms in emergency groups 1~4 (see the AIR HANDING UNIT SWITCH BOARD
legend above); click once to open the cover; click second FOAM ROOM EXH.FAN
time to invoke the shutdown function; S/G ROOM SUPPLY FAN
• WT DOORS CLOSE and FIRE FLAPS CLOSE buttons to operate in EM’CY GEN ROOM SUPPLY FAN
emergency (ESB 220V) CO2 ROOM EXH.FAN

121
5.1.3. Quick Closing Valves & ESD Panel

Click on the menu item QCV, ESD Panel of the page FFR to open
the display with QCV panel and ESD box.
The QUICK CLOSING VALVE OPERATION panel contains:
• Pressure gauge;
• Handles to manually close the Quick Closing Valves in the
following compartments:
űű GEN SETS;
űű MAIN ENGINES;
űű HFO & MDO TANKS;
űű BOILER, INCINER, THERMAL OIL EXP. TANKS.
• EMCY FIRE PUMP: use START and STOP buttons to operate
the pump; it can be run from the Safety station at the
Bridge (see the paragraph 5.1.2 on page 120), and from
LOP (see the paragraph 6.6.4.3 on page 153); remote op-
eration is enabled when the pump control mode is set to
REMOTE on the LOP;
• WT DOORS CLOSE and FIRE FLAPS CLOSE buttons (ESB 220V).
The right part of the display contains ES 1, ES 2, ES 3, ES 4, ES 5, ES-GAS
buttons with protection cover; click once to open the cover; click
second time to activate the respective shutdown function for all
mechanisms listed on the legend label.
The buttons ES 1, ES 2, ES 3, ES 4 duplicate the functions of the
similar buttons on the Safety Station panel at the Bridge (see
the paragraph 5.1.2 on page 120).
Additionally ES 5, ES-GAS buttons provide shutdown functions for

the following mechanisms.
ES 5 PUSH BUTTON FOR GALLEY includes: ES-GAS PUSH BUTTON FOR ACCOM. AIRCOND.PLANT includes:
No 4 PPOWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD PD4 AIR HANDING UNIT SWITCHBOARD GALLEY SUPPLY FAN
DEEP FAT FRYER CO2 ROOM EXH FAN SANITARY SPACE EXH FAN
GALLEY SUPPLY FAN FOAM ROOM EXH FAN DRY PROVISION STORE EXH FAN
GALLEY EXH. FAN GALLEY EXH. FAN HOSPITAL EXH. FAN

122
5.1.4. Fire Alarm Station at ECR

Click on the menu item ECR SG, FA of the page ECR to open the
display with FIRE ALARM STATION – ECR panel, which duplicates
the part of the SAFETY STATION display at the Bridge (see the
paragraph 5.1 on page 120)
The FIRE ALARM STATION – ECR panel contains:

• FIRE indicator of the fire having the following states:
űű Not active – no fire is detected, no sensors were actuated;
űű Flashing red – there is an unacknowledged fire alarm at
least of one sensor;
űű Continuous red – all alarms of all sensors were acknowl- Switch the power supply 220 V for the FIRE ALARM STATION on the MSB AC220V
edged by SILENCE ALARM button. FEEDER (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 220V of the page MSB) or from ESB (use
• FIRE ALARMS textual LC display, where information about menu item ESB Consumers of the page EmG) by the FIRE MAIN CONTROL PANEL
the fires is listed. The Total: value outputs the number of circuit breaker.
fires; the fire information line displays the room indication/ Power supply 24 V DC is provided from the BATTERY CHARGING AND DISCHARG-
name, the detector type and actuation time; ING BOARD (use menu item Battery Charger and 24VDC DB of the page EmG) by GEN-
The actuation time and sequence of the detectors is mod- ERAL ALARM and FIRE DETECTION circuit breakers.
eled in the simulator according to the dynamics of the fire
spread, actuation of fire dampers, and running of fans.
• POWER indicator, which illuminates when the system is pow-
ered and active;
• FAULT indicator, which illuminates when the system is not
active due to a fault condition; 5.1.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor
• MUTE INT.BUZZER button to switch off the buzzer. The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.2.1 on page 208.

123
Fire Fighting Systems
5.2. Fire Fighting Systems

5.2.1. Purpose
The set of systems for Fighting Fires on board ship are mod-
eled in teh simulator.
Click on the menu item Fire Fighting System of the page SYS to
5.2.2. Content
• Water Fog Extinguishing System:
űű Fresh Water Tank (P) ;
űű Local Fire Extinguishing Pump – 10 m3/h x 9 bar.
• Foam System:
űű Foam Tank ;
űű Foam Pump – 6 m3/h.
• Sprinkler Water Tank ;
• Sprinker Pump – 4.5 m3/h x 9.5 bar;
• Drenching Water Tank ;
• Drenching Pump – 10 m3/h x 9 bar;
• Sections of the ship with fire fighting equipment;
• Pipelines that cross all quarters of the ship; branches into
the sections are ending with nozzles (sprinklers), which
provide fire suppression using water.
5.2.3. Connections
• Fresh Water To Main Engine Port • Fresh Water To HPU Pumps • From Compressed Air System
• Fresh Water To Main Engine Stbd • From Fire Main System • To ER. Store
• Fresh Water To Separators • To Foam System • To ER. Workgroup
• Fresh Water To Boiler Front • From Bilge & Fire System
• Fresh Water To Gen Engine 1, Engine 2, Engine 3 • Foam to Section 1-7

124
Fire Fighting Systems
5.2.4. Control 5.2.4.2. Foam Pump LOP

Click on the menu item Foam Pump starter of the page FFR to
5.2.4.1. Controls on Diagram open the FOAM TANK UNIT PUMP STARTER local panel.
Fire Main (red pipelines) branches to ship sections and ends by
The panel contains:
respective Fire Hydrant ## in Section ## controlled 0–1 valves.
The valves are normally closed. • SOURCE and HEATING indicator lamps;
Check FIRE MAIN PRESSURE on the digital indicator. • MAIN SWITCH power circuit breaker;
• START / RUN and STOP / OFF buttons r to operate the pump in
Instructions for Sprinkler heads replacement are given in the
LOCAL mode.
paragraph 5.5.1.2 on page 131.
Switch power supply 440 V on the ESB AC440v FEEDER PANEL
The pumps are controled in the respective systems: see the (use menu item ESB Consumers of the page EmG) by FOAM TANK
Water Fog system description in the section 5.3 on page 126; UNIT PUMP STARTER circuit breaker.
the Drenching system description in the section 5.4 on
page 129; the Sprinkler system description and instructions
for sprinkler replacement in the section 5.5 on page 131.

125
Water Fog System
5.3. Water Fog System • Two-position switch to select the system control mode:
űű AUTO – automatic starting of the WF pump and
5.3.1. Purpose opening of the water fog remote valves in the fire
location;
The system is designed for automatic local fire fighting when
űű MANU – manual opening of the water fog remote
two sensors are actuated in a protected room. The Water Fog
valves in the fire location.
(WF) pump starts and solenoid valve automatically opens to
let the water fog in. For automatic operation the switches on • ALARM RESET button to reset the alarms on this panel;
WATER FOG MAIN CONTROL PANEL in ECR and on WATER FOG • SYSTEM STOP button with protection cover; click once
PUMP local panel in BT room should be set to AUTO position. to open the cover; click second time to stop water
Manual operation of the system is also modeled. fog – remote valves are closed;
• Alarm indicators for the WF pump:
5.3.2. Water Fog Main Control Panel at ECR űű PUMP POWER FAIL – no power supply on WF pump
Click on the menu item Water Fog Main Panel of the page ECR to Starter;
open the panel. The panel contains: űű PUMP MANUAL MODE – the mode select switch
• Indicators, which illuminate when: on the pump LOP is set to LOCAL (see the para-
graph 5.3.4 on page 127); the pump can be oper-
űű MAIN POWER SOURCE – power from MSB;
ated only on the starter panel;
űű EMCY POWER SOURCE – power from ESB;
űű PUMP MOTOR OVERLOAD – electric motor is
űű PRESSURE LOW – alarm: WF pump pressure < 4 bar; stopped by overload protection.
űű PUMP RUNNING – WF pump is running; The WATER FOG REPEAT PANEL is located at the Bridge
űű FIRE – alarm from Fire Detection Station. (see the paragraph 5.3.3 on page 127).
• Sets of controls for MAIN ENGINE PORT, MAIN ENGINE Local push button boxes to manually operate the system
STBD, SEPARATORS, BOILER FRONT, GEN ENGINE 1, GEN are located in each protected engine room (see the para-
ENGINE 2, GEN ENGINE 3, HPU PUMPS; each set contains: graph 5.3.5 on page 128).
űű START button with protection cover; click once to open
The Water Fog Pump can be manually operated from the
the cover; click second time to start Water Fog extin-
starter panel (see the paragraph 5.3.4 on page 127).
guishing in MANU mode;
űű RELEASE lamp – illuminates to indicate remote valve for Switch power supply 220V from MSB AC220V FEEDER PAN-
fire extinguishing open; EL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 220V of the page MSB) or
from ESB (use menu item ESB Consumers of the page EmG) by
űű ABNORMAL alarm lamp – illuminates to indicate remote
WATER FOG MAIN CONTROL PANEL circuit breakers.
valve fire extinguishing doesn’t open.

126
Water Fog System
5.3.3. Water Fog Repeat Panel at the Bridge 5.3.4. Water Fog Pump LOP
Click on the menu item Water Fog Repeat Panel of the page BCC to Click on the menu item FF Pumps LOP of the page BTR to open
open the panel. the WATER FOG PUMP local panel.
The panel contains indicators, which illuminate when: The panel contains:
• POWER – power in ON; • SOURCE indicator lamp;
• FIRE – alarm from Fire Detection Station; • Two-position mode selector switch:
• MIST – any room local system and WF pump is started űű LOCAL – to operate the pump using the local START / RUN
(auto or manual) on WATER FOG MAIN CONTROL PANEL; and STOP / OFF buttons;
• MANUAL – either the whole system or water fog pump are űű AUTO – to enable automatic performance.
set to manual mode control; Note: For automatic operation of the systen this
• AUTO – automatic fire extinguishing; switch and the switch on WATER FOG MAIN CONTROL PANEL
• MAIN ENGINE PORT, MAIN ENGINE STBD, SEPARATORS, in ECR should be both set to AUTO position.
BOILER FRONT, GEN ENGINE 1, GEN ENGINE 2, GEN ENGINE • START / RUN and STOP / OFF buttons r to operate the pump in
3, HPU PUMPS – each indicate the fire extinguishing room. LOCAL mode.
ALARM & BZ STOP button is used to acknowledge: the FIRE indi- • SPACE HEATER indicator lamp;
cator stops flashing and continuously illuminates, the audio
• HEATER switch to turn the heater OFF/ON; when in ON po-
alarm switches off.
sition, the heater starts automatically when electic motor
The WATER FOG MAIN CONTROL PANEL is located in ECR (see stops;
the paragraph 5.3.2 on page 126). • MAIN SWITCH power circuit breaker.
Switch power supply 440 V for the WATER FOG PUMP on either
the No. 2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL of the MSB (use menu item MSB
Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB), or on AC440V FEEDER PANEL
of the ESB (use menu item ESB Consumers of the page EmG) by
WATER FOG PUMP STATRER circuit breaker.

127
Water Fog System
5.3.5. Water Fog Push Button Boxes in ER

The local water fog system push button boxes are installed in
MER1, MER2 and AER compartments, and the panels in the simu-
lator are located respectively.
Click on the menu item ER Water Fog PB of the page MER1 to
open the panels:
• WATER FOG SYSTEM MAIN ENGINE PORT;
• WATER FOG SYSTEM MAIN ENGINE STBD;
• WATER FOG SYSTEM SEPARATORS.
Click on the menu item ER Water Fog PB of the page MER2 to
open the panels:
• WATER FOG SYSTEM BOILER FRONT;
• WATER FOG SYSTEM HPU PUMP.
Click on the menu item ER Water Fog PB of the page AER to open
the panels:
• WATER FOG SYSTEM GEN ENGINE 1;
• WATER FOG SYSTEM GEN ENGINE 2;
• WATER FOG SYSTEM GEN ENGINE 3.
Each panel contains:
• Buttons with protection cover SYSTEM RELEASE to manu-
ally start local WF system in the room, and SYSTEM STOP to
manually stop the system.
The WATER FOG MAIN CONTROL PANELs located in ECR (see the
paragraph 5.3.2 on page 126).
The WATER FOG REPEAT PANEL is located at the Bridge (see the
paragraph 5.3.3 on page 127).
Power supply for the boxes is provided from Water Fog Main
Control Panel.

128
Drenching System
5.4. Drenching System • Two-position switch to select the system control

mode:
5.4.1. Purpose űű AUTO – automatic starting the drenching pump
and opening of the remote valves in the fire
The system is designed for automatic drenching when two fire location;
sensors are actuated in a protected deck section. The Drenching
űű MANU – system in manual mode: manual opening
pump starts and solenoid valve automatically opens to let the
of the drenching remote valves in the fire location.
water in. For automatic operation the switches on DRENCHING
MAIN CONTROL PANEL in Cargo Handling Post and on DRENCH- • ALARM RESET button to reset the alarms on this panel;
ING PUMP local panel in BT room should be set to AUTO posi- • SYSTEM STOP button with protection cover; click once
tion. Manual operation of the system is also modeled. to open the cover; click second time to stop drench-
ing – remote valves are closed;
5.4.2. Drenching Main Control Panel • Alarm indicators for the WF pump:
Click on the menu item Drenching Main Panel of the page CHP to űű PUMP POWER FAIL – no power supply on drenching
open the panel. The panel contains: pump starter;
• Indicators, which illuminate when: űű PUMP MANUAL MODE – the mode select switch
on the pump LOP is set to LOCAL (see the para-
űű MAIN POWER SOURCE – power from MSB;
graph 5.4.4 on page 130); the pump can be oper-
űű EMCY POWER SOURCE – power from ESB; ated only from the starter panel;
űű PRESSURE LOW – alarm: Drenching pump pressure űű PUMP MOTOR OVERLOAD – electric motor is
< 4 bar; stopped by overload protection.
űű PUMP RUNNING – Drenching pump is running; The DRENCHING REPEAT PANEL is located at the Bridge
űű FIRE – alarm from Fire Detection Station. (see the paragraph 5.4.3 on page 130).
• Sets of controls for DECK 5 SECTION 1, 2, 3, and DECK 3 SEC- The Drenching Pump can be manually operated from the
TION 4, 5, 6, 7 (see the sections on the Fire Figfting system starter panel (see the paragraph 5.4.4 on page 130).
diagram in the paragraph 5.2.2 on page 124);
each set contains: Power 220 V is supplied from MSB AC220V FEEDER PANEL
(use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 220V of the page MSB) or
űű START button with protection cover; click once to open
from ESB (use menu item ESB Consumers of the page EmG)
the cover; click second time to start drenching in MANU
by DRENCHING MAIN CONTROL PANEL circuit breakers.
mode;
űű RELEASE lamp – illuminates to indicate remote valve for
drenching open;
űű ABNORMAL alarm lamp – illuminates to indicate remote
valve for drenching doesn’t open.

129
Drenching System
5.4.3. Drenching Repeat Panel at the Bridge

Click on the menu item Drenching Repeat Panel of the page BCC
to open the panel.
The panel contains indicators, which illuminate when:
• POWER – power in ON;
• FIRE – alarm from Fire Detection Station;
• MIST – any section drenching and pump is started (auto or
manual) on DRENCHING MAIN CONTROL PANEL;
• MANUAL – either the whole system or drenching pump are
set to manual mode control;
• AUTO – automatic drenching;
• DECK 5 SECTION 1, 2, 3, and DECK 3 SECTION 4, 5, 6, 7 –
each indicate the drenching section; each section contains
buttons with protection cover (click once to open the
cover, click second time to invoke the system function):
űű SYSTEM RELEASE to manually start local drenching system
in the section; 5.4.4. Drenching Pump LOP
űű SYSTEM STOP to manually stop the system. Click on the menu item FF Pumps LOP of the page • SPACE HEATER indicator lamp;
ALARM & BZ STOP button is used to acknowledge: the FIRE indi- BTR to open the DRENCHING PUMP local panel. • HEATER switch to turn the heater OFF/ON;
cator stops flashing and continuously illuminates, the audio when in ON position, the heater starts auto-
The panel contains:
alarm switches off. matically when electic motor stops;
The DRENCHING MAIN CONTROL PANEL is located in Cargo • MAIN SWITCH power circuit breaker.
Handling Post (CHP) (see the paragraph 5.4.2 on page 129). • Two-position mode selector switch:
Switch power supply 440 V for the DRENCHING
űű LOCAL – to operate the pump using the PUMP on either the No. 1 AC440V FEEDER PAN-
local START / RUN and STOP / OFF buttons; EL of the MSB (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel
űű AUTO – to enable automatic performance. 440V of the page MSB) or on AC440V FEEDER
Note: For automatic operation of PANEL of the ESB (use menu item ESB Consumers
the systen this switch and the switch on of the page EmG) by DRENCHING PUMP STA-
DRENCHING MAIN CONTROL PANEL in CHP TRER circuit breaker.
should be both set to AUTO position.
• START / RUN and STOP / OFF buttons r to oper-
ate the pump in LOCAL mode.

130
Sprinkler System
5.5. Sprinkler System 5.5.1.1. Sprinkler Pump LOP

Click on the menu item FF Pumps LOP of the page BTR to open
5.5.1. Purpose the SPRINKLEDR PUMP local panel.
The ship is fitted with a fixed automated sprinkler system in- The panel contains:
tended to extinguish or at least contain a fire until other fire
fighting resources reach the affected area. A constant supply • SOURCE indicator lamp;
of pressurised water is available to the sprinkler heads located • START / RUN and STOP / OFF buttons r to operate the pump in
in the cabins and around the accommodation. The sprinkler LOCAL mode.
head 1 consists of a valve held closed by a heat sensitive ele- • SPACE HEATER indicator lamp;
ment. The element shatters at a predetermined temperature • HEATER switch to turn the heater OFF/ON; when in ON po-
and allows the pressurised flow of water to strike the deflector sition, the heater starts automatically when electic motor
plate and form a quenching spray. Simultaneously, the flow of stops;
water activates an alarm on the bridge and indicates the area
• MAIN SWITCH power circuit breaker.
of the fire on the safety management system.
Switch power supply 440 V for the SPRINKLER PUMP on the
The pressure tank has a total volume of 3m3 and is intended to No. 2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL of the MSB (use menu item MSB
be maintained 75% full of water and the rest of the volume be- Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by SPRINKLER PUMP STA-
ing air. The tank is pressurised by the compressed air to 9.8 bar TRER circuit breaker.
which maintains the pressure on the system as a whole.
Normally the system runs in automatic mode: the pump starts 5.5.1.2. Instructions for Replacing Sprinklers
when pressure drops < 6 bar in the system, and stops when Sprinkler heads are displayed on the system diagram by circles
pressure reaches 9 bar. 1 : closed heads are pictured by dark gray color; shattered
Sprinkler head should be replaced after fire extinguishing. heads are pictured by white color. Shattered heads should be
replaced after fire has been extinguished. In the simulator the
following procedure is worked out:
1. Stop SPRINKLER PUMP from the LOP.
2. Left-click the white head circle; it changes color to gray.
1 3. Start SPRINKLER PUMP from the LOP.
4. Fill Hydrophore up to 2/3 level.
5. Fill Hydrophore with compressed air for 20 second.
6. On the SPRINKLER PUMP LOP turn the control
mode selector switch to position AUTO.
These steps reset the system back to automatic mode
performance.

131
Fixed CO2 System
5.6. Fixed CO2 System

5.6.1. Purpose
The carbon dioxide (CO2) high-pressure system is designed for
protection of Engine and auxiliary rooms.
CO2 is supplied to the Engine Room from CO2 Room bottles
actuated by either of CO2 Control Cylinders Box; to the Emer- 2
gency Generator Room from CO2 Package Unit.
Click on the menu item CO2 System of the page SYS to open the
CO2 System diagram.
The main CO2 supply pipelines are painted in blue, control CO2
supply pipelines are painted in red.
4
5.6.2. Content
• CO2 Control cylinders unit; each cylinder is fitted with Out-
let Valve;
• 31 CO2 Cylinders in seven groups; each group is povided
with Start Valve 1 and used for fighting fires in the desig-
nated rooms;
• Four CO2 Release Box units for designated rooms; each box
is fitted with: 3
1
űű DOOR OPEN latched button, which models opening the
Release Box door in a selected room; at that all fans in
this room stop, fire dampers automatically close;
űű Release Box Valve 1 2 to supply control CO2 to Timer
Delay bottle;
űű Release Box Valve 2 2 to supply control CO2 to open
respective Room CO2 Distribution Valve 3 and switch • Reset button – click and hold to simulate operation of the
on light-audible alarm announcer in that room; bottle mechanical discharge device;
• Timer Delay units 4 – empty bottles, which are filled with • The light-audible announcers in rooms;
control CO2 for a specified time, so that the crew could • Safety Station set of cylinders to replace the main Control
leave the room; and Release Box cylinders when they are out of CO2;:

132
Fixed CO2 System
5.6.3. Connections 5.6.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor

• CO2 To Separator Room The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.10.11 on
• CO2 To E.C. Room page 213, the paragraph 2.13.2 on page 215, the para-
• CO2 To Engine Room
• CO2 To AUX. Engine Room
5.6.4. Control
It is sufficient to open one of the Outlet valves on the CO2 Con-
trol Cylinders to start control CO2 supply to the system.
5.6.4.1. Fighting Fire with CO2

The following actions need to be taken to release CO2 into the
certain room (e.g. Engine Room).
1. Double-click (open) one of the Control Cylinders Outlet
valves to start control CO2 supply to the system.
2. Double click (open) Release Box Valve 1 and Release
Box Valve 2 2 of the Engine Room CO2 Release
Box. At that Engine Room Distribution Valve 3
opens and the light-audible announcer starts.
3. After delay the Timer Delay unit valve 4 opens and
releases CO2 to open the Engine Room Start Valve
1 on the set of cyliners in 31 CO2 Cylinders group.
At that CO2 is supplied for fighting fire on ER.

133
Chapter 4. Systems & Mechanisms . Auxiliary Systems
Fixed CO2 System
6. Auxiliary Systems
The following Auxiliary systems are modeled in the simulator:
• Deadman system;
• Compressed Air Service system;
• Thermal Oil system;
• Incinerator system;
• Scrubber system;
• Bilge & Fire system;
• Sewage Treatment system;
• Cargo Handling system;
• Ballast and Heeling system;
• Chilled water (Air Conditioning) system;
• Ventilation system;
• Steering Gears system;
• Provision Cooling system.
• Fin Stabilizers system;
• Bow Thruster

134
Deadman System
6.1. Deadman System 6.1.1.1. Dead Man System Panel at ECR 6.1.1.3. Dead Man System Start Panel at AER
Click the menu item ECC D of the page ECR to open the display Click the menu item Deadman Start Panel of the page ER3 to open
6.1.1. System Operation with DEADMAN MAIN PANEL . the DEAD MAN START PANEL .
The working algorithm of the system is as follows.
When there is no personnel in the Engine Rooms the two-posi-
tion SYSTEM START indicator lamp is not illuminated.
The engineers should push the button SYSTEM START on either
the Afterpeack ER (page AER) panel or at the ECR (Propulsion
console) when they enter the ER thus turning the system on.
The system is tuned to start the pre-alarm signal (the lamps The panel contains:
start flashing, light column and audible signal are activated) • SYSTEM START button and indicator label, which is illumi-
after a defined time period. nated when the system is in operation;
During operation in the ER the engineer should click the • PRE-ALARM indicator label and RESET button to reset the
DEADMAN RESET button in any of engine rooms, or click the PRE system after pre-alarm has been acknowledged;
ALARM RESET button on DEAD MAN MAIN PANEL , when pre- • DEAD MAN ALARM indicator label and RESET button to
alarm signal is activated. The time counter then resets. reset the system after dead man alarm has been cleared in
If the activated pre-alarm RESET button is not clicked within the engine room. The panel duplicates the ECR Propulsion Console control. It
given time frame the DEAD MAN ALARM indicator lamp starts contains:
6.1.1.2. Dead Man System Panel at Bridge
flashing and the audible alarm signal starts. Alarm is also indi- • SYSTEM START button and indicator label, which is illumi-
cated on CMS and Bridge console. The officer on watch in the Click the menu item Bridge Propulsion Concole of the page BCC to
nated when the system is in operation;
ECR should address the alarm condition in the Engine Room(s). open the display with E/R DEADMAN SYSTEM panel.
• SYSTEM STOP button to stop the system when nobody is
To reset the system after alarm, do the following: operating in ERs; SYSTEM START indicator lamp goes off.
›› Click the PRE ALARM RESET button. 6.1.1.4. Dead Man System Reset Panels at Engine Rooms
›› Click the DEAD MAN ALARM RESET button.
Each engine room is equipped with Deadman Reset panel to
Note: The time periods limit for alarm and pre-alarm signals confirm presence in the ER.
may be set by the instructor in the instructor screen.
Click the menu item Deadman Reset of the respective page
Switch the system off on the DEAD MAN START PANEL of the The panel contains lamps to indicate the system state: MER1/MER2/AER/SG to open the DEAD MAN PANEL .
page AER, when nobody is operating in ER. • SYSTEM ON – is illuminated when the system is activated;
• E/R DEADMAN ALARM – starts flashing and the audible
alarm signal starts when an alarm condition occurs.

135
Compressed Air System
6.2. Compressed Air System

6.2.1. Purpose
The Compressed Air system is designed to generate and sup-
ply compressed air for ship systems by:
• Compressed Starting Air System;
• Control & Service Air System.
To ensure the functionality of the components in the com-
pressed air system, the compressed air has to be dry and clean
from solid particles and oil.
6.2.1.1. Starting Air System

The Starting Air System produces and supplies compressed air
for starting MEs and DEs. All engines are started by means of
1
compressed air with a nominal pressure of 3 MPa (30 bar). The
start is performed by direct injection of air into the cylinders
through the starting air valves in the cylinder heads. The mas-
ter starting valve is built on the engine and can be operated
both manually and electrically.
2
In automatic operating mode, when the pressure in the main
receivers drops <26 bar (default) the LEAD compressor auto-
matically starts. If the pressure continues to reduce <24 bar
(default) then the FOLLOW compressor starts. When the pres- 3
sure reaches 28 bar the FOLLOW compressor stops. The LEAD
compressor stops when the pressure reaches 30 bar.
The compressors can be also operated manually from the LOP.
6.2.1.2. Control & Service Air System

The Control & Service Air System produces and supplies com-
6.2.2. Content
pressed air for pneumatic mechanisms (e.g. valves, pumps) and Click on the menu item Compressed Air Service System of the page • ME Port, ME Stbd, №1 G/E, №2 G/E, №3 G/E engines, with
safety and control devices. SYS to open the system diagram. run indicators and compressed air supply lines;
In automatic operating mode, when the pressure in the Air re- • №1 (№2) Main Air Reservoir – 4.5 m3; with pressure switch-
ceiver drops <7.5 bar the compressor automatically starts.The es for auto mode (installed on inlet pipe between air reser-
compressor can be also operated manually from the LOP. voirs), safety, drainage, inlet and outlet valves;

136
• №1 (№2) Main Air Compressor units in duty/stand-by con- 6.2.3. Connections 6.2.4. Control
figuration – 177 m3/h x 30 bar, LT CFW-cooled; each unit
• To Scupper System
comprising: 6.2.4.1. Controls on Diagram
űű First Stage Air Compressor and Air Cooler; • To Economizer
The following valves are operated:
űű Second Stage Air Compressor and Air Cooler; • Control Air
• From /To LT Cooling System • Compressed Control Air Supply Valve 1 .
űű LO Driven Pump, LT Cooling Pump,bar graph of the com-
pressor LO level, %, digital indicator of oil pressure; • To Fire Dampers • Compressed Service Air Supply Valve 2 .
űű Digital indicators of the air temperature and pressure. • To Group 1 • EMCY Shut-Off Air Reservoir Discharge Valve 3 – to supply
air for quick closing valves operation.
• Emergency Air Compressor – 25 m3/h x 30 bar, with oil & • To Group 2
water separator; • To Group 3
• Aux Air Reservoir – 300 L, with digital pressure indicator, • Atomzing Service Air To Boiler
Oily Water Separator to supply generators set;
• Drain
• Air Dryer unit to supply Control Air;
• From / To LT CFW System
• 2 x Reduction station – 30 bar to 7 bar; with Oily Water
• To CO2 Room
Separators;
• To Air Cond. Room
• DECK Service Air Reservoir with digital pressure indicator,
• To FO Pneumatic Pumps
• Deck Service Air Compressor – 204 m3/h x 7 bar, cooled by
the LT cooling FW system; • To Incinerator
• EM’CY Shut-Off Air Reservoir; • To F.W. Hyd. Unit
• EM’CY Shut-Off V/V LOP box with controlled supply valves • To D.W. Hyd. Unit
to Fire Dampers, Group 1, Group 2, Group 3; • To M.E. T/C
• Pipelines with valves, filters, measuring gauges. • Fire & G.S. P/P Air Ejector
• Fire & Bilge P/P Air Ejector
• To Deck Service

137
6.2.4.2. Compressors Control Main Compressors LOP

Main air compressors are operated: Click on the menu item Air Compressors LOP of
the page MER2 to open MAIN AIR COMPRES-
• Manually from LOP – selector switch on LOP is SOR LOCAL CONTROL panel.
in LOCAL position;
The panel contains:
• Remotely – selector switch on LOP is in REMOTE
position: • No 1 (No 2) MAIN AIR COMPRESSOR LOPs
űű From MSB starter panel; (the general description of a LOP is given in
the paragraph 1.3.2 on page 92);
űű From ECR PID Settings panel.
• Alarm indicator lamps illuminate:
Main Compressors Control at ECR űű AIR HIGH TEMP – temp. > 80 °C;
Click on the menu item ECR PID of the page ECR to In automatic mode compressors are operfat-
űű OIL LOW LEVEL – level < 10%;
open the MAIN AIR COMPRESSORS panel. Control ing as described in the paragraph 6.2.1.1 on
is available when on the compressor LOP selector page 136 and according to the settings of the űű OVER CURRENT TRIP.
switch is in REMOTE position. pressure switches on the LOP. • RESET button to acknowledge alarms.
The panel contains: Use Pressure Switch LEAD and Pressure Switch
FOLLOW to setpoint the automatic starting
• No 1 MAIN AIR COMPRESSOR and No 2 MAIN AIR Main Compressors GSP at MSB (pressure ≤ RANGE-DIFF value) and stopping
COMPRESSOR buttons to start/stop compressors; The general description of a starter panel is given (pressure ≥ RANGE value) of the compressors.
• Three-position switch to set lead and follow in the paragraph 1.3.1 on page 92. LEAD and FOLLOW compressors are set on the
compressors: ECR PID Settings panel (use menu item ECR PID
Click the menu item MSB PS GSP Panel 2 of the page
űű NO 1 LEAD, NO 2 FOLLOW – automatic of the page ECR).
MSB to open No 1 STARTING COMPRESSOR panel.
operation;
Click the menu item MSB SB GSP Panel 2 of the page
űű MANUAL – operation by start/stop buttons
MSB to open No 2 STARTING COMPRESSOR panel.
on this panel and on the MSB starter;
űű NO 2 LEAD, NO 1 FOLLOW – automatic
operation.

138
6.2.4.3. EM’CY Compressor LOP 6.2.4.4. Deck Compressor LOP

Click on the menu item Air Compressors LOP of the page MER2 to Click on the menu item Air Compressors LOP of the page MER2 to
open EM’CY AIR COMPRESSOR control panel. open DECK COMPRESSOR control panel.
The panel contains: The panel contains:
• MAIN SWITCH – to turn power on/off; • MAIN SWITCH to turn power on/off.
• Ammeter and SOURCE indicator; • Ammeter;
• START/RUN and STOP/OFF buttons to operate the compressor • SOURCE, RUN, HEATER ON and ALARM indicator lamps;
manually. • Digital indicators of air pressure and temperature;
Switch the power supply 440 V for EM’CY COMPRESSOR on the • Start I and Stop O buttons to operate the compressor in
AC440v FEEDER PANEL (use menu item ESB Consumers of the page MANU mode;
EmG) by the EM’CY AIR COMPRESSOR STARTER circuit breaker.
• MODE two-position switch to set the compressor control
mode MANU/AUTO; in AUTO mode the compressor oper-
ated as described in the paragraph 6.2.1.2 on page 136;
• HEATER switch to turn heater power 0 (off) / 1 (on);
• Controller to setpoint the values for compressor operation
in AUTO mode; starting (when pressure ≤ RANGE-DIFF val-
ue) and stopping (when pressure ≥ RANGE value); control-
ler operation is described in Introduction, the paragraph 5.1
on page 11;
• EMERGENCY STOP button.
Switch the power supply 440 V for DECK COMPRESSOR on the
No. 2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel
440V of the page MSB) by the DECK AIR COMPRESSOR STARTER
circuit breaker.

page 211, the paragraph 2.11.1 on page 213.

139
Thermal Oil System
6.3. Thermal Oil System

6.3.1. Purpose
The system is designed to use thermal oil for heating the ship
consumers. Oil in the closed system is circulated by two duty/
standby pair of pumps through the fired heater and two econ-
omizers in the exhaust gas pipelines of the main engines.
A minimum flow controllers take care of the maintenance of
the minimum flow through the fired heater and the economiz-
ers. An expansion tank is used to compensate the increase in
the thermal fluid volume.
The heat consumers are connected behind the afore-men- 4 3
tioned components.
Click on the menu item Thermal Oil System of the page SYS to
5 5
6.3.2. Content 2
• Fluid Heater –1850 kW vertical design, 10/13 bar, 280 °C;
• Economizer 1 (2) – 900 kW; 1 6
• Thermal Oil Filling Pump 1 – 1.5 m3/h x 3 bar;
• Thermal Oil Circulating Pump 1 (2) 2 – 70 m3/h x 7 bar;
• Thermal Oil Storage Tank – 18 m3;
• Thermal Oil Expansion Tank – 4.5 m3; 7
• Thermal Oil Drain Tank – 16 m3;
• Tracing Manifold Supply / Return to/from consumers;
6.3.3. Connections
• To Sludge Tank
• To/From Exh.Gases Scrubber

140
Thermal Oil System
6.3.4. Control 6.3.4.2. Oil Fired Thermal Fluid Boiler LOP

Click on the menu item Thermal Oil Heater LOP of the page MER2
6.3.4.1. Controls on Diagram to open the display with OIL FIRED THERMAL FLUID BOILER
• QCV on Thermal Oil Expansion Tank; control panel.
• Min Flow Controller 3 and controller automatic valves – The panel contains:
monitor the state to maintain constant frow of Thermal oil
• MAIN SWITCH power circuit breaker;
in the system;
• Four rows of red alarm indicator lamps, white information
• Oil Fired Thermal Oil Boiler Outlet (Inlet) Valve 4 ;
indicator lamps and green operation indicator lamps;
• ECO Port (Stbd) Thermal Oil Outlet Valve 5 ;
• BURNER HOURS counter;
• Economizer Port&Stbd Thermal Oil By-pass valve 6 ;
• TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER THERMAL FLUID HEATER
• Supply Tracing Manifold TO Inlet (Outlet) Valve 7 ; electronic controller (see the description in Introduction,
• Inlet and Regulating valves of heat consumers; maintain the paragraph 5.1 on page 11); the controller effects
heat balance: automatic operation of the Boiler by monitoring outlet
temperature;
Consumer Power
• FUEL OIL PUMP 1 and FUEL OIL PUMP 2 three-position
HFO storage TK PORT 1 149 kW
switches to set the pumps’ control mode:
HFO storage TK PORT 2 98 kW
HFO storage TK STBD 1 152 kW űű 1 = MANUAL – the pump starts;
HFO storage TK STBD 2 152 kW űű 2 = OFF – the pump stops;
HFO Overflow TK 18 kW űű 3 = STAND BY – if both pumps are in this mode then
HFO Settling TK 1 80 kW PUMP 1 starts automatically and PUMP 2 is st-by.
HFO Settling TK 2 80 kW
• BURNER CONTROL three-position switch to set the burner’s
HFO Service TK 1 34 kW
operating mode:
HFO Service TK 2 34 kW
Sludge TK 23 kW űű 0 = OFF – the burner is stopped;
Bilge Water TK 37 kW űű 1 = PARTIAL LOAD – 1/2 load at burner start;
ME PS&SB sump TK 11 kW each űű 2 = AUTOMATIC – full load.
HFO purifiers 31 kW each • Two-position power switch to turn the electrical preheater:
LO purifiers 39 kW each 1 = HFO PREHEATER OFF or 2 = HFO PREHEATER ON;
HFO booster heater 130 kW
• RESET SAFETY CIRCUIT button; click the button to reset the
ME PS&SB preheaters 32 kW
heater after it has been tripped by protection;
Nozzle cooling Water unit 6 kW
Temperature set points for tanks heating are installed on re-
Switch power supply 440 V for the panel and pumps on the
spective displays of the page SYS.
No. 2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL of the MSB (use menu item MSB
Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by THERMAIL OIL HEATER CB.

141
Thermal Oil System
6.3.4.3. Thermal Fluid Economizers LOP

Click on the menu item Thermal Oil Heater LOP of the page MER2
to open the display with THERMAL FLUID ECO control panel.
The panel contains:
• Four rows of red alarm indicator lamps, white and blue
information indicator lamps, and green operation indica-
tor lamps;
• MINIMUM FLOW CONTROL electronic controller to setpoint
pressure (see the description in Introduction, the para-
graph 5.1 on page 11); the controller ensures that at all
times a minimum matter quantity flows through the heat-
ers automatically operating the electrical valve between
supply and return lines;
• TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ECONOMISER 1 and TEMPERA-
TURE CONTROLLER ECONOMISER 2 electronic controllers
(see the description in the paragraph 1.3.3.1 on page 93);
in combination with pneumatic cylinder and its combined
exhaust gas valves, maintains a constant supply tempera-
ture to the heat consumers;
• The three-position ECONOMISER 1 and ECONOMISER 2
switches allow to control the dampers selecting between
DAMPER OPEN – DAMPER CLOSED in manual control mode,
and AUTOMATIC CONTROL;
• FILLING PUMP switch 0–1 to start/stop the pump;
• ECONOMISER PS and ECONOMISER SB three-position
switches to select dampers control mode:
űű 0 = DAMPER OPEN and 1 = DAMPER CLOSED – for manual
control of the dampers;
űű 2 = AUTOMATIC CONTROL – automatic operation of the
dampers by the temperature electronic controllers.

142
Thermal Oil System
6.3.4.4. Thermal Fluid Circulation Pumps LOP

Click on the menu item TOH Circ Pumps LOP of the page MER2 to
open the display with THERMAL FLUID PUMP 1 and THERMAL
FLUID PUMP 2 Identical control panels.
The panel contains:

• SOURCE; CIRC. PUMP RUN; ST-BY PUMP STARTED and HEAT-
ING CIRC. PUMP ON indicator lamps;
• MAIN SWITCH power circuit breaker;
• MODE SELECT three-position switch:
űű MANU – start the pump manually;
Switch power supply 440 V for:
űű O – stop the pump manually;
űű ST-BY – automatic operation of the pump according to • THERMAL FLUID PUMP 1 on the No. 1 AC440V FEEDER PANEL of the MSB (use menu
the MINIMUM FLOW CONTROL electronic controller on item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by No. 1 THERMAIL FLUID CIRC. PUMP
the THERMAL FLUID ECO panel (see the paragraph 6.3.4.3 STARTER circuit breaker;
on page 142); if both pumps are in this mode then PUMP • THERMAL FLUID PUMP 2 on the No. 2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL of the MSB (use menu
1 starts automatically and PUMP 2 is standby; item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by No. 2 THERMAIL FLUID CIRC. PUMP
• HEATING two-position switch to turn the pump heating STARTER circuit breaker.
Off/On; when the pump runs the heating is off no matter
what the position of the switch is.
The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.11.2 on page 213,

143
Scrubber System
6.4. Scrubber System

6.4.1. Purpose
The scrubber system is designed for exhaust gas stream clean- tank or other suitable holding tanks. This feature is unique, as
ing according to IMO Resolution MEPC.170(57), adopted April the system can periodically be operated in a “Zero Discharge
4th, 2008 to specify the requirements for testing, survey certi- Mode” without discharging any wash water overboard.
fication, and verification of exhaust gas cleaning (EGS) systems
The captured contaminants (sludge) are transferred to the ves-
to ensure compliance with Annex VI.
sel’s sludge tank.
The SOx emission limits will require ships to achieve at least
The process tank can be large enough to temporarily hold
a SOx reduction equivalent to 0.1% sulfur fuel by 2015. This
some bleed-off for periods when the scrubber is running but
requirement can be met by using more expensive, low sulfur
the treatment plant is not, or vice versa.
fuel, or by scrubbing the exhaust gas stream. The rules essen-
tially require > 97% SOx removal assuming 3.5% sulfur fuel. Caustic soda: The typical commercial solution is 50 %. It
has a density of 1.52 t/m3 and a pH of 14. It solidifies at 12 °C,
In the simulator the generic system is modeled that removes
and is typically transported warm.
3% of CO2 and 98% of SOx.
The caustic soda can be bunkered from trucks via filling con-
The scrubber system layout has the main principle as follows:
nections in the bunker stations. The storage tank can be of
The washing solution is pumped from the process tank normal shipbuilding steel.
through a system cooler to the scrubber. From the scrubber
Exhaust gas: The exhaust gas plume in traditional wet
the washing solution returns to the process tank by gravity.
scrubbers has a high relative humidity. Marine scrubber in-
NaOH is fed to the system via a small feed pump. Topping-up cludes a feature to minimise the water vapor of the plume, and
of fresh water is needed to the extent that the evaporated or to minimise the water lost to the atmosphere and, therefore,
discharged water exceeds the humidity in the exhaust gases the need for topping-up water.
(from engine combustion).
A small portion (the “bleed-off”) of the scrubbing water flow
is conducted to the treatment unit. The treated effluent is
discharged overboard or alternatively to a clean bilge water

144
Scrubber System
6.4.2. Content • FW CIRC PUMP and SW COOLING

PUMP identical set of controls:
Click on the menu item Exhaust Gas Scrubber LOP of the
űű Suction and discharge pressure
page MER1 to open the system diagram and LOP.
gauges;
The mimic contains: űű START/RUN and STOP buttons to
• Scrubber unit with DEMISTER heater; washing operate the pump;
sprinklers; • NaOH UNIT VALVE switch to
• PROCESS TANK – 5 m3, with LAH, LAL alarm lamps; CLOSE/OPEN the valve;
by default, the tank is filled with caustic code solu- • SCRUBBER SUPP VALVE switch to
tion pH=12~14; CLOSE/OPEN the valve;
• NaOH UNIT with NaOH unit pump; • FW MAKE UP VALVE switch to
• FW CIRC PUMP – 0.01 m3/h x 2.5 bar; CLOSE/OPEN the valve;
• SW COOLING PUMP and cooler unit; • NaOH UNIT PUMP switch to stop/
start the pump;
• pH, % digital indicator (range
6.4.3. Connections 0~16) to display the reading only
when the PROBE button is pressed;
• Exhaust gases from MEs
• PROBE button;
• Exhaust gases out
• DEMISTER HEATING switch to turn
• From Sea Chest
heating OFF/ON.
• To/From Thermal Oil
Switch power supply 440 V for SCRUB-
• Make Up (fresh water to process tank) BER system on the No. 1 AC440V FEED-
• To Dirty Water tank ER PANEL of the MSB (use menu item
• Overboard MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB)
by EXH GASES SCRUBBER CONTROL
6.4.4. Control PANEL circuit breaker.
6.4.4.1. Control on LOP

The panel contains: 6.4.5. Faults Introduced
• MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker; by Instructor
• SOURCE lamp – illuminates when the panel re- The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the
ceives power; paragraph 2.10.7 on page 213.

145
Incinerator System
6.5. Incinerator System

6.5.1. Purpose
The system is designed for disposal of the oil product and sol-
ids by burning, in accordance with MARPOL requirements.
To provide for combustion process, the Incinerator furnace has:
• Electrical ignition burner using MDO only;
• Main Rotary cup type burner using both the MDO and the
oil product sludge.
The unit is fed from MDO service tank. The incinerator’s own
feed fuel oil pump takes suction from the MDO service tank
and supplies MDO under pressure to the burner unit. The
waste oil (WO) burner employs compressed air atomizing with
compressed air being supplied from the general service air
system. WO is supplied from the waste oil tanks by means of
milling pumps, and a waste oil dosing pump is then used to
supply the waste oil to the burner. The milling pumps supply
oil to the incinerator, the excess returning to the waste oil tank.
WO tanks for the incinerator collect the waste oil from the vari-
ous tanks around the ER and supply the incinerator waste oil
burner. The sludge pump supplies the incinerator WO tank.
The pump also discharges to the shore connections.
MDO is burned in order to raise the combustion chamber to
the required temperature for the combustion of solid material
and waste oil; DO may also be burned to assist the total com-
bustion when required.
In view of the pressing need to dispose of sludge and waste oil
the incinerator is essentially used as a sludge/waste oil burner
and is not used for burning garbage. The combustion chamber
is fitted with a loading door, to admit garbage. The door may
only be opened when the incinerator primary combustion
chamber temperature is below 145°C.

146
Incinerator System
Click on the menu item Incinerator System of the page SYS to

open the system diagram:
6.5.2. Content
• Main Burner using both the MDO and the oil product
sludge. The Main burner is fitted with an Air Damper and
integrated Exhaust Fan. Fuel is atomized by the com- 9
pressed atomizing air supplied to the burner from the
ship’s Compressed Service air system. 1
• Incinerator FO service system:
8
űű WO Sett. TK – 1.5 m3; 2
űű WO Serv. TK – 1.0 m3:
űű MDO Supply Pump 1 – 0.05 m3/h x 3.0 bar;
űű Incin. MDO Feed Pump 2 – 2 m3/h x 3.5 bar;
űű WO Sett. Mill Pump 3 – 26 m3/h x 0.5 bar;
űű WO Serv. Mill Pump 4 – 26 m3/h x 0.5 bar; 5
űű Waste Dosing Pump 5 – 174 L/h x 2.0 bar;
űű Sludge Pump 6 – 10 m3/h x 3 bar; 3 4
űű Shore Discharge station. 7
• The door 8 for charging solid matter;
• LOAD button 9 ;
6
6.5.3. Connections
• From/To MDO Service TK
• Compressed Service Air
• To Oily Bilge TK 6.5.4. Control Temp set controllers are used to setpoint WO heater tempera-
ture of the WO Sett. TK and WO Serv. TK . Use the spin box ar-
• From Sludge TK
6.5.4.1. Controls on Diagram rows to set WO temperature.
• From/To Dirty Water TK
WO Suction Valve Sett.TK Mill. Pump(QCV) and WO Suction Drain valve is used for draining water to sludge tank.
• From LO Leakage Collect TK
Valve Serv.TK Mill. Pump(QCV) 7 are used to cut off FO supply WO return valve is used to direct part of fuel back to the WO
• Delution air in the case of emergency. Settling tank or back to the WO pump inlet.

147
Incinerator System
To charge solid wastes, the incinerator is provided with a door • SLUDGE BURNER RUN indicator; it illuminates when the
8 equipped with an open-status sensor. When open, the ignition burner is running;
charging door disables the starting of the non-operating incin- • EXHAUST GAS TEMP digital indicator;
erator. Double-click to open/close the door.
• PRIMARY BURNER three-position switch;
LOAD 9 button is used to open the LOADING PANEL , where the űű OFF position turns the ignition burner off;
solid waste matter is set for burning.
űű RUN position enables the burner to start and run;
6.5.4.2. Incinerator & Waste Oil Tank Control Panels űű START position is used to actually start the burner; on suc-
cessful start the switch jumps back to the RUN position
Click on the menu item Incinerator of the page ER3 to open the and the PRIMARY BURNER RUN indicator illuminates.
panel for incinerator and W.O. TK local control.
• SLUDGE BURNER three-position switch;
The INCINERATOR panel contains: űű OFF position turns the main burner off;
• MAIN SWITCH automatic CB; űű RUN position enables the burner to start and run;
• SOURCE indicator, which illuminates when power is ON; űű START position is used to actually start the burner; on
• A set of alarm indicators: successful start the switch jumps back to the RUN posi-
tion and the SLUDGE BURNER RUN indicator illuminates.
űű FLAME OUT – fire extinction in the furnace;
• INCINERATOR START two-position STOP–START switch to
űű FURNACE HIGH TEMP – temperature > 1200° C;
power the system; the Exhaust gas fan starts automatically;
űű FAN FAILURE – exhaust gas fan is overheated;
Attention! The correct starting sequence would be to:
űű BURNER FAILURE – main burner failure;
a). Start the incinerator;
űű FURNACE TEMP LOW – temperature < 800° C;
b). Start the ignition burner;
űű EXHAUST GAS TEMP HIGH – temperature > 350° C;
c). Start the main burner when the furnace tempera-
űű WO SERV. TANK LEVEL HIGH/LOW – level of oil product
ture > 900 °C.
sludge in the Waste Oil tank is high or low;
• INCINERATOR EM’CY STOP emergency button;
űű MDO TANK LEVEL HIGH/LOW – level is high or low;
• RESET FLAME FAILURE BURNER button; press the button to re-
űű WO SERV. TANK TEMP LOW – temperature < 80° C.
set the incinerator system after the flame failure;
• SHUT DOOR indicator – highlights when the door is closed;
• RESET ALARM button; press the button to reset the incinera-
• DOOR OPEN display; it highlights when the door is open; tor system after the alarm condition when the cause of
• PRIMARY BURNER RUN indicator; it illuminates when the alarm has been removed.
ignition burner is running; Switch 440 V power supply for INCINERATOR from the No 2
• BLOWER RUNNING indicator; it illuminates when the air AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of
supply fan is running; the page MSB) by INCINERATOR CONTROL PANEL circuit breaker.

148
Incinerator System
The W.O. TANK CONTROL PANEL contains: • SLUDGE PUMP RUNNING indicator;
• MAIN SWITCH automatic CB; • SLUDGE PUMP STOP button duplicating the stop but-
• SOURCE indicator – illuminates when panel power is ON; tons on the pump starter panel and LOP.
• A set of alarm and state indicators: Switch the power supply 440 V for the pumps and W.O.
TANK CONTROL PANEL on the No 1 AC440V FEEDER
űű LOW LEVEL WO SERV. TANK – level < 30%;
PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page
űű LOW OIL TEMP. WO SERV. TANK – temperature < 60 °C; MSB) by the WO TK CONTROL PANEL circuit breaker.
űű HIGH OIL TEMP. WO SERV. TANK – temperature > 110 °C;
űű HIGH LEVEL WO SERV. TANK – level > 90%; 6.5.4.3. Sludge Pump LOP
űű SERV. MILL PUMP RUNNING; The general description of a pump LOP is given in the
űű MOTOR OVERLOAD – of any pump; paragraph 1.3.2 on page 92.
űű LOW LEVEL WO SETT. TANK – level < 30%; Click the menu item LO, Sludge Pump LOP of the page
űű LOW OIL TEMP. WO SETT. TANK – temperature < 60 °C; MER1 to open the LO PUMP LOCAL CONTROL PANEL .
űű HIGH OIL TEMP. WO SETT. TANK – temperature > 110 °C; Switch the power supply 440 V for SLUDGE PUMP on
űű HIGH LEVEL WO SETT. TANK – level > 90%. No.2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder
Panel 440V of the page MSB) by SLUDGE PUMP STARTER
űű SETT. MILL PUMP RUNNING;
circuit breaker.
űű MDO TRANS. PUMP RUNNING. – for incinerator.
• SERV. MILL PUMP, SETT. MILL PUMP, DO TRANS. PUMP,
three-position switches to select control mode:
űű OFF position turns the pump off;
űű AUTO position sets the pump to start automatically,
when incinerator starts;
űű MANU position sets the pump to manual control from
this panel; MILL pumps are stared when the panel pow-
er is on; MDO transfer pump is operated by the buttons.
• MDO TRANS. PUMP START; MDO TRANS. PUMP STOP buttons
– to actually start/stop the pump in MANU mode; on suc-
cessful start the MDO TRANS. PUMP RUNNING indicator
illuminates;
• ALARM RESET button; press the button to reset the WO
tanks system after the alarm condition when the cause of
alarm has been removed;

149
Incinerator System
6.5.4.4. Loading Solid Waste Matter 6. Double-click on the burner door to close it.
7. Start the burner manually from the Incinerator
1. Double-click on the burner door to open it.
LOP (see the paragraph 6.5.4.2 on page 148).
The MDO Supply pump and WO dosing pump
stop automatically. The burner stops. 6.5.4.5. Overheat Protection
The incinerator is equipped with the local automatic system
and overheat protection. The operational principle is based on
the monitoring of the exhaust gas temperature and the fur-
nace temperature.
Monitoring the exhaust gas temperature: 6.5.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor
• If the exhaust gas temperature increases up to 320 °C, oil The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.12.6 on
supply to the burner nozzles will be cut automatically. After page 215.
temperature reduction down to 310 °C, it will be resumed;
• If the exhaust gas temperature increases up 350 °C, the
dilution damper will open completely and automati-
2. Click on the LOAD button for the LOADING PANEL to pop up: cally for the purpose of cooling down the exhaust gases
and protecting the flue and the exhaust gas fan against
overheating.
Monitoring the furnace temperature:
• If the furnace temperature reaches 1100 °C, oil supply to
the burner nozzles will be cut automatically. When tem-
perature drops down again to 1050 °C, oil supply will be
resumed;
• If the furnace temperature reaches 1200 °C, oil supply to
3. Specify a percentage of combustible materials in the burner nozzles will be cut automatically, and the WO/
the solid waste to be loaded in the BURNABLE % DO fuel pumps will be shutdown;
using the up and down arrows.
• After Incinerator is shutdown, and temperature in the
4. Set the required LOAD MASS kg using the up and furnace drops below 60 °C, the exhaust gas fan will stop
down arrows to the right of the indicator; automatically.
5. Click the LOADING button. The button highlights,
the LOAD MASS kg indicator gets empty. The 6.5.4.6. Incinerator Start
RESIDUE kg indicator changes value. Instructions for starting the incinerator are given in Chapter 5,

150
Bilge & Fire G/S System
6.6. Bilge & Fire G/S System

6.6.1. Purpose
The Bilge & Fire General Service system is designed for collec-
tion, treatment and removal of bilge waters from bilge wells
and double hull area, and for supply of water for fire fighting
needs. The system complies with MARPOL requirements.
The system passes the water through the oily water separator
(OWS), where contaminants are removed and then the sepa-
rated water is discharged overboard, whilst the remaining oil
and sludge is stored in tanks and then drained to shore.
Normally, suction from Bilge wells is performed by the Bilge 3
Pump to Dirty Water Tank. In the circumstances of flooding,
suction is performed overboard by Bilge & Fire Pumps 1, 2, 3
and Bilge Pump. In the circumstances of fast flooding, suction
2
is performed overboard by Bilge & Fire Pumps 1, 2, 3 and ME
Seawater Pumps. 1
Click on the menu item Bilge Fire System of the page SYS to open
the system diagram. 4
6.6.2. Content
• Dirty Water Tank – 15 m3;
• Oily Water Separator; OWS Screw Pump – 5 m3/h x 2 bar;
• Bilge & Fire Pump 1 (2, 3) 1 – 280 m3/h x 10 bar;
• Bilge Pump 2 – 5 m3/h x 3 bar;
• EMCY Fire Pump 3 – 280 m3/h x 10 bar;
• Bilge Wells in compartments with indicators of high (90%)
and low (10%) level; level is pictured by brown color on the
well bar graph;
• Fire Hydrophore;
• Hydrofore Unit (ToppingUp) Pump 4 – 50 m3/h x 10 bar;

151
6.6.3. Connections
• Cross-over
• To Fire Main System
• From Ballast System
• To Main Sea CW Pumps
• To Sludge Pump
• Backflush Water Inlet
• Control Air
• Compressed Air
6.6.4. Control
6.6.4.1. Control on Diagram
Use temp set spin controls in Dirty Water Tank to set point tem-
perature for the tank heater.
When a well level is high the well indicator turns red.
6.6.4.2. Bilge & Fire Pumps LOP & GSP

graph 1.3.2 on page 92. Bilge & Fire Pumps
Click on the menu item Bilge Fire and Ballast Pumps LOP of the page The pumps are operated:
AER to open No 1 BILGE & FIRE PUMP, No 2 BILGE & FIRE PUMP,
• Manually from this LOP – when selector switch on LOP is in
No 3 BILGE & FIRE PUMP and BILGE PUMP control panels.
LOCAL position;
Bilge Pump • Remotely – selector switch on LOP is in REMOTE position:
If the mode selector switch on the Bilge pump panel is in AUTO űű From MSB starter panel; or from the Bilge Control Panel
position the pump automatically starts when the AFT BW level in Fire Fighting room ( see the paragraph 6.6.4.5 on
= 80% and stops when the level = 10%. page 154); or from the Safety Station panel at the
Bridge (see the paragraph 5.1.2 on page 120) – when se-
Switch the power supply 440 V for BILGE PUMP on the No. 2
lector switch on GSP is in MSB position;
AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of
the page MSB) by the BILGE PUMP STARTER circuit breaker. űű From CMS mimic – when selector switch on GSP is in
CMS position.

152

No 1 BILGE & FIRE PUMP panel.
No 2 BILGE & FIRE PUMP and No 3 BILGE & FIRE PUMP panels.
6.6.4.3. EMCY Fire Pump LOP

Click on the menu item EM’CY Fire Pump LOP of the page MER1 to
open EMCY FIRE PUMP control panel.
The panel contains:
• Two-position mode selector switch:
űű LOCAL – to operate the pump using the local START / RUN
and STOP / OFF buttons;
űű REMOTE – to enable control from MSB, Safety Sta-
tion panel at the Bridge (see the paragraph 5.1.2 on
page 120), from the QCV & ESD panel in Fire fighting
room (see the paragraph 5.1.3 on page 122), and CMS.
• START / RUN and STOP / OFF buttons r to operate the pump in
LOCAL mode.
• SPACE HEATER indicator lamp;
• HEATER switch to turn the heater OFF/ON; when in ON po- 6.6.4.4. Hydrophore Unit Pump
sition, the heater starts automatically when electic motor The pump operates automatically when pressure is sufficient
stops; in the Fire Main System.
• MAIN SWITCH power circuit breaker. Switch the power supply 440 V for FIRE HYDROPHORE UNIT
Switch power supply 440 V for the EMCY FIRE PUMP on either the PUMP on the No. 1 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB
AC440V FEEDER PANEL of the ESB (use menu item ESB Consumers of Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by the FIRE HYDROPHORE
the page EmG) by EMCY FIRE PUMP STATRER circuit breaker. UNIT PUMP STARTER circuit breaker.

153
6.6.4.5. Bilge Control Panel at FF Room

Click on the menu item Bilge Control Panel of the page FFR to
open the display.
The mimic contains:
• BILGE & FIRE PUMP No 1, BILGE & FIRE PUMP No 2, BILGE
& FIRE PUMP No 3, BILGE PUMP control panels; operation
from these panels has priority over control mode set-
tings on the pump’s GSP (see the paragraph 6.6.4.2 on
page 152), if SUPPLY switch is ON;
űű For a BILGE & FIRE PUMP: use BILGE button to run for
bilge discharge; use FIRE button to run for fire fighting;
use STOP button to stop the pump.
űű For BILGE PUMP: use START and STOP buttons;
űű SUCTION PRESSURE – use the gauge to monitor the
pump suction pressure.
• FIRE MAIN PRESSURE gauge;
• LOW AIR PRESSURE alarm indicator lamp, which illuminates
when control pressure for valves’ operation < 6 bar;
• CONTROL AIR PRESSURE gauge;
• NORMAL SUPPLY indicator lamp, which illuminates when
control power for the panel is supplied from MSB;
• EM’CY SUPPLY indicator lamp, which illuminates when con-
trol power for the panel is supplied from ESB
• SUPPLY two-position switch to turn power for the panel
OFF/ON; when power in ON it is automatically supplied
from MSB; in the circumstances when MSB is dead, power
is supplied from ESB;
• VALVE CLOSE/OPEN state legend to explain the perfor- Switch power supply 220V from MSB (use menu item MSB Feeder Note: When control is obtained from this panel, the state of
mance of two-position switches on the diagram (green Panel 220V of the page MSB) or from ESB (use menu item ESB Con- pumps is preserved, hovewer the state of valves is lost and need to
LED indicates cllosed valve, red LED – open valve). sumers of the page EmG) by SAFETY STATION BILGE CONTROL be restored manually.
PANEL circuit breakers.
• Bilge system diagram with controlled valves and alarm LED
indicators in Bilge wells. Supply Control Air for the valves operation at the system dia-
gram (see the paragraph 6.2.4.1 on page 137).

154
6.6.4.6. Oily Water Separator LOP űű O – separator is ready to start;

űű AUTO – the separator starts when the upper level (85%
Click on the menu item Oily Water Separator of the page MER2 to
of the volume) in the Dirty Water Tank is reached, and
open the seperator LOP.
stops upon reaching the low level (10% of the volume).
The separator is a fully automatic device. • SUPPLY two-position power switch OFF–ON.
The automatics of the separator define the content of oil prod- The OIL CONTENT METER panel contains:
ucts in water (Oil Content Set Point unit is used to set 5–15
• Indicator panel; actual or set point value is displayed;
ppm alarm limit value) and controls the three-way drain valve
(at the separator outlet). If the content of oily products at the • ON indicator lamp;
outlet of the separator are below the set point value, the drain • ALARM 1 and ALARM 2 – indicator lamps: the lamps can
is flowed overboard. If the content of oily products at the out- illuminate in green/red:
let of the separator are above the set point value, the drain is űű Green – when concentration is in normal range;
forwarded back to the Oily Water Tank.
űű Red – when concentration exceeds the set point, with
As long as the separated oil is collected in the upper part of time delays: ALARM 1 has as a 2 sec. time delay, ALARM 2
the separator, the oil level sensor provides an automatic oil has as a 10 sec. time delay.
discharge to the Sludge Tank. Then the separator is automati- • SYSTEM indicator lamp; the lamp illuminates when the unit
cally washed with fresh water. All washing process is under experiences a failure;
automatic control.
• SUPPLY two-position power switch OFF–ON;
The Oil Content Meter measures oil content in purified water • SET POINT ON setter actuation button. When clicked, the
and actuates the emergency alarm if an alarm set point is button illuminates and enables the UP and DOWN buttons.
exceeded. If this circumstance the device produces a signal When clicked again, the button lights down and confirms
which actuates the emergency alarm or special electromag- the entered set point; the UP and DOWN buttons in this po-
netic valves controlling the entire water flow. Other set points sition are disabled;
(5 ppm or 10 ppm) are possible and can be adjusted at any
• UP and DOWN buttons – to increase and decrease the set
time by using the buttons at the front panel.
point (when SET POINT ON button is illuminated); set point
The OILY WATER SEPARATOR panel contains • DIRTY WATER TK LEVEL indicator lamp; the lamp illumi- value is displayed on the indicator panel.
nates when Dirty Waterr Tank level is high enough for the
• SOURCE and FAILURE indicator lamps; Switch the power supply 220 V for the OWS on the AC220V
separator to start;
FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 220V of the page
• STATUS indicator lamp; the lamp can illuminate in red/or- • HEATER two-position switch OFF–ON to turn the electrical MSB) by the OILY WATER SEPARATOR circuit breaker.
ange/green depending on the separator running state: heater on/off;
űű Red – discharge of filtered oil to the Sludge Tank; • HAND–O–AUTO three-position mode selector switch:
űű Orange – washing of the separator; űű HAND – separator is running regardless of the level in 6.6.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor
űű Green – water discharge. Dirty Water Tank;
page 214, the paragraph 2.11.8 on page 214.

155
Sewage Treatment Plant System
6.7. Sewage Treatment Plant System

6.7.1. Purpose
The system provides collection, cleaning and disposal of gal-
ley, sanitary and lavatory waters throughout the ship. The sys-
tem is designed to run unmanned, hovewer manual control of
the Sewage treatment plant is provided.
Click on the menu item Sewage Treatment Plant of the page SYS
to open the system diagram. 4
6.7.2. Content
• Sewage Treatment Plant comprising:
űű SURGE TANK;
űű EFFLUENT TANK;
űű Sewage Treatment Plant Overboard Pump 1 – 20 m3/h
x 3 bar;
űű Macerator pump 2 with macerator run indicator. 3
űű Omnipure Cell 3 ;
• VACUUM COLLECTION TK ;
• Vacuum Collection TK Pump 4 ;
2
6.7.3. Connections 1
• Sea water
• Grey Water Gravity Inlet
• Vent. To Outdors
• To vacuum collection 6.7.4. Control
• To overboard discharge
Use Vacuum Collection TK Pump Discharge Valve to discharge
the tank content to the Sewage Treatment Plant.

156
Sewage Treatment Plant System
6.7.4.2. Sewage Treatment Plant LOP The bottom panel contains:
Click on the menu item Sewage Treatment Plant of the page AER • MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker to power the STP;
to open the plant LOP. • PUMP MOTOR M1 ELAPSED TIME – hours counter;
The top panel contains: • Indicator/alarm lamps – illuminate in the following cases
(faults are introduced by the instructor):
• POWER ON lamp – illuminates when the unit receives power;
űű PUMP MOTOR M1 FAILURE;
• SYSTEM ON indicator – illuminates when the plant is
űű HIGH LEVEL FAILURE – level in Vacuum Collection Tank
switched on by the SYSTEM SWITCH;
> 90%;
• SYSTEM SWITCH three-position selector switch:
űű HIGH LEVEL REACHED – level in Vacuum Collection Tank
űű AUTO – normal cell and macerator/overboard discharge reaches the upper limit;
pumps operation;
űű MAIN VOLTAGE CONNECTED ;
űű OFF – cell off, and macerator/overboard discharge
űű PUMP MOTOR M1 RUNNING ;
pumps are stopped;
űű DISCHARGING ON – discharge pump runs;
űű HAND – not modeled.
űű VACUUM FAILURE – the circulation pump runs continu-
• CELL SWITCH two-position selector switch:
ously for >15 min;
űű AUTO – normal automatic cell and macerator/overboard
űű LOW LEVEL REACHED – level in Effluent tank is low.
discharge pumps operation;
• VACUUM MODE three-position selector switch: MAN – O –
űű OVERRIDE – settings of the automatic control gauges are
AUTO – (only AUTO mode is modeled);
overridden, the pumps run.
• DISCHARGE MODE three-position selector switch: MAN – O
• CELL ALARM RESET button to reset the factory settings of the
– AUTO – (only AUTO mode is modeled);
plant automatics;;
• LOW LEVEL BYPASS button to ignore the Effluent tank low
• Alarm lamps – illuminate in the following cases (faults are
level signal which stops the discharge pump; click and hold
introduced by the instructor):
for the pump to continue running till the tank is empty;
űű SYSTEM ALARM – salinity is low in the system;
• ALARM RESET button to acknowledge alarms.
űű HIGH LEVEL ALARM – surge tank level > 0.965 m;
Switch the power supply 440 V for SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT
űű HIGH TEMP. ALARM – high cell temperature (fault set by on the No 2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder
instructor); Panel 440V of the page MSB) by the SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT
űű HIGH PRESSURE ALARM – SWT Orifice Plate fouling (fault circuit breaker.
set by instructor).
• AMMETER and VOLTMETER gauges. 6.7.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor
page 215.

157
Cargo Handling Systems
6.8. Cargo Handling Systems 6.8.3. Control

6.8.1. Purpose 6.8.3.1. Ramps Control Panels űű FLOAT ON lamp – illuminates to indicate the
FLOAT mode ON;
The Stern Ramp and Hoistable Ramp are deck mechanisms Click on the menu item Ramps Control Panels of the page CHP to open the
display with ramps’ controls. • Buttons to operate the ramp when CONTROL
designed for use in cargo loading/unloading processes. The
switch is in ON position and :
own hydraulic power unit is used to drive the ramps. The OPERATING PANEL STERN RAMP contains:
űű OPEN – click and hold to open the ramp;
In the simulator simultaneous operation of Stern and Hoistable • CONTROL OFF–ON activation switch; űű CLOSE – click and hold to close the ramp;
ramps is not modeled.
• Indicator and alarm lamps, which illuminate in the following cases: űű FLOAT – click to set the FLOAT mode.
6.8.2. Content űű POWER ON lamp – illuminates when the panel is powered; • EMERGENCY STOP button.
űű ANGLE EXCEEDED lamp – illuminates when the ramp is open; Attention! When the STERN ramp is in FLOAT mode the
In the simulator the following systems are modeled:
űű RAMP CLOSED lamp – illuminates when the ramp is closed; HOISTABLE ramp buttons HOIST and LOWER are disabled!
• 3 x Hydraulic Power Unit pump starter; űű PUMP 1 RUN ; PUMP 2 RUN ; PUMP 3 RUN lamps – illuminate The OPERATING PANEL HOISTABLE RAMP contains:
• Stern Ramp control panel; when HPU pumps are running;
• CONTROL OFF–ON activation switch;
• Hoistable Ramp control panel. űű PUMP FAULT alarm lamp – illuminates when any HPU pump fails;
• Indicator and alarm lamps, which illuminate in
űű CLEATS OFF , CLEATS ON lamps – illuminate to indicate the state
the following cases:
of cleats;
űű POWER ON lamp – illuminates when the panel
is powered;
űű RAMP HOISTED ; RAMP LOWERED lamps – il-
luminate to indicate the ramp state;
űű PUMP 1 RUN ; PUMP 2 RUN ; PUMP 3 RUN
lamps – illuminate when HPU pumps are
running;
űű PUMP FAULT alarm lamp – illuminates when
any HPU pump fails;
űű CLEATS OFF , CLEATS ON lamps – illuminate to
indicate the state of cleats.
• Buttons to operate the ramp when CONTROL
switch is in ON position:
űű HOIST – click and hold to raise the ramp;
űű LOWER – click and hold to lower the ramp;

158
6.8.3.2. HPU Pumps for RO-RO LOP

Click on the menu item HPP for RO-RO LOP of the page MER2 to open the
display with three identical panels of HPU pumps.
The description given is for No 1 HPU RO-RO PUMP panel. Panels No 2
HPU RO-RO PUMP and No 3 HPU RO-RO PUMP are similar to No 1.
• START/RUN and STOP buttons to operate the pump in LOCAL mode;
The No 1 HPU RO-RO PUMP panel contains:
• MOTOR HEATER lamp – illuminates when the heater is ON;
• MAIN SWITCH – to turn power on/off
• MOTOR OVERLOAD alarm lamp – not all pumps have started auto-
• POWER ON MAIN lamp – illuminates when the ; matically at ramps operation;
• Two position mode selector switch: • Ammeter – to indicate starting and load currents.
űű LOCAL – set to start/stop from this LOP; Switch the power supply 440 V for HPU RO-RO PUMPs on the No 2
űű REMOTE – set to start from the ramps control panels only (see the AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page
paragraph 6.8.3.1 on page 158). MSB) by the HYD POWER PACK FOR RO-RO circuit breaker.

159
6.8.3.3. Operating Hoistable Ramp To hoist Hoistable ramp: 6.8.3.4. Operating Stern Ramp
1. Set the CONTROL switch to position
To operate the ramp: ON (activate control buttons).
To operate the ramp:
›› Make sure that the panel receives power: POWER ON lamp ›› Make sure that the panel receives power: POWER ON lamp
2. Click and hold the button HOIST. At that:
is illuminated. is illuminated.
űű Three HPU pumps start automatically and PUMP 1–3
›› On all HPU RO-RO PUMP starter panels set the mode selec- ›› On all HPU RO-RO PUMP starter panels set the mode selec-
RUN lamps illuminate;
tor switches to REMOTE. tor switches to REMOTE.
űű The ramp raises in next 25 seconds, and then RAMP
To lower Hoistable ramp: HOISTED lamp illuminates; To open Stern ramp:
1. Set the CONTROL switch to position űű Lamp CLEATS OFF lights down after 2 seconds delay; 1. Set the CONTROL switch to position
ON (activate control buttons). ON (activate control buttons).
űű Lamp CLEATS ON illuminates after 2 seconds delay.
2. Click and hold the button LOWER. At that: 3. Release the button HOIST. The ramp is hoisted, 2. Click and hold the button OPEN. At that:
űű Three HPU pumps start automatically and PUMP 1–3 and the HPU pumps are running. űű Three HPU pumps start automatically and PUMP 1–3
RUN lamps illuminate; RUN lamps illuminate;
4. Set the CONTROL switch to position OFF (deactivate
űű Lamp CLEATS ON lights down after 2 seconds delay; control buttons and stop the pumps). At that: űű Lamp CLEATS ON lights down after 2 seconds delay;
űű Lamp CLEATS OFF illuminates after 2 seconds delay; űű The lamps RAMP HOISTED and CLEATS ON are űű Lamp CLEATS OFF illuminates after 2 seconds delay;
űű The ramp lowers in next 25 seconds, and then RAMP illuminated; űű The ramp lowers in next 25 seconds, and then ANGLE
LOWERED lamp illuminates. űű The lamps PUMP 1–3 RUN light down. EXEEDED lamp illuminates.
3. Release the button LOWER. The ramp is lowered, 3. Release the button OPEN. The ramp is open,
and the HPU pumps are running. and the HPU pumps are running.
4. Set the CONTROL switch to position OFF (deactivate 4. Click the button FLOAT. At that: the lamp FLOAT ON
control buttons and stop the pumps). At that: illuminates, and lamp ANGLE EXEEDED lights down.
űű The lamps RAMP LOWERED and CLEATS OFF are 5. Set the CONTROL switch to position OFF (deactivate
illuminated. control buttons and stop the pumps). At that:
űű The lamps PUMP 1–3 RUN light down. űű The pumps 1 and 2 stop, the lamps PUMP 1 RUN and
PUMP 2 RUN light down. The pump 3 is running.

160
Attention! When FLOAT ON lamp is illuminated the Hoistable Ramp To close Stern ramp 6.8.4. Faults Introduced by Instructor
operation is disabled. CONTROL switch on the ramp panel does not 1. Set the CONTROL switch to position
activate the LOWER and HOIST buttons. Introduced faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.11.5
ON (activate control buttons).
on page 214.
To operate Hoistable Ramp when Stern Ramp is open 2. Click and hold the button CLOSE. At that:
The FLOAT ON mode should be canceled as follows: űű Two HPU pumps (1, 2) start automatically and PUMP 1–3
RUN lamps illuminate;
1. Set the CONTROL switch to position
űű The ramp closes in next 25 seconds, and then RAMP
ON (activate control buttons).
CLOSED lamp illuminates;
2. Click the button FLOAT. At that: the
űű Lamp CLEATS OFF lights down after 2 seconds delay;
lamp FLOAT ON lights down.
űű Lamp CLEATS ON illuminates after 2 seconds delay.
3. Set the CONTROL switch to position OFF. At that:
3. Release the button CLOSE. The ramp is closed, the
űű Pump 3 stops, the lamp PUMP 3 RUN lights down;
cleats are ON, and the HPU pumps are running.
űű The lamp ANGLE EXEEDED illuminates.
4. Set the CONTROL switch to position OFF (deactivate
4. Opearte the Hoistable Ramp as required. When control buttons and stop the pumps). At that:
done, set the CONTROL switch to position OFF
űű The lamps RAMP CLOSED and CLEATS ON are
on the Hoistable Ramp control panel.
illuminated;
5. Set the CONTROL switch to position ON.
űű The lamps PUMP 1–3 RUN light down.
6. Click the button FLOAT. At that:
űű Pump 3 starts, the lamp PUMP 3 RUN illuminates;
űű The lamp FLOAT ON illuminates, and the lamp ANGLE
EXEEDED lights down.

161
Ballast & Heeling System
6.9. Ballast & Heeling System

6.9.1. Purpose 3
Ballast system is designed for filling and discharging of ballast
tanks according to ballasting requirements using electrical
pumps or by gravity.
Heeling system is a separate closed system designed for com-
pensation of heeling on hold or berthing due to wind load or
replacement of significant loads inside the hull.
Click on the menu item Ballast System of the page SYS to open
the system diagram.
6.9.2. Content
• SEA CHEST; 2
Tank Volume m 3
WB 1 SB 174.84 1
WB 1 PS 174.84
WB 2 Center 105.14
WB 2 PS 76.60
WB 2 SB 76.60
WB 3 Center 204.41
WB 3 296.55
WB 4 253.80
WB 5 299.496
WB Fore Peak
Heeling Tank 1 PS 107.79
Heeling Tank 1 SB 107.79
Heeling Tank 2 PS 107.79
Heeling Tank 2 SB 107.79
• Ballast Pump 1 (2) 1 – 225 m3/h x 2 bar; 6.9.3. Connections
• Heeling Pump 2 – 300 m3/h x 0.6 bar; • To Fire System
• Heeling indicator 3 ;
• Pipelines with valves, measuring gauges.

162
Ballast & Heeling System
6.9.4. Control
6.9.4.1. Ballast & Heeling Pumps LOP & GSP
Ballast pumps are operated manually from the LOP, or remotely
(if the LOP switch is in REMOTE position) on the MSB starters, or
remotely from CMS (if the GSP switch is in CMS position).
position;
MSB position;
position.
Click on the menu item Bilge Fire and Ballast Pumps LOP of the page
AER to open No 1 BALLAST PUMP, No 2 BALLAST PUMP, and
HEELING PUMP control panels.

No 1 BALLAST PUMP panel.
No 2 BALLAST PUMP panel.
Heeling pump is operated manually from the LOP. In manual

mode the buttons START TO PORT and START TO STBD are used.
Automatic operation is set by the switch position AUTO.
Switch the power supply 440 V for HEELING PUMP on the No. 2
AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of The faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.7.1
the page MSB) by the HEELING PUMP STARTER circuit breaker. on page 211.

163
Chilled Water System
6.10. Chilled Water System

6.10.1. Purpose
The chilled water (air conditioning) system is designed for the
year-round moisture and temperature treatment of the air in
the accommodation spaces and other rooms on the ship. Nor-
mally the system runs unmanned, hovewer manual control is
provided.
Circulating pumps (duty/standby pair) are used to maintain
chilled water flow through all AC Units and keep water tem-
perature 6 °C. Chilled Water flow sensor starts standby com-
pressor if the flow fails or nor sufficient, and stops compressors
in case the flow cannot be recovered.
Sea water is used for cooling the plant condensers (see the
diagram in the paragraph 2.1 on page 97).
Click on the menu item Chilled Water System of the page SYS to
open the display.
6.10.2. Content
• Chilled Water Plant with two Compressors;
• Chilled Water Expansion Tank – 18 L;
• Circulation pump 1 (2) – 15 L/sec;
• AC Unit 1–14 – in ship rooms for individual control of air
parameters;
• Pipelines with valves.
6.10.3. Connections
• Gray Water
6.10.4. Control
Chilled Plant starting instructions are given in Chapter 5, the
paragraph 3.3 on page 196.

164
Chilled Water System
6.10.4.1. Chilled Plant LOP • SUPPLY WATER TEMP (6 °C normal) digital indicator;
• RETURN WATER TEMP (12 °C normal) digital indicator.
Click on the menu item Chilled Plant of the page MER2 to open
the display. The right panel contains:
The left panel contains: • MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker to turn power on/off for the
pumps and compressors;
• Indicator lamps, which illuminate in case:
• SEA WATER FLOW – indicator lamp;
űű ENABLED – power supply is on;
• CHILLED WATER FLOW – indicator lamp;
űű REMOTELY STOPPED – by EM’CY STOP button on CMS;
• Four identical sets of controls for SEA WATER PUMP 1 (2),
űű FREEZE FAULT – safety system alarm: in the simulator it is CHILLED WATER PUMP 1 (2); each set comprising:
modeled by instructor fault (supply water 3 °C).
űű Two-position switch:
• Two identical sets of controls for COMPRESSOR 1 and 2:
OFF – pump is stopped;
űű Two-position switch:
AUTO – pump runs in automatic mode (control by the
OFF – compressor is stopped; simulator model).
AUTO – compressor runs in automatic mode (control űű RUN indicator lamps;
by the simulator model).
űű FAULT indicator lamps: CWP CHILLED WATER FLOW <
űű MANUAL indicator – not modeled (only auto mode); 15 L/sec; CWP SEA WATER FLOW < 10 L/sec.
űű CAPACITY CONTROL 33% (66%, 100%), CRANK CASE • EMERGENCY STOP button to stop Chilled plant;
HEATER indicators – illuminate when respective mode is
• RESET button to acknowledge pumps’ alarms.
activated; compressor comprises 6 cylinders and runs in
3 capacity modes: 33% – two cylinders operate, 66% – Switch the power supply 440 V for CHILLED PLANT on the
four cylinders operate, 100% – all cylinders operate; No 2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder
Panel 440V of the page MSB) by the CHILLER PLANT CONTROL
Note! Compressor should start at 33% capacity to limit the
PANEL circuit breaker.
motor starting current.
űű Alarm lamps (faults are introduced by the instructor) to 6.10.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor
indicate:
COMPR. SS TRIP – compressor tripped by the plant
page 214.
Safety system: e.g. no water flow;
MOTOR FAULT – compressor motor windings tempera-
ture > 150 °C;
LP TRIP / HP TRIP – low/high oil pressure;
OIL FAULT – e.g. oil leakage.

165
Steering System
6.11. Steering System

6.11.1. Purpose
Two Type SR 642, Rotary-type with a constant torque steering 1
gears are modeled in the simulator. The device is intended for
automatic control, and change the direction of the ship.
Steering time (+/= 35 deg.) with one pump running is 26 sec.,
and with two pumps running is 13 sec.
The two pump units of each SG may be operated together or
separately. Each pump unit will provide oil with sufficient pres-
sure to develop the specified rudder torque.
The power pump units consist of oil tank, manoeuvring valve,
reversible hydraulic pump, flexible coupling, electric motor
and filter assembly. The unit is performed in the form of a HYD-
ROPACK unified module.
The pump units are equipped with solenoid valves, which are
normally operated by means of signals from the bridge steer- 4
ing controls. The emergency local control in SG room is mod-
eled also.
Click the menu item Steering Gears System of the page SYS to
open the STEERING GEARS SYSTEM diagram.
6.11.2. Content
The description given is for the Steering Gear Port. Steering 3
2 2
Gear Stbd side is similar to Port.
• Rudder Actuator;
• SG Hydraulic Oil tank 1 120 L with controlled Make Up
Valve from Storage;
6.11.3. Connections 6.11.4. Control
• SG PS (SB) Make Up from Storage
• SG Port Hydraulic Pump Unit 1 (2) 2 – 125 bar; 6.11.4.1. Controls on Diagram
• Wheel Pump 3 ;
Open Isolating Valve 1 and 2 4 when the Wheel Pump is used
• Isolating Valve 1 (2) 4 ; on the SG LOP (see the paragraph 6.11.4.2 on page 167) for
• Pipelines with valves and measuring gauges. pumping hydraulic oil to the SG.

166
Steering System
6.11.4.2. Steering Gear LOP • The emergency control panel comprising:

űű EMCY CONTROL SG 1 and EMCY CONTROL SG 2 impulse
Click the menu item SG LOPs of the page SG to open the display
handles – use when control voltage trips but hydraulic
to manually operate four pump LOPs. Two identical panels are
system stays powered; drag and hold the handle by the
presented for Port and Stbd steering gears.
mouse in required position to change the rudder angle;
The STEERING GEAR Port panel is described, which contains: űű TURN TO PORT and TURN TO STBD buttons – use to operate
• RUDDER ANGLE SG gauge; the wheel pump when hydraulic system is out of power
• STEERING GEAR MOTOR №1 and STEERING GEAR MO- or damaged. Click and hold the required button while
TOR №2 control panels, each comprising: monitoring value on the RUDDER ANGLE SG gauge; the
WHEEL PUMP OPERATION control rotates clockwise or
űű MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker to turn power on/off;
counterclockwise simulating pumping.
űű POWER, PUMP RUN, HEATING ON indicator lamps; the
lamp illuminates when respective state is ON; Note: respective Isolating Valve should be open on the display
Steering Gears of the page SYS (see )the paragraph 6.11.2 on
űű Ammeter to display the pump load;
page 166.
űű Run hours indicator;
Switch the power supply 440 V for STEERING GEAR MOTOR № 1
űű Three-position switch to select the pump control mode:
Port on the No 1 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB
Set REMOTE to control from the bridge, which includes Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by the No 1 PORT STEERING
starting, stopping hydraulic pumps, control over steer- GEAR STARTER circuit breaker.
ing gear in the tracking FU mode and disaster manage-
ment in the NFU modes. Switch the power supply 440 V for STEERING GEAR MOTOR № 1
STBD on the No 2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB
Set OFF to prevent accidental start-up of hydraulic
Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by the No 1 STBD STEERING
pumps from the bridge during repairs and emergency
GEAR STARTER circuit breaker.
manual control.
Set LOCAL to run hydraulic pumps from this LOP. When Switch the power supply 440 V for STEERING GEAR MOTOR
№ 2 Port and STEERING GEAR MOTOR № 2 STBD on the AC440v
the switch is in LOCAL position, the pumps run in
FEEDER PANEL (use menu item ESB Consumers of the page
NFU mode with the subsequent management of the
EmG) by the No 2 PORT STEERING GEAR STARTER and No 2 STBD
steering apparatus in case of emergency through the
STEERING GEAR STARTER circuit breakers.
handles EMCY CONTROL SG 1 and 2.
When the switch is in the OFF and LOCAL CONTROL
position the alarm POWER FAILURE CONTROL is acti-
vated and remote control from the bridge is disabled.
űű STOP–RUN–START three-position selector switch to op-
erate the pump motor in LOCAL mode;
űű HEATING two-position 0–1 switch; heating is used to
remove the condensate from the pump motor.

167
Steering System
6.11.4.3. Operating SG from 3D Page

Manual control of the Steering gears is modeled on the 3D
display of the SG page. The gauges and handles are modeled.

168
Steering System
6.11.4.4. SG Control from Bridge

Click the menu Steering Gear Panel item of the page BCC to open
the display for remote control of the Steering Gear from the
Bridge. This is the basic control mode.
The rudder angle is set by the Instructor of the ERS simulator.
The STEERING GEAR panel contains.
• SG Port (on the left side) and SG Stbd (on the right side) set
of controls; each set comprises:
űű RUDDER ANGLE SG indicator;
űű START PUMP 1 and START PUMP 2 illuminated buttons to
start the SG hydraulic pumps;
űű STOP PUMP 1 and STOP PUMP 2 illuminated buttons to stop
the SG hydraulic pumps;
űű AUTO START PUMP 1 (2) indicators, which illuminate
when the respective standby pump automatically starts;
the pump mode is set on the LOPs (see );
űű PUMP 1 (2) LOCAL indicators, which illuminate when the
respective pump is in local control mode;
űű NFU CONTROL indicator, which illuminates when NFU
mode is selected;
űű FU–O–NFU three-position mode selector switch to
choose between the follow up (FU) and non follow up
(NFU) control modes; űű FU SYNC – click to turn on simultaneous displacement of űű OVERLOAD PUMP;
űű The helm to operate SG in FU mode; both rudders (control from the Port side setting helm); űű PHASE FAILURE PUMP;
űű NFU SG box with PORT and STBD illuminated buttons for űű FU INDP – click to turn on the SG control from both set- űű POWER FAILURE PUMP;
SG control in NFU mode; click and hold required button ting helms independently (controlling SG Port from the
űű CONTROL POWER FAILURE;
to turn the rudder blade. left helm, SG Stbd – from the right helm).
űű HYDRAULIC LOCK;
• The course indicator; The STEERING GEAR ALARM panel contains:
űű CLOGGED FILTER PUMP;
• The buttons for SG control when the switch is set to FU • Four identical sets of alarm indicators for SG pumps; in-
űű LOW OIL LEVEL PUMP.
position (buttons illuminate when in operation mode): dicator flashes in alarm condition (modeled by the faults
from instructor), and lights continuously when alarm is • ACKN button to acknowledge alarms.
űű AUTO PILOT – click to turn on the SG control from the
autopilot; acknowledged; each set comprises:

169
Steering System
6.11.4.5. Steering Control from ECR

Click the menu item ECR SG, FA of the page ECR to open the dis-
play for remote control of the Steering Gear and Fire Station.
The STEERING GEAR panel contains:
• RUDDRE ANGLE Port and RUDDRE ANGLE Stbd gauges;
• Indicating lamps to display the state of SG pumps; respec-
tive lamps illuminate when state is active.

Introduced faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.8.1 on
page 212.

170
Provision Cooling System
6.12. Provision Cooling System

6.12.1. Purpose
The automatic Provision Cooling System is intended for creat- 4
ing and maintaining the set temperature conditions for the 3
storage of food in two groups of provision storerooms.
7
The first group includes three provision storerooms for the
storage of frozen foods:
• Butter – storage of butter at a temperature of -2 °C;
• Meat – storage of meat at a temperature of -15 °C; 6 5
• Fish – storage of fish at a temperature of -15 °C.
The other group includes three provision storerooms for the
storage of chilled food: 9
• Fruit – storage of fruit at a temperature of +2 °С;
8
• Vegetables – storage of vegetables at a temperature of +2 °С;
• Dry provision – storage of dry provisions at a tempera-
ture of +8 °С. 1
Each of the refrigeration plants operates for its group of
consumers. However, any one refrigerator can supply both
storeroom groups if required. Freon R494A is the main liquid
refrigerant.
2
The air temperature in the storerooms is maintained with the
air coolers. Liquid refrigerant is supplied to the air cooler by the
thermostatic expansion valve. The thermo switch monitors the
temperature in the pertinent provision storeroom and controls
operation of the solenoid valves in the refrigeration chamber,
as well as the operation of the air cooler thermostatic valve.
Click on the menu item Provision Plant of the page SYS to open
• 2 x Condenser with Cooler LW Outlet Sight Glass 2 ; űű Light indicator 4 – illuminates when the light is on;
the provision cooling system diagram.
• 6 x storerooms; each storeroom is equipped with: űű LIGHT latched button 5 – to switch the light on/off;
6.12.2. Content űű Air cooler fan 3 ; fan indicator illuminates when the űű Storeroom Door 6 ;
fan is running; red indicator lamp illuminates when the űű Load bar graph 7 ;
• 2 x Compressor with Compressor Suction Non Return Valve storeroom is powered;
1 ; Master Solenoid Valve 9 ; űű Solenoid and thermostatic expansion valves.

171
6.12.3. Connections 6.12.4.2. Loading Provision 4. On the LOAD panel, enter the required provision
amount (in kilos) in the MASS box and temperature
• Make Up 1. Double-click on the required storeroom door in the TEMP box using the up and down arrows.
6 to open it. The solenoid and thermostatic
• Oil Make Up 5. Click the APPLY button. The MASS box gets empty and the
expansion valves will close automatically.
• Ventilation load bar graph changes indication to added amount.
2. Click the LIGHT button 5 to switch the light
• CW Cooling System 6. Click the LIGHT button to switch the light
on; the indicator 4 illuminates; the lamp will
off; the indicator lights down.
not illuminate when the door is closed.
6.12.4. Control 7. Double-click on the door to close it. The solenoid and
thermostatic expansion valves will open automatically.
Attention! The room door cannot be closed while the light is on.
When Compressors are operating, operation indicators illumi-
nate. The oil level in the compressor case is displayed on the Note: Instructor can carry out the provision loading from the
bar graph and digital indicator. Automatic adjustment of the Indicators plugin by selecting respective storerooms and setting the
compressor refrigeration performance is provided. The Com- required quantity of products in kilos.
pressor Suction Non Return Valve 1 is used to slowly increase
compressor load at starting the mechanism. 6.12.4.3. Unloading Provision
Condensers bar graphs are used to monitor the liquid refrig-
1. Perform actions described in items 1, 2,
erant level in the condenser collector. The LT water flow for and 3 of the Loading procedure.
the condenser cooling is controlled in the Cooler LW Outlet 3. Click on the load bar graph 7 to open 2. On the UNLOAD panel, enter the required amount of
Sight Glass 2 . the UNLOAD/LOAD panel. provision in the MASS box using the up and down arrows.
3. Press the APPLY button. The MASS box gets empty and the
Compressor Sight Glass Moisture Content indicator
load bar graph changes indication to reduced amount.
8 body flashes when the flow is low, and colors in
gray when no flow is detected in the line; indicator 4. Perform actions described in items 6
center colors in yellow when there is water or air and 7 of the Loading procedure.
detected in the system.
6.12.4.4. Provision Cooling System
Instructions for powering and starting the plant are given in
Chapter 5, the paragraph 3.2 on page 196.
The central part of the panel displays the FULL/EMPTY bar

graph and MASS % indicator of the actual storeroom load.

172
6.12.4.5. Provision Cooling Plant LOP

Click on the menu item Provision Plant LOP of the page MER2 to
open the display.
The PROVISION COOLING PLANT control panel contains:
• Two identical PC COMPRESSOR 1 and PC COMPRESSOR 2
panels (compressor 1 panel is described below);
• Six identical control panels of the storerooms (the BUTTER
room panel is described below);
• The central panel comprising:
űű MAN IN COLD ROOM alarm indicator;
űű The SUPPLY switch OFF/ON to turn on the plant power.
• The PC CW PUMP LOP comprising:
űű SUPPLY indicator lamp, which illuminates when the
pump is powered;
űű START / RUN pushbutton to start the pump; the button
highlights when the pump is running;
űű STOP / OFF pushbutton to stop the pump.
Switch the power supply 440 V for PROVISION COOLING
PLANT on the No 1 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item
MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by the PROVISION
PLANT circuit breaker.

173
Compressor Control Panel contains: űű COMPRESSOR 1 TRIP OIL LEVEL LOW – level < 10%;
űű OVERCURRENT – current ≥ 13 A;
űű MASTER SOLENOID CLOSED ;
űű CW PRESSURE LOW – no cooling water flow.
• DISCHARGE pressure gauge;
• SUCTION pressure gauge;
• PRESSURE SET COMPRESSOR controller to setpoint the
automatic starting and stopping the compressor;
• PRESSURE SET CONDENSER controller to setpoint
the condensing pressure value; the actual value is
displayed on the mimic Provision Cooling Plant of the
page SYS;
• A set of buttons in the right bottom corner to control
the compressor in MANUAL control mode:
űű START / RUN button to start the compressor; the but- • The thermometer to display the actual temperature in the
ton highlights when the compressor is running; storeroom;
űű STOP / OFF button to stop the compressor; • The controller (see the description in Introduiction, the
űű MASTER SOLENOID button to open the master sole- paragraph 5.1 on page 11) to setpoint the RANGE and
• READY FOR USE indicator lamp, which illuminates when the
noid; the button highlights and the actual valve DIFF values of the temperature in the storeroom; red LED
compressor is powered (the SUPPLY switch position is ON;
state is displayed on the mimic Provision Cooling indicator illuminates when temperature > RANGE+DIFF;
• The ammeter to display the compressor load;
Plant of the page SYS; • DEFROSTER two-position switch AUTO–MAN to set the
• The running hours indicator; defrosting mode;
űű TRIP RESET button to reset the trip condition after the
• The two-position switch AUTO–MAN to set the compressor cause has been removed. • The button to start the defrosting in the MANUAL defrost-
operating mode. In Automatic mode control of the com- ing mode; during defrosting the button highlights and
Note: In the MANUAL operating mode it is necessary
pressor motor operation and solenoid valves is exercised the indication is displayed on the mimic Provision Cooling
to open the master solenoid valve by pressing the MASTER
automatically. Plant of the page SYS;
SOLENOID button before starting the compressor.
• A set of alarm indicators (lamps flash in alarm condition): • SET TIMER controller to setpoint the defrosting time in
űű COMPRESSOR 1 TRIP PRESS OUT HIGH – CONDENSER pres- Provision Storeroom Control Panel contains: hours using the up and down arrows at the right.
sure set point + 5 bar; • The pressure gauge to display the pressure and boiling
űű COMPRESSOR 1 TRIP TEMP OUT HIGH – for compressor 1: point in the air cooler;
130 °C; for compressor 2: 140 °C; • PRESS controller to setpoint the evaporation pressure 6.12.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor
űű COMPRESSOR 1 TRIP OIL PRESS LOW – pressure < compres- value (for BUTTER and DRY PROV. rooms only); Introduced faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.11.6
sor inlet pressure + 1 bar; on page 214.

174
Ventilation System
6.13. Ventilation System

6.13.1. Purpose 6.13.2. Content
The machinery spaces are ventilated by forced draught sys- • In Engine room:
tems. The forced draught system supply and exhaust fans űű ER FAN 1 SUPPLY nonreversible;
maintain a slight depression within the machinery spaces. The
űű ER FAN 2 SUPPLY nonreversible;
depression ensures that polluted air can not pass to accommo-
dation spaces and public rooms. űű ER FAN 3 EXH/SUPPLY reversible;
űű ER FAN 4 EXH/SUPPLY reversible.
Fans are mounted in various Rooms and the funnel casing built
into resilient supported and sound insulated modules. • In EM’CY Gen room:
űű SUPPLY FAN nonreversible.
Intake air is drawn around the funnel casing through intakes
designed to limit noise transmission to the open deck. • In S/G room:
űű SUPPLY FAN nonreversible.
Intake air is ducted into machinery spaces with a distribution
system within the space providing fresh air outlets to ensure • In CO2 room:
maximum air circulation, and all openings are fitted with anti- űű EXHAUST FAN nonreversible.
flash gauzes. • On Car Deck
All ducts both to supply and exhaust air intakes are fitted with űű SUPPLY/EXHAUST FAN 1 – 8 reversible.
dampers. All supply and exhaust fans are linked to the Fire
Alarm/CO2 Fire Extinguishing system to provide a “Crash Stop” 6.13.3. Control
in case of fire. The fans can be stopped remotely from the QCV, To start reversible fans use either of the buttons depending on
ESD Panel in FFR, controlled remotely from Starter panels or required direction:
manually from the LOPs.
• SUP. START/RUN;
• EXH. START/RUN.

175
Ventilation System
6.13.3.1. Ventilation in ER
The general description of a pump (fan) LOP is given in
Click the menu item ER Ventilation LOP of the page MER1

to open the ER FAN 1 SUPPLY, ER FAN 2 SUPPLY, ER FAN 3
EXH/SUPPLY, and ER FAN 4 EXH/SUPPLY LOPs.
The fans are operated:

• Manually from LOP – selector switch on LOP is in
LOCAL position;
• Remotely – selector switch on LOP is in REMOTE
position:
űű From MSB (ESB) starter panel – selector switch on
GSP is in MSB position;
űű From CMS mimic – selector switch on GSP is in
CMS position.
The general description of a fan (pump) starter panel is
given in the paragraph 1.3.1 on page 92.
Click the menu item MSB PS GSP Panel 2 of the page MSB to
open No 1 ER FAN and No 3 ER FAN panels.
Click the menu item MSB SB GSP Panel 2 of the page MSB to
open No 4 ER FAN and No 2 ER FAN panels.
Note: No 2 ER SUPPLY FAN is powered and control is
duplicated on ESB.
Click the menu item ESB Consumers of the page ESB to
open No 2 ER SUPPLY FAN, EM’CY GEN ROOM SUPPLY
FAN, S/G ROOM SUPPLY FAN, and CO2 ROOM EXH. FAN
panels.
The EM’CY GEN ROOM SUPPLY FAN panel contains two-
position mode selector switch:
• MANU – set to operate from ESB;
• AUTO – set fro automatic operation.

176
Ventilation System
6.13.3.2. Ventilation on Car Deck 6.13.4. Faults Introduced by Instructor

Click the menu item ESB Consumers of the page ESB to open Introduced faults are listed in Chapter 6, the para-
CARDECK VERTILATION STARTERS panel comprising: graph 2.9.1 on page 212.
• CARDECK SUPPLY/EXHAUST FAN 1, (2–8) identical panels.
The general description of a fan (pump) starter panel is given in
Use the button EXH. START/RUN to start a fan for gases extraction.
Use the button SUP. START/RUN to start a fan for air supply.
Switch the power supply 440 V for CARDECK FANS on the CAR-
DECK VENTILATION DISTRIBUTION BOARD (use menu item Car-
deck Fans DB of the page MER2) by the respective circuit breakers.
Switch the power supply 440 V for the CARDECK VENTILATION
DISTRIBUTION BOARD on the No 2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use
menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by the CAR-
DECK VENTILATION DB circuit breaker.

177
Stabilization System
6.14. Stabilization System

6.14.1. Purpose
The generic Fin Stabilizers Port and Stbd, type: electro-hydrau-
lic folding fin; max. angle: +/- 20 ° are modeled in the simulator.
Stabilizers are active underwater fins designed to reduce the
rolling of the ship. Rolling is caused by the effect of sea action
on the hull during an ocean passage. Active roll reduction is
achieved by tilting the extended fin during a roll. The effect of
the ship’s forward motion on the fin surface produces a lifting
moment acting against the roll.
The fins are tilted by hydraulic units powered by electro-
hydraulic pumps. When the fins are not in use they are housed
within fin boxes located in the hull, thus reducing drag on the
hull. A hydraulic ram mechanism allows the fin to be rigged in
and out (housed and extended) by folding the fin 90º.
The fin is locked in the housed or extended position by a slid-
ing pawl engaging on the rigging lever. This pawl is automati-
cally unlocked by the rig-out hydraulic sequence and locked
during the rig in process. A mechanical pawl acts as a stop
limit, supporting the thrust of the fin hydrodynamic resistance.
Fins are controlled:
• From ECR – remote automatic operating mode;
• From Bridge – remote automatic operating mode;
• From LOP:
űű Local automatic operating mode;
űű Emergency manual operating mode.
In the simulator the fins angle is set by ERS instructor.

178
6.14.2. Content
Click the menu item Fin Stabiliser System PORT of the page SYS to
open the diagram.
Click the menu item Fin Stabiliser System STBD of the page SYS to
open the diagram.
The description given below is for Fin stabilizer PORT system.
STBD system is similar to PORT.
The mimic contains:
• Emergency Gear Pump 1 – 180 bar, to rig the fin in or out
in the event of the failure of the main hydraulic unit; 6 7
• Electro-hydraulic power unit comprising:
űű Accumulator Gear Pump 2 – 180 bar; used to provide
constant pressure in hydraulic system; the pump starts
simulatneously with Variable Displacement Pump;
űű Auxiliary Servo Pump 3 – 80 bar; used to feed oil to the
variable displacement pump servo-control circuit; to feed
oil to the circuit feeding the fin lock, in the rig-in position;
űű Auxiliary Gear Pump 4 – 180 bar; used to feed the fin
tilting circuit to balance the system’s volumetric losses;
to provide a clean-up circuit for the hydraulic oil using a
special filter; to feed oil under pressure to the normal fin 8
rigging in and out circuits;
űű Variable Displacement Pump 5 – used to feed the oil
under pressure to the tilting circuit; to feed both cham-
1 2 3 4 5
bers of the tilting cylinder, dependent on the position of
the internal swash plate.
6.14.3. Control 6.14.3.1. Controls on Diagram

• Valve A 6 ;
• Valve B 7 ;
• Valve C 8 .

179
6.14.3.2. Fin Stabilizers LOPs • Ammeter – to display the main pump load;
• EMERGENCY PUMP two-position switch to turn
Click the menu item Fin Stab PORT LOP of the page AER
the EM’CY pump OFF / ON;
to open the LOP to manually operate the Port fin
motors. • EMERGENCY PUMP ON lamp – illuminates when
the pump runs;
Click the menu item Fin Stab PORT LOP (Fin Stab STBD LOP)
• SPACE HEATER EMERG. PUMP lamp – illuminates
of the page AER to open the LOP.
when the heater is on;
The description given below is for PORT LOP. STBD • Ammeter – to display the EM’CY pump load;
LOP is similar to PORT.
• FIN ANGLE gauge;
The FIN STABILIZER MOTOR SWITCH BOX PORT panel • ALARMS box; LEDs indicate the following cases
contains: (modeled by instructor faults):
• MAIN PUMP MAIN SWITCH circut breaker; űű Stab System CCU Fault – ECR control fault for
• EMERGENCY PUMP MAIN SWITCH circut breaker; both fins;
• MAIN SUPPLY ON lamp – illuminates when power űű El. Motor Fault CCU Fault;
is on for Main Pump; űű HPU Main Pump Motor Overload;
• EMERG SUPPLY ON lamp – illuminates when pow- űű HPU Tripped;
er is on for EM’CY Pump; űű HPU Oil Level Low – < 30%;
• ZERO SIGNAL MANUAL ON lamp – illuminates űű HPU Oil Level Low Low – < 25%;
when ZERO SIGNAL switch is set to ZERO position;
űű HPU Oil Temp High – > 55 °C;
• RIGGING three-position switch:
űű HPU Oil Temp High High – > 60 °C;
űű RIGG OUT / RIGG IN to rig fin out/in manually;
űű HPU Main Pressure Low – < 170 bar;
űű AUTO to set automatic operating mode.
űű HPU Main Pressure Low Low – < 165 bar;
• BY-PASS VALVE two-position switch:
űű HPU Servo Pressure Low – < 75 bar;
űű AUTO – to set automatic valve operation;
űű HPU Filter Clogged;
űű BY-PASS – to open the valve manually. • MAIN PUMP three-position mode selector űű Fin Non Locked – in AUTO mode only;
• ZERO SIGNAL two-position switch: switch: MAN – OFF – AUTO;
űű Fin Non Rig In – in AUTO mode only;
űű AUTO – to set automatic operation; • MAIN PUMP ON lamp – illuminates when the
űű Fin Non Rig Out – in AUTO mode only;
űű ZERO – to set fin into zero position manually. pump runs;
űű ACKN button to acknowledge alarms.
• FIN LOCKING three-position switch: • START, STOP buttons to operate the pump in
MAN mode Note: System shut down occurs due to alarms: HPU
űű AUTO to set automatic operating mode; Main Pressure Low Low, HPU Oil Level Low Low, HPU
• SPACE HEATER MAIN PUMP lamp – illuminates
űű LOCK, UNLOCK to operate manually. Oil Temp High High, HPU Main Pump Motor Overload.
when the heater is on;

180
The right panel contains: Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by the FIN STAB PORT MAIN
PUMP STARTER circuit breaker.
• Pressure gauges:
űű MAIN PRESSURE; Switch the power supply 440 V for Fin Stabilizer Stbd MAIN
PUMP on the No 2 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB
űű SERVO PRESSURE;
Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) by the FIN STAB STBD MAIN
űű BACK PRESSURE; PUMP STARTER circuit breaker.
űű EM’CY PRESSURE .
Switch the power supply 440 V for Fin Stabilizer Port EM’CY
• The HPU LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL panel comprising: PUMP on the AC440v FEEDER PANEL (use menu item ESB Con-
űű LOCKING SYSTEM VALVE handle to set the valve control sumers of the page EmG) by the FIN STAB PORT EM’CY PUMP
mode AUTO–MANUAL; STARTER circuit breaker.
űű LOCK OFF, LOCK ON illuminated buttons – to unlock/lock the Switch the power supply 440 V for Fin Stabilizer Stbd EM’CY
fin in MANUAL emergency mode; PUMP on the AC440v FEEDER PANEL (use menu item ESB Con-
űű FIN IN and FIN OUT lamps to indicate fin position; sumers of the page EmG) by the FIN STAB PORT EM’CY PUMP
űű Handles to operate the fins in MANUAL mode: STARTER circuit breaker.
FIN DOWN – FIN UP;

FIN IN – FIN OUT.
űű Handles to operate the valves in MANUAL mode (see the
valves designation on the system diagram ):
VALVE “A” 6 ; VALVE “B” 7 ; VALVE “C” 8 (see the
system diagram in the paragraph 6.14.3.1 on page 179).
Switch the power supply 440 V for Fin Stabilizer Port MAIN
PUMP on the No 1 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB

181
6.14.3.3. Fin Stabilizers Control from ECR

Click the menu item ECR Fin Stabilizer of the page ECR to open
the FIN STABILIZER central control panel.
The panel contains:
• FIN IN AT LOW SPEED lamp – illuminates when the ship’s
speed is lower than the minimum speed setting (6 knots)
and the fins are rigged out; in this case they will automati-
cally rig in and house;
• LOCAL CONTROL indicator lamp – illuminates when fins
are operated from the LOPs (see the paragraph 6.14.3.2 on
page 180);
• ALARM lamp – illuminates to indicate any alarm condition;
• ALARM ACKN button to acknowledge alarms;
• PORT FIN and STBD FIN gauges to indicate actual fins verti-
cal position;
• Indicators – illuminate to state the rig out/rig in position;
• Two-position control position selector switch:
űű CENTRAL – to transfer control from the bridge to ECR,
even when the fins are in operation;
űű BRIDGE – to transfer control to the bridge.
• PORT FIN ON/OFF button to start/stop the Port system (the
button illuminates);
• LOG INPUT SIGNAL ON button to activate the automatic signal
function (the button illuminates);
• STBD FIN ON/OFF button to start/stop the Port system (the
button illuminates);
• ON button to start up the stabilizer system (fins rig out);
• OFF button to stop the stabilizer system (fins rig in).

182
6.14.3.4. Fin Stabilizers Control from Bridge

Click the menu item BCC Fin Stabilizer of the page BCC to open
the FIN STABILIZER remote control panel.
The panel contains:
• FIN IN AT LOW SPEED lamp – illuminates when the ship’s
speed is lower than the minimum speed setting (6 knots)
and the fins are rigged out; in this case they will automati-
cally rig in and house;
• LOCAL CONTROL lamp – illuminates when fins are operat-
ed from the LOPs (see the paragraph 6.14.3.2 on page 180);
• ALARM lamp– illuminates to indicate any alarm condition;
• PORT FIN and STBD FIN gauges to indicate actual fins verti-
cal position;
• Indicators – illuminate to state the rig out/rig in position;
• OFF button to stop the stabilizer system (fins rig in);
• ON button to start up the stabilizer system (fins rig out).

183
6.14.4. Stabilizer System Operation 3. On the BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL (use menu item BCC Fin 6.14.4.4. Stopping Stabilizers from ECR
Stabilizer of the page BCC): the fin housed lamp is On; the
Stabilizer Local panels are identical. The descriptions given system is ready to start when the OFF button is illuminated. 1. On the CENTRAL CONTROL PANEL (use menu
below are for Port fin. Operating Stbd fin is similar to Port. item ECR Fin Stabilizer of the page ECR):
›› Click the ON button, the button illuminates and the stabi-
Note: The fins control can be transferred between the bridge lizer system starts up: the fin housed lamps are Off and fin ›› Click the OFF button, the button illuminates and the sta-
and central control position, even when the fins are in operation, by rigged lamps are On. bilizer system stops: the fin housed lamps are On and fin
switching the Central Control Panel selector to required position. rigged lamps are Off.
6.14.4.2. Stopping Stabilizers from Bridge
6.14.4.5. Starting Up Stabilizer from LOP
6.14.4.1. Setting Up Stabilizers for 1. On the BRIDGE CONTROL PANEL (use menu
Automatic Bridge Operation item BCC Fin Stabilizer of the page BCC): The following actions need to be taken to start up stabilizer in
Local mode from the Motor Switch Box.
1. On the FIN STABILIZER MOTOR SWITCH BOX panel ›› Click the OFF button, the button illuminates and the sta-
(use menu item Fin Stab PORT LOP of the page AER): bilizer system stops: the fin housed lamps are On and fin Attention! When the stabilizer system is operating in local
rigged lamps are Off. mode, the fin in/out and lock/unlock limit switches are disabled. A
›› Turn MAIN PUMP MAIN SWITCH to ON position.
visual check of the fin position is essential.
›› Turn MAIN PUMP selector switch to AUTO position. 6.14.4.3. Starting Up Stabilizers from
1. On the CENTRAL CONTROL PANEL (use menu item ECR Fin
›› Turn all the other switches (except the supply switches) to Central Control Panel (ECR) Stabilizer of the page ECR): click the LOG INPUT SIGNAL ON
AUTO position.
1. On the FIN STABILIZER MOTOR SWITCH BOX panel button, to activate the automatic log signal function.
2. On the CENTRAL CONTROL PANEL (use menu (use menu item Fin Stab PORT LOP of the page AER): 2. On the FIN STABILIZER MOTOR SWITCH BOX panel
item ECR Fin Stabilizer of the page ECR):
›› Turn MAIN PUMP MAIN SWITCH to ON position. (use menu item Fin Stab PORT LOP of the page AER):
›› Turn the selectors switch to the BRIDGE position.
›› Turn MAIN PUMP selector switch to AUTO position. ›› Turn MAIN PUMP MAIN SWITCH to ON position. The MAIN
›› Activate the Port/Stbd fin system by clicking the PORT FIN SUPPLY ON lamp illuminates.
›› Turn all the other switches (except the supply switches) to
ON/OFF (STBD FIN ON/OFF) button; the button illuminates.
AUTO position. ›› Turn EMERGENCY PUMP MAIN SWITCH to ON position. The
›› Click the LOG INPUT SIGNAL ON button, to activate the au- EMERG. SUPPLY ON lamp illuminates.
2. On the CENTRAL CONTROL PANEL (use menu
tomatic log signal function (ship speed monitoring); the
item ECR Fin Stabilizer of the page ECR): ›› Turn MAIN PUMP selector switch to MAN position.
button illuminates.
›› Turn the selectors switch to the CENTRAL position. ›› Click the START button. The lamp MAIN PUMP ON illumi-
If the fins are housed (corresponded lamp is ON), the fins
›› Start the Port/Stbd fin system by clicking the PORT FIN ON/ nates. On the Central Control Panel (ECR) and the Bridge
will not rig out if the ship’s speed is lower than the mini-
OFF (STBD FIN ON/OFF) button; the button illuminates. Control Panel (BCC) lamps LOCAL CONTROL illuminate.
mum speed setting.
›› Click the LOG INPUT SIGNAL ON button, to activate the au- ›› Switch BY-PASS VALVE selector to the BY-PASS position.
If the fins are rigged out, they will automatically rig in and
housed when the ship’s speed is lower than the minimum tomatic log signal function (ship speed monitoring); the ›› Switch ZERO SIGNAL selector to the ZERO position: the
speed setting. The FIN IN AT LOW SPEED lamp illuminates. button illuminates. fin automatically centers at zero angle position (watch the
›› Click the ON button, the button illuminates and the stabi- gauge); ZERO SIGNAL lamp illuminates.
lizer system starts up: the fin housed lamps are Off and fin
rigged lamps are On.

184
The fin is now ready for rigging. 6.14.4.6. Stabilizer Emergency Operation Rigging In a Fin Using Emergency Circuit
The procedure to rig out: In the event of a failure of the main hydraulic circuit or the 1. Perform steps 1~3 described in 3.4.6.1.
›› Switch the FIN LOCKING selector to the UN LOCK position. electronic circuitry, the fins can be rigged in (housed) or rigged 2. On the HPU LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTOL panel (use
out (extended) using the emergency system. The procedure is menu item Fin Stab PORT LOP of the page AER):
The fin lock disengages.
much slower than the normal operation, taking approximately ›› Click and hold the handle FIN DOWN / FIN UP in required
›› Switch the RIGGING selector to the RIG OUT position. The
10 minutes to rig in/out a fin. position until the angle of the fin is at zero degrees.
fin starts to rig out.
Rigging Out a Fin Using Emergency Circuit ›› Click the button LOCK OFF for unlocking of the fin.
›› Switch the RIGGING selector to the AUTO position, when
the fin is completely rigged out (extended). 1. On the FIN STABILIZER MOTOR SWITCH BOX panel ›› Click and hold the handle FIN IN / FIN OUT in position FIN
(use menu item Fin Stab PORT LOP of the page AER): IN. The fin starts to rig in, when fully housed visually check
›› Switch the FIN LOCKING selector to the LOCK position. The
the fin position..
fin lock engages and the fin is locked in rigged out position. ›› Turn MAIN PUMP motor switch to OFF position. The Accu-
mulator pump motor will be Off also automatically. ›› Click the button LOCK ON for locking of the fin.
The procedure to rig in:
2. On the HPU LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTOL panel (use 3. On the FIN STABILIZER MOTOR SWITCH BOX panel
›› Switch the FIN LOCKING selector to the UN LOCK position. (use menu item Fin Stab PORT LOP of the page AER):
The fin lock disengages. menu item Fin Stab PORT LOP of the page AER):
›› Close the manual shut-off VALVE “A” and VALVE “B” on the ›› Turn EMERGENCY PUMP motor switch to OFF position.
›› Switch the RIGGING selector to the RIG IN position. The fin
starts to rig in. main tilting circuit. 4. On the HPU LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTOL panel:
›› Open the manual shut-off VALVE ”C” on the delivery of the ›› Close the manual shut-off VALVE ”C” on the delivery of the
›› Switch the RIGGING selector to the AUTO position, when
emergency pump. emergency pump.
the fin is completely rigged in (housed).
›› Turn the LOCKING SYSTEM VALVE from AUTO to MANUAL ›› Turn the LOCKING SYSTEM VALVE from MANUAL to AUTO
›› Switch the FIN LOCKING selector to the LOCK position. The
position. Fin Lock and Fin Un Lock will be available by position.
fin lock engages and the fin is locked in rigged in position.
clicking the buttons LOCK ON and LOCK OFF. ›› Open the manual shut-off VALVE “A” and VALVE “B” on the
3. On the FIN STABILIZER MOTOR SWITCH BOX panel: main tilting circuit.
›› Turn EMERGENCY PUMP motor switch to ON position. The fin is now safely rigged in.
›› By reference to the FIN ANGLE meter, check the actual
angle of the fin.
4. On the HPU LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTOL panel:
›› Click and hold the handle FIN DOWN / FIN UP in required
position until the angle of the fin is at zero degrees.
›› Click the button LOCK OFF for unlocking of the fin.
›› Click and hold the handle FIN IN / FIN OUT in position FIN
OUT. The fin starts to rig out, when fully extended visually 6.14.5. Faults Introduced by Instructor
check the fin position.. Introduced faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.12.7
›› Click the button LOCK ON for locking of the fin. on page 215.

185
Bow Thruster
6.15. Bow Thruster • Ammeter and run hours counter;

• Lamps to indicate the following BT unit states:
6.15.1. Purpose űű DRIVE MOTOR RUN;
The Bow Thruster (BT) is designed for generating an additional űű CONTROL VOLTAGE;
turning moment, reduction of the circulation diameter and en- űű HEATING ON.
hancement of ship manoeuvring ability (mainly for mooring). • STOP and START buttons to control BT in LOCAL mode; start
The rotational moment from the drive electric motor is trans- is possible only when READY TO LOCAL START lamp is
mitted to the propeller. The blade turn angle is changed by the illuminated;
CPP drive hydraulic system (CPP n = 250 rpm). • HEATING switch 0–1 to turn condensate removing off/on;
The hydraulic power pack (HYDROPACK) generates the hydraulic • RESET MOTOR OVERLOAD button to acknowledge motor faults;
energy needed for pitch actuation. BT Hydraulic system is not • Alarm indicator lamps:
modeled in the simulator. űű DRIVE MOTOR OVERLOAD;
6.15.2. Content űű MOTOR OVERTEMP PRE-WARNING 145 deg.

• READY TO LOCAL START lamp;
The BT is installed in the hull tunnel and consists of:
• EMERGENCY STOP button and lamp.
• BT propeller drive electric motor;
The HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT panel contains:
• Controllable Pitch Propeller (CPP);
• MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker;
• CPP drive hydraulic power pack;
• SUPPLY indicator lamp;
• Control system.
• Ammeter and run hours counter;
6.15.3. Control • HYDRAULIC MOTOR RUN indicator lamp;
• Three-position selector switch:
6.15.3.1. Bow Thruster LOP
űű LOCAL – set to control the BT from this LOP;
Click the menu item Bow Thruster LOP of the page BTR to open
űű OFF – set to turn the HPU off;
the display BOW THRUSTER LOCAL PANEL .
űű REMOTE – set to control from the bridge (see the para-
The DRIVE MOTOR PANEL contains: graph 6.15.3.2 on page 187).
• MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker; • STOP and START buttons to control HPU in LOCAL mode.
• SUPPLY indicator lamp; Switch the power supply 440 V for the BT DRIVE MOTOR on the
• Two-position mode selector switch: MSB BOW THRUSTER panel (use menu item MSB SHAFT GEN of
the page MSB) by BOW THRUSTER FROM MSB ACB or by BOW
űű LOCAL – set to control the BT from this LOP;
THRUSTER FROM SG ACB as required.
űű REMOTE – set to control from the bridge (see the para-
graph 6.15.3.2 on page 187).

186
Bow Thruster
Switch the power supply 440 V for HPU on the No 1 AC440V • EMERGENCY STOP button with protection cover to stop the
FEEDER PANEL (use menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the BT in emergency circumstances; click once to open the cover,
page MSB) by the HYD POWER PACK FOR BOW THRUSTER cir- click second time to press the button;
cuit breaker. • Alarms panel comprising the lamps, which flash to indicate
the following cases (modeled by the faults from instructor):
6.15.3.2. Bow Thruster Control from Bridge
űű LOAD CNTRL FAILURE ;
Click the menu item Bridge Propulsion Control of the page BCC to űű CNTRL SYS FAILURE ;
open the panel for remote control of the Bow Thruster.
űű OIL LEVEL LOW ;
The BOW THRUSTER panel contains: űű OIL PRESSURE LOW.
• Ammeter of the BT motor; • ACKN button to acknowledge BT alarms; the lamps light
• CPP pitch gauge; continuously, and light down when the fault condition is
cleared.
• DRIVE MOTOR RUN and HYDRAULIC PUMP RUN indicator
lamps to display the motor and pump running state; Note: BT drive electric motor can receive power from the Shaft
• DRIVE MOTOR START and DRIVE MOTOR STOP buttons to operate
generator or from three running Diesel Generators. The motor starts
the BT motor when REMOTE control mode is set on the
only when EPP capacity is sufficient.
LOP (see the paragraph 6.15.3.1 on page 186);
• HYDRAULIC PUMP START and HYDRAULIC PUMP STOP buttons to
operate the hydraulic pump when REMOTE control mode
is set on the LOP (see the paragraph 6.15.3.1 on page 186);
• IN SERVICE lamp – illuminates when REMOTE control mode
is set on the LOP – bridge control available;
• IN COMMAND lamp – illuminated always (bridge control
position); 6.15.4. Faults Introduced by Instructor
• Thruster Machine Telegraph for remote speed control of Introduced faults are listed in Chapter 6, the paragraph 2.13.1
the thruster; on page 215.

187
Chapter 5. Instructions for Operating Machinery

This chapter contains the instructions for starting, stopping
and running Propulsion Plant, Electrical Plant and other
systems machinery of the Ro-Pax ferry vessel.

Chapter 5. Instructions for Operating Machinery . Chapter 5. Instructions for Operating Machinery

Chapter 5. Instructions for Operating Machinery

1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
2. Operating G/Es, MEs, EPP and Steam Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
2.1. Preparing for Ship Electric Plant Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
2.2. Starting Ship Electric Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
2.3. Starting EM’CY Generator Manually and Blackout Test . . . . . . . . . . . 191
2.4. Preparing for Main Engines Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
2.5. Starting Main Engine from ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
2.6. Starting Main Engine from LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
2.7. Switching Fuel Supply to HFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
2.8. Starting Thermal Oil Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
2.9. Starting Economizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
3. Operating Aux Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
3.1. Starting Incinerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
3.2. Starting Provision Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
3.3. Starting Chilled Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

189
Chapter 5. Instructions for Operating Machinery . Introduction

1. Introduction
The instructions in this chapter are given to help the Trainee
familiarize oneself with the Propulsion Plant operations and
ship systems and units control in the simulator.
Provided that the Trainee is familiar with the simulator archi-
tecture and ways of control, the instructions simply include
indication of the menu items to open respective displays.
Note: The instructions given in this Chapter imply that be-
fore switching on a mechanism the Trainee verifies that power
supply is available. In most starter panels and LOPs there
should be the power supply indicator lamp illuminated.

190
Chapter 5. Instructions for Operating Machinery . Operating G/Es, MEs, EPP and Steam Plant
Preparing for Ship Electric Plant Start
2. Operating G/Es, MEs, The following actions need to be taken to start No. 1 Genera-
tor Engine on MDO, start the generator and put it on MSB.
2.3. Starting EM’CY Generator
EPP and Steam Plant 1. Manual G/E start: Manually and Blackout Test
›› On the LOP GE 1 panel (use menu item Generator Engine 1 For manual start of the EG do the following:
Initial state of the ship units and mechanisms comprises
LOP of the page AER): 1. On the EMERGENCY GENERATOR ROOM LOUVRES CONTROL
electrical power supply from shore, all Generator Engines are
stopped, Main Engines are stopped, Steam plant is stopped. It űű Turn the four-position switch to MAN START position. BOX (use menu item EMCY DE LOP of the page EmG):
is assumed that the diesel engines will be started on MDO. űű Watch panel gauges to reach ENGINE SPEED = 1200 RPM. ›› Set the mode selector switch to position AUTO; the lou-
űű Turn the four-position switch to REMOTE position. vres then open automatically on the engine start;
2.1. Preparing for Ship Electric Plant Start or or
In default simulator exercise the power is supplied from shore ›› Set the mode selector switch to position MAN; click the
2. Start G/E from MSB:
connection and ship Electric Power Plant is stopped. buttons OPEN for INTAKE AIR LOUVRES and EXHAUST AIR
›› On the LOP GE 1 panel (use menu item Generator Engine 1
The following actions need to be taken to prepare generator LOUVRES.
LOP of the page AER): turn the four-position switch to RE-
engines for starting on MDO. MOTE position. 2. On the EMERGENCY GENERATOR AUTO START/STOP
1. On LOP GE 1 (2, 3) panels (use menu items Generator PANEL (use menu item EMCY DE LOP of the page EmG):
›› On SYNCHRO PANEL (use menu item MSB Synchro Panel of
Engine 1 (2, 3) LOP of the page AER): turn mode selector the page MSB): ›› Set the OPERATION SWITCH to position MAN;
switch to position AUTO on all pumps’ LOPs. ›› Press the START button on the controller; watch the engine
űű Switch SYNCHRO&POWER CONTROL to SWBD.
2. On EM’CY GEN ENGINE LOP (use menu item EM’CY DE LOP of state gauges at the top of the panel.
űű Confirm READY TO START lamp is illuminated green on
the page EmG): turn OPERATION SWITCH to position AUTO. 3. On SYNCHRO PANEL (use menu item MSB Synchro Panel of the
the GEN 1 panel.
The automatics then will watch the state of the MSB–ESB BUS page MSB): switch EMERGENCY SWITCHBOARD ACB OFF.
űű Turn the handle ENGINE CONTROL G1 to position START.
TIE and when the power supply from MSB is lost, then on the 4. On the switchboard EMERGENCY GENERATOR
EMERGENCY GENERATOR PANEL (AC450V 3P 60Hz) (use menu űű Turn FREQ & VOLTMETER to position G1; watch the
PANEL (AC450V 3P 60Hz) (use menu item EMCY
item EMCY Gen Panel of the page EmG), it will: gauges.
Gen Panel of the page EmG): click the button I to
3. On BUS TIE PANEL (use menu item MSB Gen 3, Bus Tie close EM’CY GEN (AC450V 3P 60Hz) ACB, or turn
• Open MAIN SWBD SOURCE bus tie ACB;
Panel of the page MSB) switch SHORE MCCB ACB OFF. red handle ACB CONTROL to position CLOSE.
• Start the EM’CY Gen;
4. On SYNCHRO PANEL (use menu item MSB For blackout test, on the switchboard EMERGENCY GENERA-
• Close EM’CY GEN (AC450V 3P 60Hz) ACB to power the ESB. Synchro Panel of the page MSB): turn red handle TOR PANEL (AC 450V 3P 60Hz) (use menu item EMCY Gen Panel of
G1 ACB CONTROL to position CLOSE.
2.2. Starting Ship Electric Plant 5. On MAIN CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (use menu item MCD of
the page EmG):
It is assumed that the pre-start actions described in the para- ›› Set the TEST switch to position EMG & ACB to initiate
the page MSB) watch connecting GEN 1 to MSB.
graph 2.1 on page 191 have been fulfilled. EMCY Gen blackout sequence. Thereby tripping relevant
6. Program the generators starting sequence as bus tie breaker ENGINE position of the TEST switch will
described in Chapter 3, the paragraph 5.2.1 on initiate engine starting test (starting EMCY Engine only)
page 69. G/E 2 and G/E 3 can be started and without blackout of ESB.
connected to MSB as described in Chapter 3.
›› After testing Set the TEST switch to position NORM.

191
Preparing for Main Engines Start
2.4. Preparing for Main Engines Start 8. On the MAIN AIR COMPRESSOR LOCAL CONTROL
panel (use menu item Air Compressors LOP of
15. On the MDO TRANSFER & TREATMENT
SYSTEM display of the page CMS:
It is assumed that Ship Electric Plant is started and MSB re- the page MER2): turn mode selector switch to ›› Click the buttons AUTO for MDO TRANSFER PUMP.
ceives power from Diesel generator(s). position REMOTE for compressors No 1, No 2.
›› Click the button LS MDO SETTLING or MDO SETTLING.
The instructions given below are an example sequence, how- 9. On the DECK COMPRESSOR panel (use menu
ever the final state of the mechanisms should be reached. ›› Select tanks for transfer: double-click respective valves.
item Air Compressors LOP of the page MER2): turn
The following actions need to be taken to prepare the ship mode selector switch to position AUTO. 16. On the FUEL OIL SERVICE SYSTEM display of the page CMS:
systems for starting MEs. ›› Double-click (start) the pumps:
Set CMS control position on GSPs
Set remote control position on LOPs űű FEED PUMP No 1;
10. On the MSB PS STARTERS 440 V No 1 (use menu
űű BOOSTER PUMP No 1.
1. On the COOLING WATER PUMP LOCAL CONTROLS display item MSB PS GSP Panel 1 of the page MSB) and MSB
(use menu item CW Pumps LOP of the page MER1): turn the SB STARTERS 440 V No 1 (use menu item MSB SB ›› Click the buttons ST-BY for:
mode selector switch to position REMOTE on all LOPs. GSP Panel 1 of the page MSB) turn the mode űű FEED PUMP No 2;
2. On the FEED & BOOSTER PUMPS LOCAL CONTROL display selector switch to CMS position on all starters: űű BOOSTER PUMP No 2.
(use menu item FO Pumps LOP of the page MER1): turn the 11. On the MSB PS STARTERS 440 V No 2 (use menu item 17. On the LUBE OIL SYSTEM display of the page CMS:
mode selector switch to position REMOTE on all LOPs. MSB PS GSP Panel 2 of the page MSB): turn the mode
›› Click the buttons AUTO for:
3. On the ME PORT CPP GBX PUMPS LOCAL CONTROL panel selector switch to CMS position on all starters.
űű ME Port LO Stand-by Pump;
(use menu item CPP ME PORT LOP of the page MER1): turn 12. On the MSB SB STARTERS 440 V No 2 (use menu item
mode selector switch to position REMOTE on pumps LOPs. MSB SB GSP Panel 2 of the page MSB): turn the mode űű ME Stbd LO Stand-by Pump.
4. On the ME STBD CPP GBX PUMPS LOCAL CONTROL panel selector switch to CMS position on all starters: 18. On the CPP display of the page CMS:
(use menu item CPP ME STBD LOP of the page MER1): turn 13. On the EM’CY GROUP STARTER PANEL (use menu item ›› Double-click (start) the pumps:
mode selector switch to position REMOTE on pumps LOPs. ESB Consumers of the page EmG) turn the mode selector űű CPP Port PUMP No 1;
5. On the LO PUMP LOCAL CONTROL panel (use menu item switch to CMS position on the No 2 ER FAN starter. űű CPP STBD PUMP No 1.
LO, Sludge Pumps LOP of the page MER1): turn mode selector Start pumps, fans, etc. and set their control mode on CMS ›› Click the buttons ST-BY for:
switch to position REMOTE on ST-BY pumps LOPs.
14. On the HFO TRANSFER & TREATMENT űű CPP Port PUMP No 2;
6. On the ENGINE ROOM VENTILATION panel (use menu
SYSTEM display of the page CMS: űű CPP STBD PUMP No 2.
item ER Ventilation LOP of the page MER1): turn mode
selector switch to position REMOTE on all fans LOPs. ›› Click the buttons AUTO for HFO TRANSFER PUMP 1, 2. ›› Click the buttons AUTO for:
7. On the FO TRANSFER PUMPS LOCAL CONTROL panel (use ›› Click the button LS HFO SETTLING or HFO SETTLING. űű GBX Port Electric Priming LO Pump;
menu item FO Transfer Pumps LOP of the page MER1): turn ›› Select tanks for transfer: double-click respective valves. űű GBX Stbd Electric Priming LO Pump.
mode selector switch to position REMOTE on pumps LOPs.

192
Starting Main Engine from ECR
19. On the SW COOLING SYSTEM display of the page CMS:

2.5. Starting Main Engine from ECR 2.6. Starting Main Engine from LOP
›› Double-click (start) the pumps:
It is assumed that all pre-start operation have been fulfilled as Manual start of the Main Engine can be executed from the ME
űű SW PUMP 1; described in the paragraph 2.4 on page 192. local control panel. It is assumed that all pre-start operation
űű SW PUMP 2. have been fulfilled as described in the paragraph 2.4 on page
The following actions need to be taken to start the Main En-
›› Click the button ST-BY for SW PUMP 3: 192. Hovewer, no preheating of the engine is fulfilled.
gine Port on MDO. ME STBD is started similar to ME PORT.
20. On the LT & HT COOLING SYSTEMS display of the page CMS: The following actions need to be taken to start the Main En-
1. On the ME PORT LOCAL panel (use menu item
›› Double-click (start) the pumps: gine Port on MDO.
ME Local Panel of the page MER1): confirm that
űű LT CW Pump 1; READY TO START lamp is illuminated. 1. On the ME PORT LOCAL panel (use menu
űű Nozzle Cooling Module Pump 1. 2. On the LT & HT COOLING SYSTEMS display of the item ME Local Panel of the page MER1):
›› Click the button ST-BY for: page CMS: watch the HT water temperature on the ›› Turn LOCAL CONTROL switch to position LOCAL.
HT Pre-heating pump discharge raise up to 40 °C. ›› Confirm that READY TO START lamp is illuminated.
űű LT CW Pump 2;
3. On the ECR PROPULSION CONTROL display (use ›› Click the button START. It flashes during starting sequence,
űű Nozzle Cooling Module Pump 2.
menu item ECR Propulsion Control of the page ECR): and lights continuously when ME is started.
›› Click the buttons AUTO for:
›› Confirm that ECR CONTROL lamp is illuminated. ›› Turn LOCAL CONTROL switch to position ECR.
űű HT CW Electric Pump in ME PS and ME SB HT circuits;
›› Click the START on ENGINE RPM NFU CONTROL panel. It
űű HT Pre-heating Pump in ME PS and ME SB HT circuits. flashes during starting sequence, and lights continuously 2.7. Switching Fuel Supply to HFO
21. On the VENTILATION SYSTEM display of the page CMS: when ME is started. It is assumed that diesel engines are running on MDO, Thermal
›› Click the button SUPPLY for No 3 SUPPLY/EXHAUST FAN; 4. On the STEERING GEAR panel (use menu item Oil system is operating.
›› Click the button EXH for No 4 SUPPLY/EXHAUST FAN; Steering Gear Panel of the page BCC):
The following actions need to be taken to feed DEs by HFO.
›› Double-click (start) the fans: ›› Click START PUMP 1 Port button. It is sufficient to start one of
the SG pumps for operation. 1. On the THERMAL OIL SYSTEM diagram (use
űű No 1 SUPPLY FAN 1; menu item Thermal Oil System of the page SYS):
›› Turn the three-position control mode selector switch to
űű No 2 SUPPLY FAN 2; confirm that HFO Booster Unit heating is on (see
position FU. The button FU INDP illuminates.
űű No 3 SUPPLY/EXHAUST FAN; Chapter 4, the paragraph 6.3.2 on page 140).
5. On the ECR PROPULSION CONTROL display (use
űű No 4 SUPPLY/EXHAUST FAN. 2. On the ECR PROPULSION CONTROL display (use
menu item ECR Propulsion Control of the page ECR):
menu item ECR Propulsion Control of the page
22. Start the Thermal Oil Heating system as ›› Click CLUTCH IN button on CLUTCH CONTROL panel. The ECR): turn FUEL OIL switch to position HFO.
described in the paragraph 2.8 on page 194. button illuminates when the clutch is engaged.
1. On the FUEL OIL SUPPLY SYSTEM diagram (use menu
item Fuel Oil Supply System of the page SYS): double-click
on the MDO Selection Return Valve 6 to by-pass MDO
Cooler (see Chapter 4, the paragraph 3.3.2 on page 108).

193
Starting Thermal Oil Heating System
2.8. Starting Thermal Oil Heating System 4. On the FUEL OIL SUPPLY SYSTEM diagram (use menu
item Fuel Oil Supply System of the page SYS, see Chapter 4,
The following actions need to be taken to start TOH system: the paragraph 3.3.2 on page 108): switch the FO Burner
1. On the THERMAL FLUID PUMP 1 panel (use menu Change Over Valves 4 to supply HFO to the burner.
items TOH Circ Pumps LOP of the page MER2): Note: Item 4 action is optional, and can be performed to-
›› Turn MAIN SWITCH to position 1. At that the lamp SOURCE gether with FO changeover for the main engines (see the
illuminates. paragraph 2.7 on page 193).
›› Turn HEATING switch to position 1. At that the lamp HEAT-
ING CIRC. PUMP 1 ON illuminates. 2.9. Starting Economizers
›› Turn MODE SELECT switch to position MANU. At that the It is assumed that TOH system is started and one or both MEs is
pump starts and the lamp CIRC. PUMP 1 RUN illuminates. running. The following actions need to be taken to put econo-
2. On the THERMAL FLUID PUMP 2 panel (use menu mizers in operation.
items TOH Circ Pumps LOP of the page MER2):
1. On the THERMAL FLUID ECO panel (use menu
›› Turn MAIN SWITCH to position 1. At that the lamp SOURCE items Thermal Oil Heater LOP of the page MER2):
illuminates.
›› Turn ECONOMISER PS switch is in position 2 = AUTOMATIC
›› Turn HEATING switch to position 1. At that the lamp HEAT- CONTROL.
ING CIRC. PUMP 2 ON illuminates.
›› Turn ECONOMISER SB switch is in position 2 = AUTOMATIC
›› After 5 sec delay turn MODE SELECT switch to position ST-BY. CONTROL.
3. On the OIL FIRE THERMAL FLUID BOILER panel (use ›› Click RESET SAFETY CIRCUIT button to enable economizers
menu items Thermal Oil Heater LOP of the page MER2): automatic operation.
›› Turn MAIN SWITCH to position 1. At that the lamp SOURCE 2. On the THERMAL OIL SYSTEM diagram (use
illuminates. menu item Thermal Oil System of the page SYS, see
›› Turn FUEL OIL PUMP 1 switch to position 1 = MANUAL. The Chapter 4, the paragraph 6.3.2 on page 140):
pump starts and the lamp FUEL OIL PUMP 1 IN OPERATION ›› Open ECO Port Thermal Oil Outlet Valve and ECO Stbd
illuminates. Thermal Oil Outlet Valve 5 .
›› Turn FUEL OIL PUMP 2 switch to position 3 = STAND BY. ›› Close Economizer Port&Stbd Thermal Oil By-pass valve 6 .
›› Turn BURNER CONTROL switch to position 2 = AUTOMATIC. ›› Open Supply Tracing Manifold To Inlet (Outlet) Valve 7 if
›› Turn switch HFO PREHEATER ON (position 2). the burner runs on HFO.
›› Click the button RESET SAFETY CIRCUIT. At that the burner Note: Turn FILLING PUMP switch to position 1 when Expansion
starts automatically, and the lamp BURNER IN OPERATION TK requires filling . At that the lamp FILLING PUMP IN OPERA-
illuminates. TION illuminates.

194
Chapter 5. Instructions for Operating Machinery . Operating Aux Systems
Starting Incinerator
3. Operating Aux Systems ›› Click the LOAD button to open the LOADING PANEL .
›› Load the solid waste matter as described in Chapter 4, the
4. On the panel INCINERATOR (use menu item
Incinerator LOP of the page AER):
3.1. Starting Incinerator paragraph 6.5.4.4 on page 150. ›› Switch MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker to 1 (on) position.
›› Double-click on the incinerator door to close it. ›› Set INCINERATOR START switch to START position.
The Incinerator System is described in Chapter 4, the paragraph
6.5 on page 146. ›› Double-click on the Drain valve (s) to drain water from the ›› Set PRIMARY BURNER switch to START position. When the
Waste Oil Tank (s). Water is presented by dark blue color burner starts the switch jumps back to RUN position and
The following actions need to be taken in the simulator to start at the bottom in the tank level bar graph. Close the valve the PRIMARY BURNER RUN lamp illuminates.
the incinerator. when no water is left. ›› Set SLUDGE BURNER switch to START position. When the
1. On the display INCINERATOR SYSTEM (use menu burner starts the switch jumps to RUN position and the
item Incinerator System of the page SYS): SLUDGE BURNER RUN lamp illuminates when the furnace
›› Open the valve to supply air for the burner. temperature reaches 900 °C.
Note 1: The alarm indicator lamps FURNACE TEMP LOW and
WO TANK TEMP LOW would normally light down automatically
during incinerator work.
Note 2: To save elecric power and fuel oil, it is possible to
stop the primary burner and stop the MDO pump when the
sludge burner is in operation.
2. On the display THERMAL OIL SYSTEM (use menu

item Thermal Oil System of the page SYS):
›› Double click on the supply valves of the line Incinerator
WO TKs Coil, and both Tracing boxes.
3. On the W.O. TANK CONTROL PANEL (use menu item
Incinerator LOP of the page AER) (see the description
in Chapter 4, the paragraph 6.5.4.2 on page 148):
›› Switch MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker to 1 (on) position.
›› Turn to AUTO position the switches: SERV. MILL PUMP,
SETT. MILL PUMP, MDO TRANS. PUMP. (MILL pumps are
›› Double-click on the incinerator door to open it. started when the panel receives power; MDO TRANS
pump is started in AUTO mode at incinerator start.)

195
Chapter 5. Instructions for Operating Machinery . Operating Aux Systems
Starting Provision Cooling System
3.2. Starting Provision Cooling System 3.3. Starting Chilled Plant

The following actions need to be taken in the simulator to start The following actions need to be taken to start the AC Plant for
the Provision cooling plant for automatic operation. automatic operation.
1. Check on MSB No 1 AC440V FEEDER PANEL (use 1. On the CHILLED PLANT LOP (use menu
menu item MSB Feeder Panel 440V of the page MSB) item Chilled Plant of the page MER2):
that PROVISION PLANT circuit breaker is ON. ›› Turn MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker to 1 (on) position.
2. On the PROVISION COOLING PLANT display (use ›› Turn OFF–AUTO switches for SEA WATER PUMP 1 and SEA
menu item Provision Plant LOP of the page MER2): WATER PUMP 2 to position AUTO.
›› Turn MAIN SWITCH circuit breaker to 1 (on) position. ›› Turn OFF–ON switches for CHILLED WATER PUMP 1 and
›› Click START/RUN button on the PC CW PUMP panel. The CHILLED WATER PUMP 2 to position ON.
button illuminates. ›› Turn OFF–AUTO switches for COMPRESSOR 1 and COM-
›› On both PC COMPRESSOR 1, PC COMPRESSOR 2 panels: PRESSOR 2 to position AUTO.
űű Ensure the SOURCE lamp is illuminated; 2. On the CMS diagram (use menu item CHILLED
űű Click the MASTER SOLENOID button to open the Master WATER SYSTEM of the page CMS):
Solenoid valve; ›› Watch the compressors run indicators to turn green.
űű Click the START/RUN button; ›› Watch the CHILLED WATER PUMP No 1 and No 2 indicators
űű Set the mode selector switch to AUT position. to turn blue.
›› Click start buttons in required AC Units to start air condi-
tioning in the rooms.

196
Chapter 6. Alarms & Faults

This chapter contains the list of simulator alarms and the list of
faults introduced by the instructor for training purposes.

Chapter 6. Alarms & Faults . Chapter 6. Alarms & Faults

Chapter 6. Alarms & Faults

1. Alarms and Breakdowns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.5. Page SYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.6.2. Stern Ramp Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1.1. Page BCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.5.1. Ballast System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.6.3. Drenching Main Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1.1.1. Bridge Propulsion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.5.2. Compressed Air Service System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.7. Page MER1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1.1.2. Safety Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.5.3. CPP System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.7.1. ME Local Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1.1.3. Steering Gear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.5.4. Fin Stabiliser System Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 1.7.2. MDO Purifier LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1.2. Page ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.5.5. Fin Stabiliser System Stbd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 1.7.3. HFO Purifiers LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1.2.1. ECR Propulsion Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.5.6. Cooling Water Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 1.7.4. LO Purifiers LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1.2.2. Water Fog Main Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.5.7. Fire Fighting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 1.8. Page MER2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1.3. Page CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.5.8. Fuel Oil Supply System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 1.8.1. Air Compressors LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1.3.1. CMS Propulsion Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.5.9. ME LO Common . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 1.8.2. Thermal Oil Heater LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1.3.2. CMS ME PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 1.5.10. Fresh Water Generator System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 1.8.3. HPP for RO-RO LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.3.3. CMS ME SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.5.11. Bilge Fire System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 1.8.4. Provision Plant LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.3.4. CMS CHW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.5.12. HFO Transfer & Treatment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 1.8.5. Fresh Water Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.4. Page MSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.5.13. ME PORT Lube Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 1.8.6. Oily Water Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.4.1. Synchro Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 1.5.14. ME STBD Lube Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 1.9. Page AER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.4.2. No 1 Generator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.5.15. Gen 1 Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 1.9.1. Generator Engine 1 (2, 3) LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.4.3. No 2, No 3 Generator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.5.16. Gen 2, Gen 3 Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 1.9.2. Sewage Treatment Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.4.4. No 2 MSB PS Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.5.17. MDO Transfer & Treatment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 1.9.3. Incinerator LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.4.5. No 2 MSB SB Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.5.18. Steering Gears System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 1.10. Page BTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.4.6. Shaft Generator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.6. Page CHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 1.10.1. Bow Thruster LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.4.7. AC220V Feeder Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.6.1. Hoist Ramp Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 1.11. Page FFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.4.8. Bus Tie Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 1.11.1. Bilge Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

198

1.12. Page EmG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 2.5.7. AC220V Feeder Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 2.10. Page MER1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
1.12.1. ESB consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 2.5.8. No 1 Feeder Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 2.10.1. ME Local Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
1.12.2. EM’CY G/E Set Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 2.5.9. No 2 Feeder Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 2.10.2. ME Turning Gear LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
1.12.3. EM’CY Generator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 2.5.10. Bus Tie Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 2.10.3. MDO Purifier LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
1.12.4. EM’CY Gen Engine LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 2.5.11. No 1 MSB PS Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 2.10.4. HFO Purifiers LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
1.12.5. Shore Supply Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 2.5.12. No 1 MSB SB Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 2.10.5. LO Purifiers LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
1.12.6. Battery Charger and Discharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 2.5.13. Bow Thruster Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 2.10.6. FO Pumps LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2. Faults Introduced by Instructor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.6. Page CID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 2.10.7. Exhaust Gas Scrubber LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.6.1. Main Engine PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 2.10.8. LO, Sludge Pumps LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.2. Page BCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.6.2. Main Engine SB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 2.10.9. FO Transfer Pumps LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.2.1. Safety Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.7. Page SYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 2.10.10. CPP ME PORT (STBD) LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.3. Page ECR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.7.1. Ballast System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 2.10.11. EM’CY Fire Pump LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.3.1. PID Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.7.2. Compressed Air Service System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 2.11. Page MER2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.3.2. ECR PID Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.7.3. CPP System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 2.11.1. Air Compressors LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
2.4. Page CMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.7.4. Cooling Water Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 2.11.2. Thermal Oil Heater LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
2.4.1. ME PORT Bearings Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.7.5. Fuel Oil Supply System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 2.11.3. Chilled Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.4.2. ME STBD Bearings Temp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.7.6. ME PORT Lube Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 2.11.4. TOH Circ Pumps LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.5. Page MSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.7.7. ME STBD Lube Oil System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 2.11.5. HPP for RO-RO LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.5.1. Synchro Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.7.8. Gen 1 Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 2.11.6. Provision Plant LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.5.2. No 1 Generator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.7.9. Gen 2 Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 2.11.7. Fresh Water Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.5.3. No 2, No 3 Generator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.7.10. Gen 3 Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 2.11.8. Oily Water Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.5.4. No 2 MSB PS Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 2.8. Page SG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 2.12. Page AER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.5.5. No 2 MSB SB Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 2.8.1. SG Local Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 2.12.1. Generator Engine 1 LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.5.6. Shaft Generator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 2.9. Page CHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 2.12.2. Generator Engine 2 LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
2.9.1. Cardeck Vent Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 2.12.3. Generator Engine 3 LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

199

2.12.4. Bilge Ballast Pumps LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

2.12.5. Sewage Treatment Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.12.6. Incinerator LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.12.7. Fin Stab PORT LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.12.8. Fin Stab STBD LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.13. Page BTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.13.1. Bow Thruster LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.13.2. FF Pumps LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.14. Page FFR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.14.1. Foam Pump Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.15. EmG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.15.1. ESB consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
2.15.2. EM’CY G/E Set Battery Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2.15.3. EM’CY Generator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2.15.4. EM’CY Gen Engine LOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2.15.5. Shore Supply Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
2.15.6. Battery Charger and Discharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

200
Chapter 6. Alarms & Faults . Alarms and Breakdowns
Page BCC
1. Alarms and Breakdowns • Fire Alarm

• General Alarm
• Water Fog System Pump Power Fail
• Water Fog System Pump Manual Mode
The simulator alarms and breakdowns are listed in the order of • Water Fog System Pump Overload
the simulator pages and their displays. The alarms in similar sys- 1.1.3. Steering Gear Panel
• Water Fog System Mist Detection
tems (e.g. Port and Stbd, or DG1 and DG2, DG3, etc.) are com- • Steering Gear Pump PORT (STBD) #1, #2 Hydraulic Lock
• Water Fog System In Manual Control Mode
bined together taking into account that the alarms are similar. • Steering Gear Pump PORT (STBD) #1, #2 Filter Clogged
• Steering Gear Pump PORT (STBD) #1, #2 Overload 1.3. Page CMS
1.1. Page BCC • Steering Gear Pump PORT (STBD) #1, #2 Phase Failure
1.3.1. CMS Propulsion Overview
1.1.1. Bridge Propulsion Control • Steering Gear Pump PORT (STBD) #1, #2 Power Failure
• Steering Gear Pump PORT (STBD) #1, #2 Control Power • ME PORT (STBD) Oil InletTemp High
• ME PORT (ME STBD) Reduce Power request
Failure • ME PORT (STBD) HT Outlet Temp High
• Propeller PORT (STBD) Adjust Pitch To Zero
• Steering Gear Pump PORT (STBD) #1, #2 Auto Start • PORT (STBD) Thrust Bearing Temperature High
• Bow Thruster Sump Tank Low Level
• Bow Thruster Hydraulic Pump Pressure Low 1.2. Page ECR 1.3.2. CMS ME PS
• Bow Thruster Load Control Failure • ME PORT Exhaust Temperature High
• Bow Thruster Control System Failure 1.2.1. ECR Propulsion Control • ME PORT Exhaust Temperature Deviation High Cyl 1~ Cyl 8
• E/R DeadMan Alarm • ME PORT Turbine OutletTemperature High
1.1.2. Safety Station
• Water Fog System Main Control Panel Power Failure 1.2.2. Water Fog Main Panel • ME PORT Turbine InletTemperature High
• ME PORT Air Cooler Temperature High
• Drenching System Main Control Panel Power Failure • Water Fog System Press Low
• ME PORT Exhaust Temperature Cyl 1 ~ Cyl 8 High
• CO2 Alarm Panel Power Failure • Water Fog System Fire Signal
• ME PORT EMCY Trip Overspeed
• Fire Alarm System Abnormal • Water Fog System M/E PORT (STBD) Space Released
• ME PORT Slow Down Exhaust Gas Temp Before TC HH
• Sprincler System for ER Workshop Release • Water Fog System M/E PORT (STBD) Space Abnormal
• ME PORT Slow Down Exhaust Gas Cyl Temp HH
• Sprincler System for ER Store Release • Water Fog System Separators Space Released
• ME PORT Slow Down Exhaust Gas Cyl Temp Dev. HH
• Sprincler System for Paint Box Release • Water Fog System Separators Space Abnormal
• ME PORT Slow Down Oil Inlet Temp HH
• Fire Station Power Lost • Water Fog System Boiler Front Space Released
• ME PORT Slow Down Main Bearing Temp High
• CO2 Release Alarm • Water Fog System Boiler Front Abnormal
• ME PORT Slow Down LO Duplex Filter Diff Pressure High
• ER CO2 Alarm • Water Fog System No 1, 2, 3 Aux Engine Space Released
• ME PORT Slow Down HT Outlet Temp High
• Aux ER CO2 Alarm • Water Fog System No 1, 2, 3 Aux Engine Space Abnormal
• ME PORT EMCY Trip Oil Pressure LL
• ECR CO2 Alarm • Water Fog System HPU Pumps Space Released
• ME PORT EMCY Trip GBX LO Pressure LL
• Purifier Room CO2 Alarm • Water Fog System HPU Pumps Space Abnormal
• ME PORT EMCY Trip Splash Oil Temp Dev. HH

201
Page MSB
• ME PORT EMCY Trip TC LO Pressure LL • Synchro Panel 24V Source Fail • Shaft Gen. To MSB ACB Abnormal Trip
• ME PORT EMCY Trip TC LO Temp HH • ESB Saf. Source Fail • Shaft Gen. ACB To Bow Thruster Abnormal Trip
• ME PORT EMCY Trip Main Bearing Temp HH
1.4.2. No 1 Generator Panel 1.4.7. AC220V Feeder Panel
• ME PORT EMCY Trip HT Outlet Temp HH
• No 1 Gen. Frequency Abnormal • MSB 220V Insulation Low
• ME PORT OverLoad
• No 1 Gen. Voltage Abnormal
1.3.3. CMS ME SB 1.4.8. Bus Tie Panel
• No 1 Gen. Power High
• MSB 440V Insulation Low
Alarms of ME SB are similar to alarms of ME PS. • No 1 Gen. Current High
1.3.4. CMS CHW

• No. 1 Gen. “R”, “S”, “T” Phase Temp. High
1.5. Page SYS
• No 1 Gen. ACB Reverse Power Trip
• HVAC System Fault • No 1 Gen. ACB Abnormal Trip 1.5.1. Ballast System
• No 1 Gen. ACB Over Current Trip
1.4. Page MSB • No 1 Gen. ACB Short Cirquit Trip
• Ballast Pump 1, 2 Abnormal
• №1, №2 Main Air Compressor Abnormal • No 1 Gen. Abnormal

1.5.2. Compressed Air Service System
• MDO Transfer Pump Abnormal • EMCY Shut-Off Air Reservoir Pressure Low
• HFO Transfer Pump 1, 2 Abnormal 1.4.3. No 2, No 3 Generator Panel • №1, №2 Main Air Reservoir Pressure Low
• №1, №3, №4 ER Fan Abnormal Alarms are similar to No 1 Generator Panel. • DECK Service Air Reservoir Pressure Low
• FO Feed Pump 1, 2 Abnormal • Air Dryer Abnormal
• FO Booster Pump 1, 2 Abnormal
1.4.4. No 2 MSB PS Starters
• No 1 Bilge and Fire Pump Abnormal 1.5.3. CPP System
1.4.1. Synchro Panel • ME PORT (STBD) Gear Box Oil Temperature High
• MSB Frequency High
1.4.5. No 2 MSB SB Starters
• ME PORT (STBD) Gear Box Pressure Low
• MSB Voltage Low • No 2 Bilge and Fire Pump Abnormal
• ME PORT (STBD) Gear Box Filter Pressure Drop High
• MSB Voltage High • No 3 Bilge and Fire Pump Abnormal
• ME PORT (STBD) Gear Box Oil Tank Level Low
• MSB Frequency Low 1.4.6. Shaft Generator Panel • PORT (STBD) Stern Tube Header Tank Level Low
• No 1, No 2, No 3 Gen. Non Closed • ME PORT (STBD) CPP System Filter Pressure Drop High
• Shaft Gen. Voltage Abnormal
• No 1, No 2, No 3 Gen. Auto Sync. Failure • ME PORT (STBD) CPP Oil Tank Level Low
• Shaft Gen. Frequency Abnormal
• Bus Short Circuit • ME PORT (STBD) CPP Oil Temperature High
• Shaft Gen. “R”, “S”, “T” Phase Temp. High
• Pref. Trip (PT1), (PT2) • ME PORT (STBD) CPP Pressure Low
• Shaft Gen. Power High
• PMS Alarm • PORT (STBD) Stern Tube FWD Bearing Temperature High
• Shaft Gen. Current High

202
Page SYS
• PORT (STBD) Stern Tube Mid Bearing Temperature High • LT Stby Pump Autostart • ME PORT (STBD) Secondary Filter Pressure Drop High
• PORT (STBD) Stern Tube Aft Bearing Temperature High • Nozzle CW ME Stbd Outlet Temperature High • ME PORT (STBD) High pressure FO leakage
• PORT (STBD) CPP Remote Control Failure • LT System Pressure Low • Feed Pump auto-start
• ME PORT (STBD) GBX Remote Control Failure • Nozzle Cooling Tank Level Low • Booster Pump auto-start
• ME PORT (STBD) GBX Pneumatic Fault • LT System Temp High • ME PORT (STBD) Fuel Oil Pressure Low
• ME PORT (STBD) Gear Box Pump Auto Start • LT Exp Tank Level Low
1.5.9. ME LO Common
• ME PORT (STBD) CPP Pump Auto Start • LT CPP PORT Cooler Inlet Temp Low
• ME LO Storage Tank Level Low
• ME PORT HT Stby Pump Autostart
1.5.4. Fin Stabiliser System Port • ME LO Storage Tank Level High
• ME STBD HT Stby Pump Autostart
• Port Stab System CCU Fault • ME STBD LO Service Tank Level Low
• ME PORT HT Exp Tank Level Low
• Port HPU Tripped • ME LO Leakage Tank Level High
• ME STBD HT ExpTank Level Low
• Port HPU Filter Clogged • ME STBD LO Service Tank Level High
• SW System Pressure Low
• Port Fin Non Locked • ME PORT LO Service Tank Level Low
• SW Stby Pump Autostart
• Port Fin Non Rig In • ME STBD LO Driven Pump Suction Filter Pressure Diff High
• Port Fin Non Rig Out 1.5.7. Fire Fighting System • ME PORT LO Service Tank Level High
• Port Servo Pressure • Press. In Sprinkler Hydrophore Low • ME STBD LO St-by Pump Suction Filter Pressure Diff High
• Port Main Pressure • Drenching System Water Tank Level Low • ME PORT LO Automatic Filter Pressure Diff High
• Port Main Pressure Low Low • ME STBD LO Duplex Filter Pressure Diff High
1.5.8. Fuel Oil Supply System
• Port Oil Tank Low Level • ME PORT LO St-by Pump Suction Filter Pressure Diff High
• ME PORT (STBD) HFO Fuel Oil Inlet Temperature High
• Port Oil Tank Low Low Level • ME STBD LO Automatic Filter Pressure Diff High
• ME PORT (STBD) HFO Fuel Oil Inlet Temperature Low
• Port Oil Tank High Temperature • ME PORT LO Duplex Filter Pressure Diff High
• ME PORT (STBD) MDO Fuel Oil Inlet Temperature High
• Port Oil Tank High High Temperature • ME PORT LO Driven Pump Suction Filter Pressure Diff High
• Fuel Oil Viscosity
• Fin Stabiliser System Port Group Alarm • ME PORT LO St-by Pump Autostart
• HFO Service Tank 2 Level Low
• ME STBD LO St-by Pump Autostart
1.5.5. Fin Stabiliser System Stbd • LS HFO Service Tank 1 Level Low
Alarms for Fin stabilizer Stbd are similar to Port. • MDO Service Tank 1, 2 Level Low 1.5.10. Fresh Water Generator System
• Leak Oil Tank Level High • Fresh Water Generator System Failure
1.5.6. Cooling Water Systems • MDO Service Tank 1, 2 Level High
• Nozzle CW Pump Discharge Pressure Low
1.5.11. Bilge Fire System
• LS HFO Service Tank 1 Level High
• Nozzle Cooling Pump Stby Start • Steering Gear Room BW Level High
• HFO Service Tank 2 Level High
• Nozzle CW ME Port Outlet Temperature High • Dirty Water Tank Level High
• Auto Fillter Pressure Drop High

203
Page CHP
• OWS High Level of Hydrocarbons in Water • ME PORT LO St-by Pump Autostart

1.6. Page CHP
• Aux Gen RM FWD PORT (STBD) BW Level High • ME PORT LO Cylinder Pump No Power
• Aux Gen RM AFT PORT (STBD) BW Level High • ME PORT LO Cylinder Pump Failed 1.6.1. Hoist Ramp Panel
• BT RM BW Level High
1.5.14. ME STBD Lube Oil System • Hoist Ramp EMCY Stop
• Eng RM FWD PORT (STBD) BW Level High
• Eng RM PORT (STBD) BW Level High
Alarms are similar to alarms of ME PORT Lube Oil System. 1.6.2. Stern Ramp Panel
• Eng RM Aft BW Level High • Stern Ramp EMCY Stop
1.5.15. Gen 1 Engine System
• ER Bilge Hat High Level
• DG 1 HT Expansion Tank Level 1.6.3. Drenching Main Panel
• ER Flooding Alarm
• DG 1 LT Expansion Tank Level • Drenching System Press Low
1.5.12. HFO Transfer & Treatment System • Diesel Engine 1 Fuel Oil Pressure Low • Drenching System Fire Signal
• Sludge Tank Level High • Diesel Engine 1 Fuel Oil Filter Pressure Drop • Drenching System for Deck 5 Section 1, 2 Release
• LS HFO Settling Tank 1 Level Low • Diesel Engine 1 Fuel Oil Leakage • Drenching System for Deck 5 Section 1, 2 Abnormal
• HFO Settling Tank 2 Level Low • Drenching System for Deck 3 Section 3 ~ 7 Release
1.5.16. Gen 2, Gen 3 Engine System
• LS HFO Settling Tank 1 Level High • Drenching System for Deck 3 Section 3 ~ 7 Abnormal
Alarms are similar to alarms of Gen Engine 1 System.
• HFO Settling Tank 2 Level High • Drenching System Pump Power Fail
• HFO Overflow Tank Level High 1.5.17. MDO Transfer & Treatment System • Drenching System Pump Manual Mode
• LS HFO Bunker Tank PORT 1 Level High • Drenching System Pump Overload
• LS MDO Settling Tank Level High
• HFO Bunker Tank STBD 1, 2 Level High • Drenching System Mist Detection
• LS MDO Settling Tank Level Low
• HFO Bunker Tank PORT 2 Level High • Drenching System In Manual Control Mode
• MDO Settling Tank Level Low
• HFO Overflow
• MDO Storage Tank PORT (STBD) Level Low 1.7. Page MER1
1.5.13. ME PORT Lube Oil System • MDO Settling Tank Level High
• ME PORT LO Service Tank Level Low • MDO Storage Tank PORT (STBD) Level High 1.7.1. ME Local Panel
• ME PORT LO Service Tank Level High • MDO OverflowTank Level High • ME PORT (STBD) Start Air Pressure Low
• ME PORT LO Automatic Filter Pressure Diff High • MDO Overflow • ME PORT (STBD) Control Air Pressure Low
• ME PORT (STBD) Oil Pressure Low
• ME PORT LO St-by Pump Suction Filter Pressure Diff High 1.5.18. Steering Gears System
• ME PORT LO Duplex Filter Pressure Diff High • ME PORT (STBD) TC Oil Pressure Low
• SG PORT (STBD) Tank 1, 2 Level Low
• ME PORT LO Driven Pump Suction Filter Pressure Diff High • ME PORT (STBD) Start Blocked
• ME PORT (STBD) Emergency Stop
• ME PORT (STBD) Start Interrupt

204
Page MER2
1.7.2. MDO Purifier LOP 1.7.4. LO Purifiers LOP • Deck Service Air Compressor Abnormal
• Deck Compressor Common Alarm
• MDO Purifier System Failure • ME PORT LO Purifier System Failure
MDO Purifier Alarm Group • ME STBD LO Purifier System Failure 1.8.2. Thermal Oil Heater LOP
• MDO Purifier Ejection Monitor Level High ME PORT LO Purifier Alarm Group • TOH Return Fuel Oil High Pressure
• MDO Purifier Feed Pump Failure • ME PORT LO Purifier Ejection Monitor Level High • TOH HFO Temperature Low
• MDO Purifier Motor Failure • ME PORT LO Purifier Water Discharge High • TOH ST-BY Fuel Oil Pump Autostart
• MDO Purifier Emcy Stop • ME PORT LO Purifier Low Inlet Temp • TOH Boiler Inlet Fuel Temperature
• MDO Purifier water discharge high • ME PORT LO Purifier Motor Failure • TOH Fuel Oil Pressure Low Low
• MDO Purifier lnlet temp low • ME PORT LO Purifier High Vibration • TOH Exhaust Gas Temperature High
• MDO Purifier High Vibration • ME PORT LO Purifier High Inlet Temp • Thermal Oil Heater Group Alarm
• MDO Purifier lnlet temp high • ME PORT LO Purifier Feed Pump Failure • TOH Expansion Tank Temperature High
• MDO Purifier Common Alarm • ME PORT LO Purifier Common Alarm • TOH Flame Out
• TOH Expansion Tank Temperature High
• MDO Purifier Low Back Pressure • ME PORT LO Purifier Emcy Stop
• TOH Expansion Tank Level Low
• ME PORT LO Purifier Low Back Pressure
1.7.3. HFO Purifiers LOP • TOH Expansion Tank Level High
ME STBD LO Purifier Alarm Groupe
• HFO Purifier 1, 2 System Failure • TOH Fail to Ignite
Alarms are similar to LO Purifier Port Group alarms.
• TOH Burner Trouble
HFO Purifier 1 Alarm Group
• TOH Thermal Oil Flow Low
• HFO Purifier 1 High Vibration 1.8. Page MER2 • TOH Thermal Oil Flow Insufficient
• HFO Purifier 1 lnlet temp high
• HFO Purifier 1 Ejection Monitor Level High 1.8.1. Air Compressors LOP • TOH Thermal Oil Out Temperature High
• TOH Flange Open
• HFO Purifier 1 Motor Failure • EMCY Air Compressor Abnormal
• TOH Thermal Oil Leakage
• HFO Purifier 1 Feed Pump Failure • №1, 2 Main Air Compressor Over Current Trip
• ECO PORT (STBD) Thermal Oil Out Temperature High
• HFO Purifier 1 Emcy Stop • №1, 2 Main Air Compressor Low Oil Pressure
• ECO PORT (STBD) Thermal Oil Flow Low
• HFO Purifier 1 water discharge high • №1, 2 Main Air Compressor High Temp
• ECO PORT (STBD) Exhaust Gas Temperature High
• HFO Purifier 1 lnlet temp low • №1, 2 Main Air Compressor Low Oil Level • ECO PORT (STBD) Thermal Oil Leakage
• HFO Purifier 1 Common Alarm • №1, 2 Main Air Compressor Abnormal • TOH Circulation Pump Stby autostart
• HFO Purifier 1 Low Back Pressure • №1, 2 Main Air Compressor Group Alarm • TOH Expansion Tank Level Low Low
HFO Purifier 2 Alarm Groupe Deck Compressor • TOH EMCY Stop
Alarms are similar to Purifier 1 Group alarms. • Deck Service Air Compressor High Air Temp • TOH System Failure

205
Page AER
1.8.3. HPP for RO-RO LOP 1.9. Page AER 1.9.3. Incinerator LOP
• HPU Pump1, Pump2, Pump3 Overload Motor • Incinerator W.O. Service TK Level High
• HPU Stern Pump1, Pump2, Pump3 Overload Motor
1.9.1. Generator Engine 1 (2, 3) LOP • Incinerator W.O. Service TK Level Low
• DG 1 LO Sump Tank Level Low • Incinerator W.O. Service TK Temp. High
1.8.4. Provision Plant LOP • DG 1 LO Filter Pressure Difference High • Incinerator W.O. Service TK Temp. Low
• PC Compressor1, 2 EMCY Trip Master Solenoid Closed • DG 1 LT CW Pressure Low • Incinerator W.O. Settling TK Level High
• PC Compressor1, 2 EMCY Trip Pressure Out High • No 1 G/E Emergency Stop • Incinerator W.O. Settling TK Level Low
• PC Compressor1, 2 EMCY Trip Temp Out High • DG 1 HT CW Pressure Low • Incinerator W.O. Settling TK Temp. High
• PC Compressor1, 2 EMCY Trip SW Pressure Low • No 1 G/E LO Inlet Pressure Low • Incinerator W.O. Settling TK Temp. Low
• PC Compressor1, 2 EMCY Trip Oil Pressure Low • No 1 G/E Exhaust Gas Temp Cyl. 1 High ~ Cyl. 8 High • Incinerator Motor Overload Alarm
• PC Compressor1, 2 EMCY Trip Oil Level Low • No 1 G/E HT Temp Outlet High • Incinerator Flame Out
• PC Compressor1, 2 EMCY Trip OverCurrent • No 1 G/E Oil Outlet Temp. High • Incinerator Fan Failure
• PC Compressor1, 2 Outlet Press. High • No 1 G/E Start Air Pressure Low • Incinerator Burner Failure
• PC Compressor1, 2 Outlet Temperature High • No 1 G/E Abnormal • Incinerator Shut Down
• PC SW Pressure Low • No 1 Gen. Start Fail • Incinerator Furnace Temp. High
• PC Compressor1, 2 Oil Level Low • Incinerator Furnace Temp. Low
• No 1 Gen. Shutdown
• PC Compressor1, 2 Oil Pressure Low • Incinerator Exhaust Gas Temp. High
• Cold Room “Fish” Defroster Alarm

1.9.2. Sewage Treatment Plant • Incinerator W.O. TK Temp Low
• Sewage Collecting Plant Vacuum Failure • Incinerator W.O. TK Level Abnormal
• Cold Room “Meat” Defroster Alarm
• Sewage Treatment Plant System Alarm
1.8.5. Fresh Water Generator • Sewage Treatment Plant High Temp Alarm
1.10. Page BTR
• Salinometer Alarm • Sewage Treatment Plant High Level Alarm 1.10.1. Bow Thruster LOP
• FWG Vacuum Failure • Sewage Collecting High Pressure
• Bow Thruster EMCY Stop
• PORT (STBD) FW Tank Level High • Sewage Collecting Plant Pump Motor M1 Failure
• Bow Thruster Motor Overload
• Sewage Collecting Plant High Level Failure
1.8.6. Oily Water Separator
• Oily Water Separator Abnormal
• Sewage Collecting High Level Reached 1.11. Page FFR
• Sewage Collecting Low Level Reached
• Black Water Treatment Common Alarm 1.11.1. Bilge Control Panel
• Fire Main Press. Low
• Bilge and Fire Sys. Control Air Press. Low

206
Page EmG
1.12. Page EmG 1.12.4. EM’CY Gen Engine LOP

• EM’CY Gen. Engine Start Failure
1.12.1. ESB consumers • EM’CY Gen. Engine Overspeed
• ESB 440V Insulation Low • EM’CY Gen. Engine Low LO Press.
• ESB 220V Insulation Low • EM’CY Gen Engine High Cool. Water Temp.
AC440V EM’CY Feeder Panel • EM’CY Gen. Engine High LO Temp.
• AC440V EM’CY Feeder Panel Voltage Low • EM’CY Gen. Engine Low Cool Water Press.
• AC440V EM’CY Feeder Panel Voltage High • EM’CY Gen. Engine Low Cool Water Level
• AC440V EM’CY Feeder Panel Frequency Low • EM’CY Gen. Engine Fuel Pipe Leakage
• AC440V EM’CY Feeder Panel Frequency High • EM’CY Gen. Engine Emergency Stop
• ESBD Abnormal • EM’CY Gen Engine Abnormal
1.12.2. EM’CY G/E Set Battery Charger 1.12.5. Shore Supply Panel
• EM’CY Gen Set Battery Charger Voltage Low • Shore Supply Current High
• EM’CY G/E Set Battery Charger Main Power Fail
1.12.6. Battery Charger and Discharger
• EM’CY G/E Set Battery Charger Abnormal
• Battery Charger and Discharger Insulation Resistance Low
1.12.3. EM’CY Generator Panel • Battery Charger Load Voltage Low
• EM’CY Gen. Voltage Abnormal • Battery Charger Load Voltage High
• EM’CY Gen. Frequency Abnormal • BCD Board 24 V DC Main Power Fail
• EM’CY Gen. Power High • Battery Charger DC Fault
• EM’CY Gen. Current High • Battery Charger and Discharger Abnormal
• EM’CY Gen. ACB Short Cirquit Trip
• EM’CY Gen. ACB Over Current Trip
• EM’CY Gen. Abnormal

207
Chapter 6. Alarms & Faults . Faults Introduced by Instructor
General
2. Faults Introduced by Instructor 2.2. Page BCC • PID LT Coolwater Breakdown

• PID LT Coolwater Incorrect Command Signal
2.1. General 2.2.1. Safety Station • PID Freshwater Generator Breakdown

• Deck 5 Section 1, 2 Fire • PID Freshwater Generator Incorrect Command Signal
Instructor can introduce faults into trainees’ exercises using
• Deck 3 Section 3 ~ 7 Fire
the e‑Tutor Performance monitor application or Faults 2.4. Page CMS
plugin of the Instructor application. • Deck 5 Section 1, 2 Fuel Filling Fire
In this section possible faults are described for Product • Deck 3 Section 3 ~ 7 Fuel Filling Fire 2.4.1. ME PORT Bearings Temp
Tanker simulator according to respective simulator pages and • ER Workshop Fire
• Me PORT ALL Cylinders Splashoil Failure
their displays. • ER Store Fire
• ME PORT Cylinder 1 ~ Cylinder 8 Splashoil Failure
Instructor manual provides detailed information on working • Paint Box Fire
• ME PORT Bearing 1 ~ Bearing 9 Fouling
with the Faults plugin of Instructor application. e-Tutor manual • Bow Thruster Room Fire
provides detailed information on working with the application.
• No 1, 2, 3 Aux Engine Fire 2.4.2. ME STBD Bearings Temp
The following description is a brief summary of steps to take • Purifier Room Fire Faults for ME STBD Bearings are similar to PORT.
for introducing a fault provided that an exercise is selected and
• ME PORT (STBD) Fire
assigned to a trainee.
• Ro-RO H.P.U. Pumps Room Fire 2.5. Page MSB
1. Open (start it in the Router) Performance
• Thermal Oil Boiler Fire
monitor application window. Trainee 2.5.1. Synchro Panel
monitor tab displays the Trainee status: • E.C.R. Fire
• MSB Side Bus Tie ACB Spring Charge Motor Failure
2. Create a trainee group with selected Trainee. If the group
with the selected Trainee exists, step 1 can be omitted.
2.3. Page ECR 2.5.2. No 1 Generator Panel
Note! The task e-Tutor Model should be started in the 2.3.1. PID Controllers • No 1 Gen. Auto Sync. Failure
Router application.
• PID ME PORT (STBD) LO Breakdown • No 1 Gen. ACB Spring Charge Motor Failure
3. In Instructor application open the Faults plugin in a • No 1 Gen. Air Filter Clogged
• PID ME PORT (STBD) LO Incorrect Command Signal
Desktop window. The Faults Control window opens up
4. Click the Add button. The window Select 2.3.2. ECR PID Setting 2.5.3. No 2, No 3 Generator Panel
parameter opens up. The tree root of all simulator
• PID ME PORT (STBD) HT Coolwater Breakdown Faults for No 2 Generator are similar to No 1.
faults is displayed in the left column.
• PID ME PORT (STBD) HT Coolwater Incorrect Command
5. Navigate the tree and select required fault. Click OK.
Signal 2.5.4. No 2 MSB PS Starters
6. Edit faults’ start/end time; enable/disable faults, etc.
• PID ME PORT (STBD) Charge Air Breakdown • HFO transfer pump 1 Auto-mode failure
7. Use Force button to activate a fault immediately.
• PID ME PORT (STBD) Charge Air Incorrect Command Signal • MDO Transfer Pump Short Circuit
• MDO Transfer Pump Over Current

208
Page MSB
• MDO Transfer Pump Low Insulation • No 2 HFO Transfer Pump Low Insulation • No 1, 2 Gen. Space Heater Short Circuit
• No 1 Bilge and Fire Pump Short Circuit • No 4 ER Fan Short Circuit • No 1, 2 Gen. Space Heater Low Insulation
• No 1 Bilge and Fire Pump Over Current • No 4 ER Fan Over Current • Thermo Controllers Short Circuit
• No 1 Bilge and Fire Pump Low Insulation • No 4 ER Fan Low Insulation • Thermo Controllers Low Insulation
• No 1 Starting Air Compressor Short Circuit • No 2, 3 Ballast Pump Short Circuit • Oily Water Separator Short Circuit
• No 1 Starting Air Compressor Over Current • No 2, 3 Ballast Pump Over Current • Oily Water Separator Low Insulation
• No 1 Starting Air Compressor Low Insulation • No 2, 3 Ballast Pump Low Insulation • Window Defrosting System Control Panel Short Circuit
• No 1 HFO Transfer Pump Short Circuit • Window Defrosting System Control Panel Low Insulation
2.5.6. Shaft Generator Panel
• No 1 HFO Transfer Pump Over Current • Fire Main Control Panel MSB Feeder Short Circuit
• Shaft Gen. To MSB ACB Spring Charge Motor Failure
• No 1 HFO Transfer Pump Low Insulation • Fire Main Control Panel MSB Feeder Low Insulation
• No 1, 3 ER Fan Short Circuit 2.5.7. AC220V Feeder Panel • Water Fog Main Control Panel MSB Feeder Short Circuit
• No 1, 3 ER Fan Over Current • Water Fog Main Control Panel MSB Feeder Low Insulation
• Nav Lighting Control Panel On B.C.C. MSB Feeder Short
• No 1, 3 ER Fan Low Insulation Circuit • CO2 Alarm Panel MSB Feeder Short Circuit
• No 1 Ballast Pump Short Circuit • Nav Lighting Control Panel On B.C.C. MSB Feeder Low • CO2 Alarm Panel MSB Feeder Low Insulation
• No 1 Ballast Pump Over Current Insulation • Shaft Gen. Space Heater Short Circuit
• No 1 Ballast Pump Low Insulation • Nav Instrument Control Panel In B.C.C. MSB Feeder Short • Shaft Gen. Space Heater Low Insulation
Circuit • Galley Power Distrib. Board Short Circuit
2.5.5. No 2 MSB SB Starters • Nav Instrument Control Panel In B.C.C. MSB Feeder Low • Galley Power Distrib. Board Low Insulation
• HFO transfer pump 2 Auto-mode failure Insulation
• Viscosimeter Short Circuit
• LT Harbour Pump Short Circuit • No 1 Lightind Distrib Board In B.C.C. Short Circuit
• Viscosimeter Low Insulation
• LT Harbour Pump Over Current • No 1 Lightind Distrib Board In B.C.C. Low Insulation
• Safety Station Bilge Control Panel MSB Feeder Short Circuit
• LT Harbour Pump Low Insulation • No 2 ~ 6 Lightind Distrib Board Short Circuit
• Safety Station Bilge Control Panel MSB Feeder Low
• No 2 Bilge and Fire Pump Short Circuit • No 2 ~ 6 Lightind Distrib Board Low Insulation Insulation
• No 2 Bilge and Fire Pump Over Current • Bridge Control Console (B.C.C. AC 220V Power D.B.) MSB • Drenching Main Control Panel MSB Feeder Short Circuit
• No 2 Bilge and Fire Pump Low Insulation Feeder Short Circuit
• Drenching Main Control Panel MSB Feeder Low Insulation
• No 2 Starting Air Compressor Short Circuit • Bridge Control Console (B.C.C. AC 220V Power D.B.) MSB
• No 2 Starting Air Compressor Over Current

Feeder Low Insulation 2.5.8. No 1 Feeder Panel
• Engine Control Console (E.C.C. AC 220V Power D.B.) MSB • Fire Hydrofor Unit Pump Short Circuit
• No 2 Starting Air Compressor Low Insulation
Feeder Short Circuit
• No 2 HFO Transfer Pump Short Circuit • Fire Hydrofor Unit Pump Over Current
• Engine Control Console (E.C.C. AC 220V Power D.B.) MSB
• No 2 HFO Transfer Pump Over Current • Fire Hydrofor Unit Pump Low Insulation
Feeder Low Insulation

209
Page MSB
• ME Port Cyl Oil Pump Short Circuit • No 1 Nozzle Cooling Pump Over Current • No 3 Sea Water Cooling Pump Low Insulation
• ME Port Cyl Oil Pump Over Current • No 1 Nozzle Cooling Pump Low Insulation • ME Stbd HT Pre-Heat Pump Short Circuit
• ME Port Cyl Oil Pump Low Insulation • ME Port No 1 CPP Pump Short Circuit • ME Stbd HT Pre-Heat Pump Over Current
• ME Port No 1 CPP Pump Over Current • ME Stbd HT Pre-Heat Pump Low Insulation
2.5.9. No 2 Feeder Panel
• ME Port No 1 CPP Pump Low Insulation • ME Stbd ST-BY LO Pump Short Circuit
• ME Stbd Cyl Oil Pump Short Circuit
• No 1 FO Feed Pump Short Circuit • ME Stbd ST-BY LO Pump Over Current
• ME Stbd Cyl Oil Pump Over Current
• No 1 FO Feed Pump Over Current • ME Stbd ST-BY LO Pump Low Insulation
• ME Stbd Cyl Oil Pump Low Insulation
• No 1 FO Feed Pump Low Insulation • No 2 Nozzle Cooling Pump Short Circuit
• Galley Dist. Board Short Circuit
• ME Port GBX Priming LO Pump Short Circuit • No 2 Nozzle Cooling Pump Over Current
• Galley Dist. Board Low Insulation
• ME Port GBX Priming LO Pump Over Current • No 2 Nozzle Cooling Pump Low Insulation
2.5.10. Bus Tie Panel • ME Port GBX Priming LO Pump Low Insulation • ME Port No 2 CPP Pump Short Circuit
• ME Stbd No 1 CPP Pump Short Circuit • ME Port No 2 CPP Pump Over Current
• Bus Tie ACB Spring Charge Motor Failure
• ME Stbd No 1 CPP Pump Over Current • ME Port No 2 CPP Pump Low Insulation
2.5.11. No 1 MSB PS Starters • ME Stbd No 1 CPP Pump Low Insulation • No 2 FO Feed Pump Short Circuit
• No 1 Sea Water Cooling Pump Short Circuit • No 1 FO Booster Pump Short Circuit • No 2 FO Feed Pump Over Current
• No 1 Sea Water Cooling Pump Over Current • No 1 FO Booster Pump Over Current • No 2 FO Feed Pump Low Insulation
• No 1 Sea Water Cooling Pump Low Insulation • No 1 FO Booster Pump Low Insulation • ME Stbd GBX Priming LO Pump Short Circuit
• No 1 LT Cooling Water Pump Short Circuit • ME Stbd GBX Priming LO Pump Over Current
2.5.12. No 1 MSB SB Starters
• No 1 LT Cooling Water Pump Over Current • ME Stbd GBX Priming LO Pump Low Insulation
• No 2 Sea Water Cooling Pump Short Circuit
• No 1 LT Cooling Water Pump Low Insulation • ME Stbd No 2 CPP Pump Short Circuit
• No 2 Sea Water Cooling Pump Over Current
• ME Port HT Cooling Water Pump Short Circuit • ME Stbd No 2 CPP Pump Over Current
• No 2 Sea Water Cooling Pump Low Insulation
• ME Port HT Cooling Water Pump Over Current • ME Stbd No 2 CPP Pump Low Insulation
• No 2 LT Cooling Water Pump Short Circuit
• ME Port HT Cooling Water Pump Low Insulation • No 2 FO Booster Pump Short Circuit
• No 2 LT Cooling Water Pump Over Current
• ME Port HT Pre-Heat Pump Short Circuit • No 2 FO Booster Pump Over Current
• No 2 LT Cooling Water Pump Low Insulation
• ME Port HT Pre-Heat Pump Over Current • No 2 FO Booster Pump Low Insulation
• ME Stbd HT Cooling Water Pump Short Circuit
• ME Port HT Pre-Heat Pump Low Insulation
• ME Stbd HT Cooling Water Pump Over Current 2.5.13. Bow Thruster Panel
• ME Port ST-BY LO Pump Short Circuit
• ME Stbd HT Cooling Water Pump Low Insulation • Bow Thruster From SG Spring Charge Motor Failure
• ME Port ST-BY LO Pump Over Current
• No 3 Sea Water Cooling Pump Short Circuit • Bow Thruster From MSB Spring Charge Motor Failure
• ME Port ST-BY LO Pump Low Insulation
• No 3 Sea Water Cooling Pump Over Current
• No 1 Nozzle Cooling Pump Short Circuit

210
Page CID
2.6. Page CID 2.7.3. CPP System SW SYSTEM

• SW Upper (Lower) Chest Air Leakage
• ME PORT (STBD) GBX Clutch slipping
2.6.1. Main Engine PS • ME PORT (STBD) GBX Remote Control Failure
• SW Top Bilge Suction Filter Fouling
• Cyl 1 ~ Cyl 8 Sticking of piston rings • SW Upper Chest (Lower) Chest Suction Filter Fouling
• ME PORT (STBD) GBX Pneumatic Fault
• Cyl 1 ~ Cyl 8 Piston ring wear • PORT (STBD) Shaft FWD Seal Wear Common
• Cyl 1 ~ Cyl 8 Fuel Pump Plunger jammed • PORT (STBD) Shaft Aft Seal Wear • SW LT Cooler1, Cooler2 Fouling
• Cyl 1 ~ Cyl 8 Late Injection • PORT (STBD) Stern Tube Middle Bearing Wear • SW ME PORT (STBD) HT Cooler Fouling
• Cyl 1 ~ Cyl 8 Early Injection • PORT (STBD) Stern Tube Aft Bearing Wear Pumps
• Cyl 1 ~ Cyl 8 Poor Fuel Atomization • PORT (STBD) Stern Tube FWD Bearing Wear • SW Pump 1 ~ Pump 3 Breakdown
2.6.2. Main Engine SB • PORT (STBD) CPP Remote Control Failure LT SYSTEM
• ME PORT (STBD) CPP Oil Leakage
Faults for ME SB are similar to ME PS Common
• ME PORT (STBD) CPP Cooler Fouling
• LT Cooling Water Leakage
2.7. Page SYS • ME PORT (STBD) GBX Oil Leakage
• LT ME PORT (STBD) Charge Air Stage 2 Cooler Fouling
• ME PORT (STBD) GBX Cooler Fouling
• LT ME PORT (STBD) LO Cooler Fouling
2.7.1. Ballast System • ME PORT (STBD) Gear Box Filter 1, 2 Fouling
• LT ME PORT (STBD) CPP Cooler Fouling
• ME PORT (STBD) CPP Box Filter 1, 2 Fouling
Heeling System • LT ME PORT (STBD) Gear LO Cooler Fouling
• Heeling Pump Fault Wear 2.7.4. Cooling Water Systems Pumps
• Heeling Pump Breakdown • LT Pump 1, Pump 2 Breakdown
Nozzle Cooling
Ballast System • Nozzle Water Expansion TK Leakage • LT Harbour Pump Breakdown
• Ballast Pump 1, 2 Fault Wear HT PORT (STBD) SYSTEM
• Nozzle Cooling Pump 1, 2 Breakdown
• Ballast Pump 1, 2 Breakdown
• Nozzle Cooling Pump 1, 2 Wear Common
2.7.2. Compressed Air Service System • Nozzle LT Cooler Fouling • ME PORT (STBD) HT Water Leakage
• ME Port Nozzle Pipeline Fouling • ME PORT (STBD) HT Charge Air Stage 1 Cooler Fouling
• №1 Main, №2 Main Air Compressor Lube Oil Leakage
• ME Port Nozzle Pipeline Water Leakage • ME PORT (STBD) HT SW Cooler Fouling
• EMCY Air Compressor Motor Failure
• ME Stbd Nozzle Pipeline Fouling Pumps
• Air Dryer Abnormal
• ME Stbd Nozzle Pipeline Water Leakage • HT PORT (STBD) Driven Pump Wear
• Compressed Air Leakage
• HT PORT (STBD) Driven Pump Breakdown
• HT PORT (STBD) Electric Pump Breakdown

211
Page SG
2.7.5. Fuel Oil Supply System 2.7.8. Gen 1 Engine System • Steering Gear Pump 1, 2 PORT (STBD) Break
• Steering Gear Pump 1, 2 PORT (STBD) Control Power Failure
• FO Automatic filter fouling • Diesel Engine 1 Fuel Oil Filter 1, 2 Fouling
• Steering Gear Pump 1, 2 PORT (STBD) Wear
• ME PORT (STBD) Secondary Filter 1, 2 Fouling • Diesel Engine 1 Fuel Oil Leakage
• Steering Gear Pump 1, 2 PORT (STBD) Filter Clogged
• LS HFO Settling Tank 1 High Water Content • DG 1 LT CW Electrical Pump Breakdown
• Steering Gear Pump 1, 2 PORT (STBD) Overload
• HFO Settling Tank 2 High Water Content • DG 1 LT CW Electrical Pump Wear
• Steering Gear Pump 1, 2 PORT (STBD) Hydraulic Lock
• ME PORT (STBD) Leakage From The Sleved Injector Lines • DG 1 LT CW Gear Driven Pump Breakdown
• Steering Gear Pump 1, 2 PORT (STBD) Phase Failure
• MDO cooler fouling • DG 1 LT CW Gear Driven Pump Wear
• Steering Gear Pump Unit 1, 2 PORT (STBD) Oil Leakage
• FO Automatic filter Failure • DG 1 LT CW Oil Cooler Fouling
• Fuel counter Fouling • DG 1 HT CW Electrical Pump Breakdown 2.9. Page CHP
ME LO Common • DG 1 HT CW Electrical Pump Wear
• ME LO Transfer Pump Breakdown • DG 1 HT CW Gear Driven Pump Breakdown 2.9.1. Cardeck Vent Starters
• DG 1 HT CW Gear Driven Pump Wear • Cardeck Sup/Exh Fan No 1 ~ No 8 Short Circuit
Bilge Fire System
• DG 1 LO Electrical Pump Breakdown • Cardeck Sup/Exh Fan No 1 ~ No 8 Over Current
• ER Flooding
• DG 1 LO Electrical Pump Wear • Cardeck Sup/Exh Fan No 1 ~ No 8 Low Insulation
• ER Fast Flooding
• DG 1 LO Gear Driven Pump Breakdown
2.7.6. ME PORT Lube Oil System • DG 1 LO Gear Driven Pump Wear 2.10. Page MER1
• ME PORT LO Automatic Filter Fouling • DG 1 LO Filter 1, 2 Fouling
2.10.1. ME Local Panel
• ME PORT LO Stand-By Pump Breakdown • DG 1 LO Leakage
• ME PORT (STBD) Governor Fault
• ME PORT LO Gear Driven Pump Breakdown
2.7.9. Gen 2 Engine System • ME PORT (STBD) Broken
• ME PORT Cyl Oil Pump Breakdown
Faults for Gen 2 Engine system are similar to Gen 1 System.
• ME PORT LO Leakage From Service Tank 2.10.2. ME Turning Gear LOP
• ME PORT LO St-by Pump Suction Filter Fouling 2.7.10. Gen 3 Engine System • Cons 440V ME PS TurningGear Short Circuit
• ME PORT LO Driven Pump Suction Filter Fouling • Cons 440V ME PS TurningGear Over Current
Faults for Gen 3 Engine system are similar to Gen 1 System.
• ME PORT LO Duplex Filter 1 Fouling • Cons 440V ME PS TurningGear Low Insulation
• ME PORT LO Duplex Filter 2 Fouling
2.8. Page SG • Cons 440V ME SB TurningGear Short Circuit
2.7.7. ME STBD Lube Oil System • Cons 440V ME SB TurningGear Over Current
2.8.1. SG Local Panel • Cons 440V ME SB TurningGear Low Insulation
Faults for STBD LO system are similar to PORT.
• No 1, 2 Port (Stbd) Steering Gear Motor Short Circuit
• No 1, 2 Port (Stbd) Steering Gear Motor Low Insulation

212
Page MER2
2.10.3. MDO Purifier LOP • HFO Booster Pump 1 Breakdown • EM’CY Fire Pump Low Insulation
• HFO Booster Pump 1 Wear • EM’CY Fire Pump Failure
• MDO Purifier Short Circuit
• HFO Feed Pump 2 Breakdown • EM’CY Fire Pump Wear
• MDO Purifier Over Current
• HFO Feed Pump 2 Wear
• MDO Purifier Low Insulation
• HFO Booster Pump 2 Breakdown
2.11. Page MER2
• MDO Purifier Feed Pump Break
• HFO Booster Pump 2 Wear
• MDO Purifier Ejection Monitor Level High 2.11.1. Air Compressors LOP
• MDO Purifier Motor Break 2.10.7. Exhaust Gas Scrubber LOP • EM’CY Air Compressor Short Circuit
• MDO Purifier High Vibration • Exh. Gases Scrubber Control Short Circuit • EM’CY Air Compressor Over Current
• EM’CY Air Compressor Low Insulation
2.10.4. HFO Purifiers LOP 2.10.8. LO, Sludge Pumps LOP • Deck Air Compressor Short Circuit
• No 1, 2 HFO Purifier Short Circuit • LO Transfer Pump Short Circuit • Deck Air Compressor Over Current
• No 1, 2 HFO Purifier Over Current • LO Transfer Pump Over Current • Deck Air Compressor Low Insulation
• No 1, 2 HFO Purifier Low Insulation • LO Transfer Pump Low Insulation • №1 Main Air Compressor wear of rings & valves
• HFO Purifier 1, 2 Feed Pump Break • Sludge Pump Short Circuit • №2 Main Air Compressor wear of rings & valves
• HFO Purifier 1, 2 Ejection Monitor Level High • Sludge Pump Short Circuit • №1 Main Air Compressor Motor Fault
• HFO Purifier 1, 2 Motor Break • Sludge Pump Short Circuit • №2 Main Air Compressor Motor Fault
• HFO Purifier 1, 2 High Vibration • ME PORT (STBD) Gear Driven Gear Box Pump Breakdown
Deck Compressor
2.10.5. LO Purifiers LOP • ME PORT (STBD) Priming Gear Box Pump Breakdown
• Deck Compressor Motor Break
• No 1, 2 LO Purifier Short Circuit 2.10.9. FO Transfer Pumps LOP • Deck Compressor wear of rings & valves
• No 1, 2 LO Purifier Over Current • MDO Transfer Pump Breakdown 2.11.2. Thermal Oil Heater LOP
• No 1, 2 LO Purifier Low Insulation • HFO Transfer Pump 1 Breakdown
• Thermal Oil Heater Short Circuit
• ME PORT (STBD) LO Purifier Motor Break • HFO Transfer Pump 2 Breakdown
• Thermal Oil Heater Low Insulation
• ME PORT (STBD) LO Purifier Ejection Monitor Level High
• ME PORT (STBD) LO Purifier High Vibration 2.10.10. CPP ME PORT (STBD) LOP • Thermal Oil Boiler FO Pump 1, 2 Breakdown
• ME PORT (STBD) CPP Pump 1 Breakdown • Thermal Oil Heater Flame Out
• ME PORT (STBD) LO Purifier Feed Pump Break
• ME PORT (STBD) CPP Pump 2 Breakdown • Thermal Oil Heater Fan Breakdown
2.10.6. FO Pumps LOP • Thermal Oil Heater Leakage
• HFO Feed Pump 1 Breakdown 2.10.11. EM’CY Fire Pump LOP • Thermal Oil Heater Flange open
• HFO Feed Pump 1 Wear • EM’CY Fire Pump Short Circuit • Thermal Oil ECO PORT Leakage
• EM’CY Fire Pump Over Current

213
Page AER
• Thermal Oil ECO STBD Leakage • Air in PC System 1, 2

2.12. Page AER
• Thermal Oil Circ Pump 1, 2 Breakdown • PC Condenser 1, 2 fouling
• Thermal Oil Circ Pump 1, 2 Wear • PC System 1, 2 Ref. Leakage 2.12.1. Generator Engine 1 LOP
• PID Controller ECO PORT (STBD) Breakdown • PC Compressor 1, 2 Oil Leakage • No 1 G/E LO Priming Pump Short Circuit
• TOH Temp. Controller Breakdown - No Signal • PC Compressor 1, 2 Thermostat Fault • Aux. Engine LO Temperature Control Valve Failure
• Thermal Oil Heater Coil Fouling • Water in PC System 1, 2 • No 1 G/E LO Priming Pump Over Current
• ECO PORT (STBD) Coil Fouling • Cold Room “Fish” Thermo Expansion V-v Fault • No 1 G/E LO Priming Pump Low Insulation
• Thermal Oil Heater Coil Heat Conductivity Degradation • Cold Room “Fish” Fouling Coat of Snow • No 1 G/E HT St-By Pump Short Circuit
• ECO PORT (STBD) Coil Heat Conductivity Degradation • Cold Room “Meat” Thermo Expansion V-v Fault • No 1 G/E HT St-By Pump Over Current
• Cold Room “Meat” Fouling Coat of Snow
2.11.3. Chilled Plant • No 1 G/E HT St-By Pump Low Insulation
• Cool Room “Butter” Thermo Expansion V-v Fault • No 1 G/E LT St-By Pump Short Circuit
• SW Pump 1, 2 Chilled System Failure
• Cool Room “Fruit” Thermo Expansion V-v Fault • No 1 G/E LT St-By Pump Over Current
• FW Pump 1, 2 Chilled System Failure
• Cool Room “Vegetable” Thermo Expansion V-v Fault • No 1 G/E LT St-By Pump Low Insulation
• HVAC Compressor 1, 2 Oil Leakage
• Cool Room “Dry Provision” Thermo Expansion V-v Fault • No 1 G/E Preheater Unit Short Circuit
• HVAC Compressor 1, 2 OverLoad
• HVAC FW Low Temperature 2.11.7. Fresh Water Generator • No 1 G/E Preheater Unit Over Current
• No 1 G/E Preheater Unit Low Insulation
• HVAC Compressor 1, 2 High Outlet Pressure • FWG Ejector Pump Short Circuit
• HVAC Compressor 1, 2 Low Inlet Pressure • FWG Ejector Pump Over Current 2.12.2. Generator Engine 2 LOP
• FWG Ejector Pump Low Insulation
2.11.4. TOH Circ Pumps LOP Faults for Generator Engine 2 are similar to Gen Engine 1.
• Fresh Water Generator Short Circuit
• No 1, 2 Thermal Fluid Circ. Pump Short Circuit
• Fresh Water Generator Over Current 2.12.3. Generator Engine 3 LOP
• No 1, 2 Thermal Fluid Circ. Pump Over Current
• Fresh Water Generator Low Insulation Faults for Generator Engine 3 are similar to Gen Engine 1.
• No 1, 2 Thermal Fluid Circ. Pump Low Insulation
• Vacuum Failure
2.11.5. HPP for RO-RO LOP • Heating Failure 2.12.4. Bilge Ballast Pumps LOP
• Condenser Fouling • Bilge Pump Short Circuit
• No 1, 2, 3 HPU Hoist Pump Short Circuit
• Bilge Pump Over Current
• No 1, 2, 3 HPU Hoist Pump Low Insulation 2.11.8. Oily Water Separator • Bilge Pump Low Insulation
2.11.6. Provision Plant LOP • Oily Water Separator Heater Failure • Heeling Pump Short Circuit
• High Oil Content in Dirty Water Tank • Heeling Pump Over Current
• Provision Plant Short Circuit
• Provision Plant Low Insulation • Heeling Pump Low Insulation

214
Page BTR
• No 1, 2, 3 Bilge and Fire Pump Failure 2.12.7. Fin Stab PORT LOP 2.13.2. FF Pumps LOP
• No 1, 2, 3 Bilge and Fire Pump Wear
• Fin Stab Port Main Pump Short Circuit • Sprinkler Pump Failure
• Bilge Pump Failure
• Fin Stab Port Main Pump Over Current • Sprinkler Pump Wear
• Bilge Pump Wear
• Fin Stab Port Main Pump Low Insulation • Sprinkler Pump Short Circuit
2.12.5. Sewage Treatment Plant • Fin Stab Port EM’CY Pump Short Circuit • Water Fog Pump Failure
• Sewage Treatment Plant Short Circuit • Fin Stab Port EM’CY Pump Over Current • Sprinkler Pump Over Current
• Sewage Treatment Plant Low Insulation • Fin Stab Port EM’CY Pump Low Insulation • Water Fog Pump Wear
• Sprinkler Pump Low Insulation
• SWT Orifice Plate fouling 2.12.8. Fin Stab STBD LOP
• Vacuum Failure • Water Fog Pump Short Circuit
• Fin Stab Stbd Main Pump Short Circuit
• High Level Vacuum Collection Units • Water Fog Pump Over Current
• Fin Stab Stbd Main Pump Over Current
• Motor M1 Overload • Water Fog Pump Low Insulation
• Fin Stab Stbd Main Pump Low Insulation
• SWT Surge Tank V1 High Level • Drenching Pump Short Circuit
• Fin Stab Stbd EM’CY Pump Short Circuit
• SWT High Temperature • Drenching Pump Over Current
• Fin Stab Stbd EM’CY Pump Over Current
• SWT Low Salinity • Drenching Pump Low Insulation
• Fin Stab Stbd EM’CY Pump Low Insulation
• Drenching Pump Failure
2.12.6. Incinerator LOP
2.13. Page BTR • Drenching Pump Wear
• Incinerator Control Pane Short Circuit
• Waste Oil Tank Control Panel Short Circuit 2.13.1. Bow Thruster LOP 2.14. Page FFR
• Inc. WO Sett. TK Mill Pump Failure
• Bow Thruster Short Circuit 2.14.1. Foam Pump Starter
• Inc. WO Serv. TK Mill Pump Failure
• Bow Thruster Over Current
• Foam Tank Unit Pump Short Circuit
• Inc. MDO Feed. Pump Failure
• Bow Thruster Low Insulation
• Foam Tank Unit Pump Over Current
• Incinerator Exhaust Gas Fan Failure
• Hyd. Power Pack For Bow Thruster Short Circuit
• Foam Tank Unit Pump Failure
• Inc. MDO Supply Pump Failure
• Hyd. Power Pack For Bow Thruster Over Current
• Foam Tank Unit Pump Low Insulation
• Incinerator Primery Burner Failure
• Hyd. Power Pack For Bow Thruster Low Insulation
• Inc. WO Dosing Pump Failure
• Bow Thruster HP Pump Failure 2.15. EmG
• Incinerator Sludge Burner Failure
• Bow Thruster HP System Oil Leakage
• Incinerator Furnace Temp. Controller Failure
• Bow Thruster Shaft Jamming
2.15.1. ESB consumers
• Incinerator Exhaust Gas Temp. Controller Failure
• Bow Thruster Load Control Failure EM’CY Group Starter Panel
• Bow Thruster Control System Failure • No 2 ER Fan Short Circuit

215
EmG
• No 2 ER Fan Over Current • No2 EM’CY Lighting Distrib Board Low Insulation • EM’CY Gen. Space Heater Short Circuit
• No 2 ER Fan Low Insulation • Bridge Control Console (B.C.C. AC 220V Power D.B.) ESB • EM’CY Gen. Space Heater Low Insulation
• EM’CY Gen Room Sup. Fan Short Circuit Feeder Short Circuit • Foam Room Exh. Fan Starter Short Circuit
• EM’CY Gen Room Sup. Fan Over Current • Bridge Control Console (B.C.C. AC 220V Power D.B.) ESB • Foam Room Exh. Fan Starter Low Insulation
Feeder Low Insulation
• EM’CY Gen Room Sup. Fan Low Insulation • No 3 Gen. Space Heater Short Circuit
• Engine Control Console (E.C.C. AC 220V Power D.B.) ESB
• SG Room Sup. Fan Short Circuit • No 3 Gen. Space Heater Low Insulation
Feeder Short Circuit
• SG Room Sup. Fan Over Current • Safety Station Bilge Control Panel ESB Feeder Short Circuit
• Engine Control Console (E.C.C. AC 220V Power D.B.) ESB
• SG Room Sup. Fan Low Insulation Feeder Low Insulation • Safety Station Bilge Control Panel ESB Feeder Low
• CO2 Room Exh. Fan Short Circuit Insulation
• Watertight Doors Control Panel Short Circuit
• CO2 Room Exh. Fan Over Current • Drenching Main Control Panel ESB Feeder Short Circuit
• Watertight Doors Control Panel Low Insulation
• CO2 Room Exh. Fan Low Insulation • Drenching Main Control Panel ESB Feeder Low Insulation
• Fire Main Control Panel ESB Feeder Short Circuit
AC440V EM’CY Feeder Panel • Fire Main Control Panel ESB Feeder Low Insulation 2.15.2. EM’CY G/E Set Battery Charger
• Navigation Equipment Short Circuit • Telegraph Short Circuit • EM’CY Gen Set Battery fault Low Capacity
• Navigation Equipment Low Insulation • Telegraph Low Insulation
• Radio Equipment Short Circuit • Life Boat Battery Short Circuit 2.15.3. EM’CY Generator Panel
• Radio Equipment Low Insulation • Life Boat Battery Low Insulation • EM’CY Gen ACB Spring Charge Motor Failure
• Whistle Relay Box Short Circuit • Life and Rescue Boat Battery Short Circuit • ESB Side Bus Tie ACB Spring Charge Motor Failure
• Whistle Relay Box Low Insulation • Life and Rescue Boat Battery Low Insulation
2.15.4. EM’CY Gen Engine LOP
AC220V EM’CY Feeder Panel • GMDSS Console Short Circuit
• FW Coller Fouling Cool Water Coller Fouling
• Nav Lighting Control Panel On B.C.C.EMSB Feeder Short • GMDSS Console Low Insulation
• EM’CY Gen. Engine LO Cooler Fouling
Circuit • Water Fog Main Control Panel ESB Feeder Short Circuit
• EM’CY Gen. Engine LO Pump Wear
• Nav Lighting Control Panel On B.C.C. MSB Feeder Low • Water Fog Main Control Panel ESB Feeder Low Insulation
Insulation • EM’CY Gen. Engine LO Pump Failure
• ME Bearing Monitoring Panel Short Circuit
• Nav Instrument Control Panel In B.C.C. ESB Feeder Short • EM’CY Gen. Engine Cool Water Pump Wear
• ME Bearing Monitoring Panel Low Insulation
Circuit • EM’CY Gen. Engine Cool Water Pump Failure
• EM’CY Engine Coolant Heater Short Circuit
• Nav Instrument Control Panel In B.C.C. ESB Feeder Low
Insulation
• EM’CY Engine Coolant Heater Low Insulation 2.15.5. Shore Supply Panel
• CO2 Alarm Panel ESB Feeder Short Circuit • Shore Supply fault Incorrect Phase Sequence
• No1 EM’CY Lighting Distrib Board Short Circuit
• CO2 Alarm Panel ESB Feeder Low Insulation • Shore Supply fault Phase Break
• No1 EM’CY Lighting Distrib Board Low Insulation
• Intreface Unit for Signal Light Column Short Circuit
• No2 EM’CY Lighting Distrib Board Short Circuit
• Intreface Unit for Signal Light Column Low Insulation

216
EmG
2.15.6. Battery Charger and Discharger • EM’CY Lighting C-Deck Short Circuit
• EM’CY Lighting C-Deck Low Insulation
• Battery Charger Fuse 1 To Blow
• EM’CY Lighting Engine Room Short Circuit
• Battery Charger Fuse 2 To Blow
• EM’CY Lighting Engine Room Low Insulation
• Battery fault Low Capacity
• EM’CY Lighting Upper Deck Short Circuit
• Bridge Control Console BCD Feeder Short Circuit
• EM’CY Lighting Upper Deck Low Insulation
• Bridge Control Console BCD Feeder Low Insulation
• MSB Synchronizing Panel Short Circuit
• ME Port Control Short Circuit
• MSB Synchronizing Panel Low Insulation
• ME Port Control Low Insulation
• General Alarm Short Circuit
• Engine Control Console BCD Feeder Short Circuit
• General Alarm Low Insulation
• Engine Control Console BCD Feeder Low Insulation
• Fire Detection Short Circuit
• EM’CY Lighting Wheel House Short Circuit
• Fire Detection Low Insulation
• EM’CY Lighting Wheel House Low Insulation
• CO2 Alarm fault BCD Feeder Short Circuit
• EM’CY Lighting A-Deck Short Circuit
• CO2 Alarm fault BCD Feeder Low Insulation
• EM’CY Lighting A-Deck Low Insulation
• No 1 G/E Control Panel Short Circuit
• EM’CY Lighting B-Deck Short Circuit
• No 1 G/E Control Panel Low Insulation
• EM’CY Lighting B-Deck Low Insulation
• ME Stbd Control Short Circuit
• No 2 G/E Control Panel Low Insulation
• ME Stbd Control Low Insulation
• Navigation Lighting Control Panel On B.C.C. BCD Feeder
Short Circuit • No 3 G/E Control Panel Low Insulation
• Navigation Lighting Control Panel On B.C.C. BCD Feeder

Low Insulation
• EM’CY Navigation Instrument Dist. Board In B.C.C. Feeder
Short Circuit
• EM’CY Navigation Instrument Dist. Board In B.C.C. Feeder
Low Insulation

217

Ers 5000 Techsim Man Diesel 32/40 Twin Medium Speed Engine + CPP - Ro-Pax Ferry

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ers 5000 Techsim Man Diesel 32/40 Twin Medium Speed Engine + CPP - Ro-Pax Ferry

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ERS 5000 TechSim

MAN Diesel 32/40 Twin Medium Speed Engine

MAN Diesel 32/40 Twin Medium

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

Transas MIP Ltd. — October 2014

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

1. Printing House Conventions E/S

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

Ship general characteristics:

Ro-Pax ferry general view

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

űű SG – Steering Gear room page; • G2 – Generator 2 upper and lower panels;

űű EmG – Emergency Generator room page. • EG – Emergency Generator LOP panel;

Bottom bar of the Propulsion console

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

4.2. Unified System Diagram

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

5. General Controls in Simulator 5.2. Viscosity Controller

The descriptions of GSP, general pump LOP and Thermocon-

5.1. SET-DIFF Controllers

The figure displays a general view of the controller, which can

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant

Transas MIP Ltd. — October 2014

Chapter 1. Propulsion Plant

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

1. Introduction 1.1. Propulsion Plant Control Principles

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

2. PP Remote Control from Bridge

2.1. Propulsion Control from Bridge

2.1.1. Propulsion Control Panel

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

3. PP Remote Control from ECR

Common Operations Controls

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

4. Main Diesel Engine

Тype MAN B&W Marine 8L 32/40

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

4.3. Operating ME from 3D Page

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

4.4. ME Bearings Monitoring Panel

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

4.5. ME Turning Gear Panel

The panel TURNING GEAR ME Port contains:

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

5. Cylinder Indicator Screen Content

5.1. Analyzing • Dynamics of fuel injection.

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

5.3. Exhaust Gases Emission Panel

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System

Transas MIP Ltd. — October 2014

Chapter 2. Control and Monitoring System

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved

1. Introduction 1.1.1. Layout

Top panel of the CMS display

Bottom panel of the CMS display

Transas MIP Ltd. © All rights reserved